JP7313981B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine that performs a change effect of a meter after action of a role product, and the degree of change of the meter after the action of the role product differs depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed before the action of the role product (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-7755 A

However, the amusement of the game was insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a special effect and capable of executing the special effect and the change effect;
a movable body operably provided;
a detection means capable of detecting the action of a player;
a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
promotional effect execution means capable of executing a promotional effect that promotes the action of the player;
an action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect based on the detection result of the detection means;
a variable display effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined variable display effect during execution of the variable display,
The correspondence display means can display the correspondence display in one of a plurality of display modes,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode,
The variable-display effect executing means can execute the variable-display effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode,
The effect during variable display is executed by the special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the corresponding display,
The promotion effect is executed by the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the effect during variable display,
Controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the production mode of the promotion production,
The display mode of the corresponding display changes at a different rate according to the effect mode of the variable display effect,
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The first change effect is
It is a production that is executed during variable display,
It is a production corresponding to the special production,
It is an effect executed before the special effect,
The second change effect is
It is a production that does not correspond to the special production,
A production that is executed during the advantageous state,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode, which are different from each other,
The production executing means is
a special effect of notifying a first content advantageous to the player in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to the specific mode by executing the first change effect;
a predetermined effect of notifying a second content advantageous to the player different from the first content by changing the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change performance;
a specific effect using the movable body in which at least a part of the effect mode is common between when the first change effect is executed and when the second change effect is executed;
an effect production that enhances the production effect of the specific production in response to the execution of the specific production,
When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the first predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect, and when the special effect is performed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect, the advantage of the first content notified by the special effect is different,
The effect performance executed corresponding to the execution of the specific performance accompanying the execution of the first change performance and the effect performance executed corresponding to the execution of the specific performance accompanying the execution of the second change performance are different in at least a part of performance modes.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the other gaming machine is a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that performs a variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is provided with an effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means provides a predetermined display (e.g., meter of meter gauge unit 026 SHMTG) in a first situation (e.g., during reach fluctuation) 13-8, etc., the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.), and the display mode of the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (e.g., the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.). In a second situation different from the first situation (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH, an interval period of a big win gaming state, etc.), the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, the total number of prize balls display 026SH130, the number of rounds display 026SH106, etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls by the small win, the number of rounds is increased by 1, etc.). A predetermined effect (for example, a total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., a round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. For example, when the meter effect etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, the total number of winning balls update effect etc.) is executed, a specific effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common (for example, a character effect that moves the movable body 026SH32 shown in Figs. and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation have a common effect mode (for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) is displayed instead of the total number of winning balls update image 026SHKSEF). A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.), corresponding display means capable of displaying corresponding displays corresponding to the variable display (e.g., active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.), promotional effect execution means capable of executing a promotional effect for promoting the action of the player (e.g., effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, etc.), and action effect based on the detection result of the detecting means. Executable action effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of variable display effect processing) and variable display effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of variable display effect processing) capable of executing a predetermined variable display effect during execution of variable display. For example, the corresponding display can be displayed in any one of the display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4), and the promotion effect execution means can execute the promotion effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3) (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3). Using the display image 87 AKE3 "Gekietsu! ! (such as messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3)), the variable display effect is executed in the predetermined mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the corresponding display (see, for example, cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 18-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at different rates according to the effect mode of the variable display effect. is executed (for example, refer to the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 according to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 18-13), and the advantageous state is controlled at a different rate according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see, for example, the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 according to the variable display result in FIGS. 18-13).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved. Also, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest. Also, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above is provided with state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling the game state into an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state, etc.) advantageous to the player, a special state (e.g., small win game state, etc.) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (e.g., second KT state, etc.) that is easily controlled to the special state. The game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH, etc.), and the effect execution means changes the display mode of the specific display (for example, total prize ball number display 026SH130, etc.) in response to the game medium passing through the predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state as the predetermined effect (for example, adds the number of prize balls resulting from the small win). to notify the second content (for example, the total number of prize balls).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved in a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled to the special state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the specific effect may be an effect of operating a movable object for effect (for example, movable object 026SH32, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by using the movable body for presentation.

(4) In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.), and is provided with effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing effects. 14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 (right side), etc.), a special effect informing the player of a first content (e.g., development to super reach, etc.) that is advantageous to the player in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to a specific mode (e.g., the meter value is "4 (MAX)," the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.), and a specific display different from the predetermined display (e.g., the total number of winning balls display 026SH1). 30, round number display 026SH106, etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small winning prize is added, the number of rounds is increased by 1, etc.), and a predetermined effect (for example, the total prize ball number update image 026SHKS shown in FIG. A specific effect (for example, the movable body 026 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B)) in which at least a part of the effect mode is common between when the change effect (for example, the meter effect, etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, the total prize ball number update effect, etc.) is executed. Character production etc. for operating SH32) is executed.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(5) In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a change effect in response to execution of a specific effect, and the change effect is a first change effect (for example, the meter effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.) and a specific display different from the predetermined display (e.g., total prize pitches display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.). 2EF02), and the effect executing means executes a special effect to inform the player of a first content (e.g., development to super reach) in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to a specific mode (e.g., the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.) by executing the first change effect, and the display mode of the specific display is changed by executing the second change effect. It is characterized in that the second contents (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the number of total prize balls), the progress to the next round, etc.) that are changed and different from the first contents and are advantageous to the player are notified.

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (6) to (13). Conventionally, in gaming machines, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504, the degree of expectation for a big hit varies depending on the mode of display and production. In such a game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win only differs depending on the mode of display and performance when operated by the player, and there is a risk that it may be difficult to appropriately raise the player's expectation through performance. In view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can appropriately raise the player's sense of expectation through performance and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine (6) is a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. 7AKB2, etc.), promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that promotes the action of the player (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the variable display effect process), action effect execution means that can execute an action effect based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process, etc.), and variable display effect that can execute a predetermined variable display effect during execution of variable display. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of variable display effect processing, etc.), said corresponding display means can display said corresponding display in one of a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, etc.) including a specific mode (for example, red display using display image 87AKC4), and said promotion effect execution means can display a special mode (for example, display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3), and the variable display effect executing means can perform the variable display in any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, a message in response to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including a predetermined mode (for example, a message "Gekietsu!!" using the display image 87AKE3). A medium effect can be executed, and the effect during variable display is executed in the predetermined mode at a different rate depending on the display mode of the corresponding display (see, for example, the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 18-12), the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the variable display effect (see, for example, the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 18-13), and depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, It is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios (see, for example, determination example 87AK51 of promotion effect according to variable display results in FIGS. 18-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the effect during variable display may be executed by the effect during variable display after the corresponding display is displayed by the corresponding display means and before the action effect is executed by the action effect execution means (see, for example, FIG. 18-9 (B3)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the effect during variable display (for example, during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 18-9 (B3)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) to (8), it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of presentation modes the variable display effect is executed (for example, when any of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) to (9), the display mode of the corresponding display may not be changed in response to the case where the display mode of the corresponding display is the specific mode (for example, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern) before the performance during the variable display is executed by the effect execution means during the variable display.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player may be provided, and the correspondence display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(12) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) to (11) may include setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the effect during variable display may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(13) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) to (12) may include setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6) that can be set to one of a plurality of set values that differ in the degree of advantage for the player, and the promotion performance may be executed in one of a plurality of performance modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means (for example, the promotion performance determination example 87AK6 in FIG. 18-16). 1, etc.).
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately heighten the player's sense of anticipation through the presentation, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the character object control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 052IW. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characterizing part 052IW; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flow chart which shows a role product control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during big-hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design process processing normally. It is a flowchart which shows normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal design stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flowchart which shows a suggestion production|presentation process at the time of over winning a prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining an over-winning suggestive effect; It is a flow chart which shows suggestion production processing at the time of small hit winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a suggestion production|presentation determination table at the time of small-hit winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows number-of-balls display suggestion production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table; It is a flow chart which shows prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number of prize balls emphasis effect determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a setting value suggestion effect; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production|presentation. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the game state after the big-hit game based on the characteristic part 020SH, and production mode. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production mode setting processing concerning feature part 020SH. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of display control processing corresponding to variable display according to the characteristic portion 020SH; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display compatible display; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production|presentation execution process which CPU120 for production|presentation control performs when it is controlled by the small hitting game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion production|presentation execution process which CPU120 for production|presentation control performs when it is controlled by the small hitting game state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestive effects; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change production|presentation execution process of the display corresponding to variable display which the production|presentation control CPU120 performs during a variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the production|presentation screen in small-hit RUSH mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of effects for changing the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of a false effect of the effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a set value suggesting effect during the chance time mode; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of probability variation suggestion production|presentation in chance time mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a small hit release timing and execution timing of various suggestive effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the game state after a jackpot game in the characteristic part 022SH, and production mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the jackpot classification determination table of characteristic part 022SH. It is a flow chart showing an example of a bonus/rush icon control process at the start of a big win. It is a flow chart showing an example of a bonus rush icon control process during a round game. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a bonus/rush icon control process during an ending period; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the normal mode to the small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of transition of the production|presentation screen of small-hit RUSH mode -> chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect|presentation screen in case a small-hit RUSH mode continues. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus/rush icon control processing in variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of effect screens when changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon during variable display; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of the effect screen according to Modification 1 when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed; It is an explanatory view explaining the configuration of a part of the game board 2 of the game machine according to the characteristic part 026SH. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a meter effect executed in the gaming machine according to the characteristic portion 026SH. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a special design and a decoration design in the gaming machine based on the characteristic part 026SH. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a meter effect and the like; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a meter effect and the like; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 026SH. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining background effects and the like; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining active display effects and the like; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process in the pachinko game machine based on the characteristic part 026SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 026SH. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on the characteristic part 026SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern determination. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an active display and an example of suggestive effects; It is a figure which shows the cut-in production example and the promotion production example. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production decision processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a final display image; It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a change pattern, etc. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination regarding suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of cut-in production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characterizing portion 87AK; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of determination of an promotion effect related to a characteristic portion 88AK; It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation based on characteristic part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the promotion production|presentation used as a modification. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided for variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 is provided for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the respective ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second reserved display area 5B for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure are provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

A first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first suspension display 25A displays the number of first suspension storage according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the number of second storage storage according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a line 19 of nails is provided on the right side of the first starting prize winning opening, and is constructed so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. As described above, the row of nails 19 for preventing the entry of the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area is provided, so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening only when the game ball is shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed operation).

In this example, a case is shown in which the game ball can win in the first start winning hole only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first start winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves forward and backward a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of a flow path through which game balls flow down, thereby changing a large prize opening located below the bottom member into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. A special variable winning ball device 7 executes opening control to open a big winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from a closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to a closed state in a jackpot game state which occurs when a specific display result (big winning pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for small winning and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided, and as shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-like bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down is moved back and forth in the front-rear direction to change the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win. A special variable winning ball device 17 executes opening control to open a special winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from a closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to a closed state in a small winning game state generated when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B executes opening control to open the second start winning opening serving as a winning area by moving the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved to the closed state when the symbol is drawn out and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20.例文帳に追加

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in a manner slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball falling on the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 when the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. Therefore, the game balls on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are closed. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other. Therefore, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is opened, the game ball that falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B without entering the special variable winning ball device 7 enters the second starting winning port and the game ball flows toward the special variable winning ball device 17. not. On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. In this example, the regulation pieces are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B, so that the game balls flowing down from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction are changed so that the game balls meander with the movement of the forward and backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. In this sense, it can be said that the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass (enter) the big winning hole to get the prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass (enter) the special winning hole opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning hole, but more winning balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole 1 and the second starting winning hole. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special prize winning port is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special prize winning port to obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) are provided on the right side of the game area.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In the pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area, but even when the big win symbols are derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area because the state shifts to a big win game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operating handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a first special symbol game is started by a first special symbol display device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big winning symbol, for example, "7", actual symbols differ depending on the type of big winning to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (the number of rounds and an upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and the game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special-figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating the special-figure) than in the normal state (time-saving state), and control (high open control, high-base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning port is also executed by improving the probability of becoming a “permanent hit” in the general game than in the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state and the high base state are continued until any one of end conditions such as execution of a special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big winning game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after turning on the power, such as when the system is reset).

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big winning symbol, for example, '7', the actual symbol differs depending on the type of big winning, which will be described later)) is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a 'big win', and when a predetermined special symbol different from the big winning pattern (a small winning pattern, for example, '2') is stopped and displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, it may be performed by outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or turning on/off the frame LED 9, operating the movable body 32, and the like.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started corresponding to the start of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24)), and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the large winning gate door, and the solenoid 83 for the special winning gate.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and an LED signal (a signal that designates the lighting/lighting-out mode of the LED) to the LED control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. Based on the LED signal, the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are driven, and the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on/off in a manner specified by the LED signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may execute sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of a sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the restoration time from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution of the first special symbol game, management of suspension, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the role product control process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the control of the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the role product control process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine, is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the start prize to the first start prize winning port, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a starting prize to the first starting prize winning port occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including big win type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored in a first reserve storage buffer provided in a RAM 102 as reserve information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After the reservation information and the first reservation memory number are stored, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating the determination result such as generation of start winning, first reservation memory number, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to the performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the first special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big winning symbol, a small winning symbol and a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". This first variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, processing of measuring elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the first special symbol variation processing is terminated.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, when the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed and the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variation display of the second special symbol may result in a small win and may be controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (specifically, determines whether the value of the second special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small winning pre-opening processing to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is being performed, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing, and if the small winning game is not being performed, the first special figure process. The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary may be interrupted (updating of the timer is interrupted).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special pattern is interrupted in the normal state, the interruption period of the variable display of the first special pattern becomes long, and when the difference between the execution period of the variable display of the first special pattern and the interruption period becomes large, the interruption period needs to be absorbed by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in a performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period may be shortened compared to the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, a game ball can easily win a prize in the small winning control, and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed. In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". The first special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big win", setting processing for starting the big win game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small win game is performed. And, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state is controlled, and when the number cut is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, when the second special symbol variation process is started and the second special symbol is being displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol may result in a small win and may be controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small winning game is in progress (specifically, determines whether the value of the first special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small winning pre-opening process to the small winning end process), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process, and if the small winning game is not in progress, the second special figure process. The value of the flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special pattern is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special pattern, and the variable display of the second special pattern is resumed after the small winning game is finished. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to vary may be interrupted (updating of the timer is interrupted).

Incidentally, regarding the small-hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small-hit fanfare period and the small-hit ending period may be varied according to the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this role product control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the role product control process flag provided in the RAM 102 . In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the role product control process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The role product control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big win game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big win game is performed, the processing for starting the big win game is performed and the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the role product control process flag is "2". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing is completed.

The process during jackpot opening in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". This process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole, and a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, etc., the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "4". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the rounds does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the character object control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the character object control process flag is updated to "5". When the value of the role product control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "5". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period for executing an ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control, KT control and high base control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This processing during the opening of the small prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after the special winning port is opened and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative luminous bodies such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and to output a command (electrical signal) to the LED control board 14 to turn on the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/lighting/blinking. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when a command designating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and a waiting time for receiving the command elapses, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, an production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 is connected to the first start switch 22A and the second start switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 mainly has a function of setting random numbers used in a special game, a function of inputting signals from switches or the like arranged at predetermined positions, a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, and a function of outputting various information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main board 11 also has a function of controlling variable display of predetermined display symbols, such as controlling the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of the respective LEDs (for example, segment LEDs) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 by performing lighting/extinguishing/coloring control of the normal symbol display device 20.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 also has a function of displaying various prize winning information. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 is equipped with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as a switch circuit 110 for taking in various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal and transmitting them to the game control microcomputer 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

9-3, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the front when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) tallies the number of game balls entering each winning hole (large winning hole, second starting winning hole, first starting winning hole, first to fourth general winning holes, hereinafter also referred to as "entering area"), and displays various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios based on the counting on the display monitor 21TM029. You can check various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios later. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, are provided on the lower right side of the back of the power board. A store clerk or the like of the game parlor operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037 and the like is supplied with a predetermined operating voltage. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened, and can be operated only by a store clerk possessing a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key, but it may be a switch that can perform the switching operation and also perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a push operation).

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the staff of the game arcade or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game parlor clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so it is possible to prevent the game parlor or the like from leaving the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging the game ball that has entered each winning port or the game ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. In the nozzle, a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting the game ball discharged from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting the game ball that has been shot) is provided. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main substrate 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is connected with a game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 having a game machine frame open sensor for detecting opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2 and a door frame open sensor for detecting opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable. It also has functions. The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, ie, so-called ball bite. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 stops the ball payout process when the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball is out or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the ball is full.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low level full tank signal to the shooting board 21TM090 to stop the ball shooting from the ball shooting device. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 and serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 exchange (transmit and receive) signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) in order to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) notifying that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by adding specific data to the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, specific data is exchanged between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and transmits the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball payout by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a prescribed error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, ball running out, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing prescribed bits of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. - 特許庁

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal board (including the frame external terminal board and the board external terminal board) 21TM160 via the output port 21TM372b. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 9B.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing to turn on/off is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 from the interface board 21TM066 in accordance with the operation of the player. Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) are transmitted and received through the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to pay out a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drops the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC 24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, thereby preventing a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage from being supplied to the card unit 21TM050.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 9-4A to 9-4F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, when the variable special symbol designating buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the probability of winning the big hit is lower (1/300) than when the setting values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3". When the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4". When the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the special symbol is a big win (big win A to big win F) when the value of MR1 matches one of the winning judgment values corresponding to the big wins shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table may be provided separately, and the determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Fig. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which a "sunny" mode ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, Fig. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which a "cloudy" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and Fig. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which a "rainy" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is finished. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on a performance control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, characters (characters of "BONUS end") for notifying the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed on the image display device 5 as well as an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the stored set values.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), if the configuration specified by the configuration command is "1,2" or "3,4", or "5,6", the constitution of the setting suggestions is determined in the "sunny" embodiment shown in FIG. 9-5 (1). The judgment value in the case of determining a embodiment, and when the "rain" embodiment shown in FIG. 9-5 (3) is determined.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), decides to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (for example, 40%), and "rainy" shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute a mode setting suggestion effect (ending effect). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%), determines to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and executes the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (3) at a medium rate (for example, 30%). It is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a high rate (eg 50%), decides to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (eg 20%), and executes the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium rate (eg 30%) in the "rainy" mode shown in (3). It is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggesting performance different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in the mode in which the setting suggesting performance is executed, and the amusement of the setting suggesting performance can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending performance executed when the jackpot game state ends, and especially expects the ending performance to be executed in a ``sunny'' mode.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5 (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. Setting value 0 in this example corresponds to setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, setting value 1 in this example corresponds to setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, setting value 2 in this example corresponds to setting value 3 shown in FIG. This corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value (0 in this example) with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of game state), and when the value is 1, it indicates that it is decided to execute RAM clear. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or may be performed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated as described later.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, and when it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the window frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

In the case where the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 outputs to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open (that is, if the game control microcomputer 100 is equipped with the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100, upon input of these detection signals, The open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES at step S21TM4010), the setting value is a normal value (YES at step S21TM4020), and no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S2). YES in 1TM4070), the setting value can be changed and/or confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to set a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state; and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the judgment processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, it can shift to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which setting values can be confirmed. In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later, under the condition that the RAM clear flag is set based on (3) that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES).

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the setting value is provided on the back side of the game board 2 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is a possibility that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that the set value is being checked or changed by some illegal means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of setting values in such a state, in this embodiment, when the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled neither in the setting confirmation mode nor in the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Also, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is damaged, NO is determined in step S21TM4010, and the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change mode is controlled based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Further, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), but the normal values (0 to 5) are not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) are satisfied, and the setting change mode is controlled. . Also, if the setting change mode was set when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled on the basis that the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later) are satisfied.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130).

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 is executed.

On the other hand, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized at step S21TM4120 (NO at step S21TM4120), that is, if both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, and if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), step S21TM4140. When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in ON state (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command indicating that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal to the effect control CPU 120 without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, it displays a message saying "the set value may be abnormal". Further, the effect control CPU 120 makes the image display device 5 temporarily turn off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off), and then when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on), it shifts to a setting change mode and performs an operation for changing the set value (fixes the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029. not being done" (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.).

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms wait, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, it is possible to specify the possibility that a predetermined event (in this example, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not started despite the possibility that the setting value is not a regular value (0 to 5)) has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer.

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the result of checking the data in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if the power is interrupted during the setting change (that is, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state, and the normal game should not be played. Before proceeding to technique processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), three conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to shift to a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value is not permitted to be changed, so that the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to a regular value, and the normal game processing cannot be performed. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the loop process described above (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. Therefore, the game arcade clerk or the like must turn off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. In this way, when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all satisfied when the power is turned on next time to shift to the setting change mode and fix the set value in the set value storage area to the normal value.

Incidentally, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to emit light in a predetermined power-off instruction mode, thereby prompting the power source to be turned off.

In this embodiment, if the setting change flag is not set (NO at step S21TM4030), two conditions are required: (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070), in order to set a state in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). .

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), even if two conditions are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) when it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) in step S21TM4140, the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) (step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0" with the lowest jackpot probability as the normal value in the set value storage area (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power supply interruption processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power interruption signal based on power interruption including unexpected power interruption is input, and when the power interruption signal is input, executes the power supply interruption processing immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the interruption of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620, or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the store clerk of the game parlor usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the store clerk of the game parlor may mistakenly recognize the actual set value. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the setting value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the setting value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM is not cleared after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command designating that the setting confirmation mode is set (step S21TM4650), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, if the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, or when the power was cut off last time), the set value stored in the set value storage area is 3, then the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed to 4→5→6→1→2→3→4. will be updated in this order.

Here, the current configuration value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560), and transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but transmission of the setting mode command (step S21TM4590) and the set value. If the new (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed, it is equivalent to the settings confirmation mode that can be confirmed or cannot change the set value. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

The setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag remains 0).

In addition, the state in which it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), as well as to execute the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140, and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or S21TM4150). control).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 may set a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag which can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off, and may clear the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 may set a setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off, and may clear the setting change mode command transmission flag when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when shifting to the normal game processing. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when it reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is executed as a common process regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (without determining which mode the control is in). Further, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also executed as a common process regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (without determining which mode the control is in). In this way, the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control, thereby simplifying the security signal output control and reducing the control load.

Further, by starting the output of the security signal in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and by stopping the output of the security signal in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode control is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set in the security signal timer for both the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. However, if both the security signal output start control and the output end control are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, it becomes difficult for the external device to grasp in which mode the control is performed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is set, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the value of the security signal timer is temporarily set to 1000 ms in step S21TM4710, and then, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the value of the security signal timer is reset to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM. (overwrite). That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is temporarily set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the final output stop timing of the security signal is the timing when 1 sec has passed since the setting confirmation mode was ended when the setting confirmation mode was controlled, and the timing when 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode has been finished when the setting change mode was controlled.

Specifically, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after the interruption is permitted, the output of the security signal continues until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and when it is controlled in the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds) , in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted, the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 30000 ms. In the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the security signal timer is kept from a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) to 0 ms, so that the output of the security signal is continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing may be performed.

In this manner, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec has passed after the control in the setting change mode is finished. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is possible to estimate that the initialization process may have been executed and the setting change mode was controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since the RAM is not cleared, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output processing, and the security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (whether or not an abnormality was detected at the time of power failure).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second, but the configuration is not limited to such a form, and the value of the security signal timer that is set first after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be at least a period that allows the external device to recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set at the time of power restoration (NO in step S21TM4030) when power failure occurs thereafter.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the setting value as 1 to 6, and if the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the image display device 5 on the CPU 120 side for performance control, the player may misunderstand the setting value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6) on the side of the performance control CPU 120, and the performance suggesting the setting value is executed within the range of the setting value 1 to 6.

In addition, not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the performance control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or by executing the performance suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command, the setting values can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), there is no power interruption during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM05 2 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040).

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal at the time of power-on, and after permitting the interruption, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) may be shifted to. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 does not execute RAM clearing based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, and transmits a backup command as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and shifts to normal game processing.

A performance control CPU 120 recognizes that recovery from power interruption is performed (RAM clear is not performed) based on data at the time of power supply stop based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, for example, can notify that recovery from power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed).

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is decided to execute RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (special pattern process flag, variable probability flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area storing each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for judging normal per symbol) is initialized to 0, but it may be initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that: (a) if the setting change mode was not controlled, the normal value was stored in the setting value storage area when the power was turned on (YES in step S21TM4020); 21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, for example, initial values are set to flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, and a special symbol process flag.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). A performance control CPU 120 recognizes that initialization processing has been performed based on the reception of this initialization command (RAM clearing has been performed without recovery from power interruption based on data at the time of power supply stop). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, initialization of the game state etc. has been performed (RAM clearing has been performed without performing recovery from power interruption based on data at the time of power supply stop).

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clearing. Further, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear without executing step S21TM4710 (without setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer remains 1 second set in step S21TM4710.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0.

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and the random number for determining whether or not it is a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit, and the random number update process for display is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value of a counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit. In the game control process for controlling the progress of the game described later (the process in which the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself, or the processing in which a command signal is sent to cause another microcomputer to control, or the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one cycle (between the minimum value and the maximum value of the normal per symbol determination random number) ), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) at step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 shifts to the processing at the time of power failure recovery without confirming whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). If it is determined that the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in a closed state (according to the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the power recovery process.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 proceeds to the power-on processing (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) without confirming whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (irrespective of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), but the process is not limited to such a form, and the step S21TM. If it is determined at 4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the power-on processing (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be performed.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode and initializing the game state (executing RAM clear). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode and not to initialize the game state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). As described above, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like.

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was cut off, so the setting value is in an unstable state, and there is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game parlor side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and enables control to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and outputs a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (game control timer interrupt processing is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, it is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode at the time of power failure.

9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 transmits a set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) and the game stop state (step S21TM4190) when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) are not satisfied based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). 1TM4200 to step S21TM4220), an error display is performed on the display monitor 21TM029 by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-10, each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter "E", thereby clearly notifying the game arcade clerk of the occurrence of an abnormality (possibility of power failure occurring while being controlled in the setting change mode). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays on the image display device 5 a message "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." to make a notification).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are met, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on. If it is determined to be in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), it is controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode") is not performed either.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) can notify that the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, that the setting value can be changed according to the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "Setting change mode is in progress" or a message "Please perform setting change operation to change the setting value". Thus, a store clerk or the like of the game parlor can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and after changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area to the planned setting value by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing by switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, if the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, if any of the above conditions (i) to (iii) is not satisfied, the game is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after transmitting the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) without being controlled to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the performance control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode") will also be performed.

In this way, when the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed and the message display on the performance control board 12 side ("Please turn on the power again after turning off the power to shift to the setting change mode"), it is informed that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not established after the power is restored as the state of the gaming machine even though the power was turned off during the setting change mode. . In this case, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. By operating a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to a planned set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to an OFF state to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a), when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, even though the power has been cut off during the setting change mode, the state cannot shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored. become. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating the possibility that the setting value may be abnormal depending on whether all of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied and when any of the transition conditions (i) to (iii) are not satisfied.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal and a command indicating that the mode has been transitioned to the setting change mode (or that the condition for transition is satisfied) is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command should cause the image display device 5 to display a message that "the set value may be abnormal" and a message that "it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode". On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the transition to the normal game process is performed, when the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (turned from the OFF state to the ON state). In response to the change from the F state to the ON state, a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the performance control board 12 (the performance control CPU 120) can specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and notify that effect, despite being controlled neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, a store clerk or the like in a game parlor can clearly grasp that an operation for changing a set value has been performed in spite of being controlled neither in the setting change mode nor in the setting confirmation mode, and can confirm whether or not any illegality has been carried out.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, it is possible not to transmit the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command without confirming whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated and whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. In this way, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced by not confirming the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value during the period when the normal game processing (timer interrupt processing for game control) is being executed.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES at step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON. state (YES in step S21TM4140), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode is entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without checking whether the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting change mode may be entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

In the processing shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM415) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. 0), is controlled to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570), and is not controlled to the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), which differs from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is shifted to, and the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power is cut off during the setting change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the three conditions of (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, control is forcibly set to the setting change mode.

In this way, when power is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored, the setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, thereby improving workability for fixing the set values.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting change mode is set. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed (steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk of the amusement arcade who performed the change operation of the setting value changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state to the ON state and then switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determines YES in step S21TM4680) in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode.

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is made different between when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), while the condition for ending the setting change mode control (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) is made common. It is designed to shift to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), notification may be made to prompt the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (performs the processing corresponding to step S21TM4190 described above). Please switch to OFF after changing the value." may be displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installing it in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 cannot be played unless the game hall side changes the set value through the setting change mode and terminates the setting change mode. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control in the case of power failure during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, the control when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in sequence 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "1" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "0" to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed from "1" to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned ON) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in sequence 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set, so when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or even if the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically set. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and power is cut without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), when the power is restored, the setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the planned set values have already been set, and in this case, the clerk of the game parlor can terminate the setting change mode and shift the game machine to normal game processing without performing the operation of changing the set values again, so that workability can be improved.

Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and the explanation is omitted. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the read setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), in both the case where the power is interrupted while the control is in the setting change mode and the case where the power supply is interrupted after the control in the setting change mode is terminated, when the power is restored, the setting values after being changed in response to the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, i.e., the setting values stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power interruption are effective setting values (the setting values stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

Note that the control is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated while the setting change mode is being controlled, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state). The set values stored in the information temporary storage area may be stored (overwritten) in the set value storage area to determine the set values. In this case, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also change according to the change in the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area.

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled upon power-on and a setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), if the operation for terminating the setting change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and power is cut off, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 will not be changed from when the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). not In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine in which a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided and the jackpot probability differs according to the setting value. There is.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a “jackpot signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the game machine as described in JP-A-2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The game machine of means O1 is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing control (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) according to set values (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.), setting change mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620. A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling a confirmable setting confirmation mode, a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal at step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and a specific signal are output. setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value related to a period (value of the security signal timer), and the setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (sets 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710); The specific signal is output until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (at the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continuously output until one second has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated, and at the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the setting change mode was terminated). According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1, and includes initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clearing (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150), and the initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (if the setting change mode is controlled, the setting change mode is executed). After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value (30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 when the RAM is cleared), and the specific signal output means terminates the control of the setting change mode. (When the setting change mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the end of the setting change mode). According to this, the specific signal is output for at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and when the control is performed in the setting change mode, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to set different output periods for the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means.

The game machine of means O3 is the game machine of means O1 or O2, and in the setting change mode, specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing specific information (a setting changing flag) when power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection of turning off of the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680), based on transition to the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that sets a setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the game is stopped and a specific signal is generated. (repeatedly executing the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The gaming machine of the means O4 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3, and includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing) and effect control means for controlling the execution of effect (effect control CPU 120). 30 to step S21TM4620), and specific information storage means for storing specific information (in the backup area of RAM 102, based on the shift to the setting change mode) when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) in the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100 that sets a setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), an error message is displayed on the display means. In addition, it is possible to transmit an error command to the effect control means (in step S21TM4190, it is possible to transmit a set value abnormality error command, and to display the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210). Please shift to mode"). According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that appropriately notifies the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value.

The game machine of the means P1 is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing, etc. in the special symbol process processing) according to the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit), and a setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value, and the setting change. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the mode is controlled (a game control microcomputer 100 that sets a setting change flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode and clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is (stored in the backup area of the RAM 102) and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), an error notification means (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). It is characterized by According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The game machine of the means P2 is the game machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means can control the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the information is stored (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 to S21TM4200 when the power is turned on based on the YES determinations in all of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140). 21TM4220 loop processing, and shifts to the setting change mode). According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the unnecessary error notification can be avoided and the change of the set value can be properly urged.

The gaming machine of means P3 is the gaming machine of means P1 or P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (step S21 TM4120 to S21TM4140, when NO is determined, the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is performed without transitioning to the setting change mode). According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to P3, and includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing) and effect control means for controlling the execution of effect (effect control CPU 120).
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration), the error notification is performed on the display means. It is also possible to transmit an error command to the effect control means (in step S21TM4190, it is possible to transmit a set value abnormality error command, and to display the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display in step S21TM4210). Please display a message. According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The invention according to means Q1 to Q5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value.

The game machine of the means Q1 is a game machine (pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing, etc. in the special symbol process processing) according to the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit), and a setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value, and the setting change. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the mode is controlled (a game control microcomputer 100 that sets a setting change flag in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode and clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), the setting change mode control means controls to the setting change mode when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) (when the power is turned on, the frame 3 for the game machine is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch ( The setting change mode is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the setting changeover switch 21TM052 is in the ON state is established. According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state. The gaming machine of means Q1 may further include initialization means for initializing the game state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150).

The game machine of the means Q2 is the game machine of the means Q1, and the setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on the establishment of the setting change condition when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM. 051 is ON and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is completed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled. According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored, the setting change mode is controlled even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, so that the workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is the game machine of means Q1 or Q2, and the setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the game machine is started (when the power supply is turned on, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21 The setting change mode can be controlled based on the condition that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode is completed because the TM052 is in the ON state), and the setting change mode can be terminated based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF in step S21TM4680). When the game machine is controlled, the specific information is stored (the setting change flag is set at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the setting change mode control is started), the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control is finished), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When stored, control is performed to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), control is automatically performed to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). end the setting change mode). According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The game machine of the means Q4 is any one of the game machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a set value storage means (set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set values are stored) for storing set values (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit), is capable of executing control according to the set values stored in the set value storage means (big hit judging processing in special symbol process processing, etc.), and is controlled in the setting change mode. The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed in the setting change mode, the setting value storage means continues to store the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting change mode (the setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed. Therefore, even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained. According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the control according to the set value is executed, so that workability can be improved.

The game machine of the means Q5 is one of the game machines selected from the means Q1 to Q3, and has a set value storage means (set value storage area of the RAM 102 where the set value is stored) for storing set values (six stages of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit). The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed instead of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area), and the setting change mode is terminated (on the basis of confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, it is changed). When the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area and determined as a valid setting value and the setting change mode is ended), the setting value storage means stores the setting value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while being controlled in the setting change mode (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM05 1 is not switched to OFF, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is not changed, so when power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode is held. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 052IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in the characterizing portion 052IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a 1st KT state and a 2nd KT state, and in the characteristic portion 052IW, the game state is controlled to a low probability and non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a low probability and 1KT state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability and 1KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability and 2K state. In some cases, it is controlled to the T state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 variations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. In the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than a normal state because the ratio of a small win determined to be a small win is low when the first special pattern varies, while the ratio of a small win determined to be a small win is high when the second special symbol varies (except for the case of forced loss to be described later). As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the variation of the second special symbol, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but by configuring the KT state to have a shorter variation time of the variation pattern to be selected when the second special symbol is varied, the KT state may have a higher ratio of the number of variations to a fixed time than the normal state, and the KT state may be a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state.

Further, this characteristic portion 052IW is configured so that the required time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when it reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow-down path of the game ball are adjusted. Although the details will be described later, this characteristic part 052IW is configured such that the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the variable winning ball device 6B being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passage gate 41 is 0.5 seconds. Since it is shorter than 6 seconds, when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball can win the variable winning ball device 6B as it is.

(Special Variable Winning Ball Device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic portion 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 that is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. In the jackpot game state, the bottom member 052IW108 is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 052IW108 is moved forward, and the bottom member 052IW108 is moved backward to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area. A game ball that has entered the big winning hole is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole is further guided to the guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. The guiding path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guiding path 052IW100 is guided to the left path 052IW102 or the right path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V-area 052IW104 and is detected by the V-area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left path 052IW102, and when the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in an open state, a game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V area 052IW104. Also, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the big win game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game and is controlled to the probability variable state after the big win game is finished on the condition that the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106.

The sum of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the ejection area switch 052IW107 during one round should match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. Therefore, when the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, it may be determined as a big winning entry/ejection mismatch error and error notification may be made. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game balls to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, if the number of game balls does not match within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, it may be determined as a large winning entrance entry/emission mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this characteristic portion 052IW. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes detection signals from the gate switch 21, the start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24)). transmit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory, the solenoid 82 for the large winning gate door, the solenoid 83 for the special winning gate, and the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'' and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability ``247/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as a whole compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state). The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'', and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability of ``2470/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of which of the setting values '1' to '6', and regardless of whether it is a non-variable state (low probability state) or a variable state (high probability state), the small win probability is constant at '6298/65536'. That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. Even in the case where the probability of a small win is constant while the probability of a big win varies according to the set value, as shown in FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'' and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability ``247/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as a whole compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state). The set value ``2'', the set value ``3'', the set value ``4'', and the set value ``5'' increase in order, and the set value ``6'' has the highest jackpot probability ``2470/65536'', which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of which of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', and regardless of whether it is a non-probable variable state (low probability state) or a definite variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the winning probability of the small hit is about 10 times as compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). Even in the case where the probability of a small win is constant while the probability of a big win varies according to the set value, as shown in FIGS.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, there is no set value with a deviation probability of 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the deviation probability differs depending on which of the set values "1" to "6").

It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured such that there is a case where the deviation probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the odds of losing are 0, and the decision value corresponding to losing may not be included.

Further, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small win may not be included.

In Fig. 10-3 (A), (B), and FIG. 10-4 (A), FIGS. 10-4 (A), the probability of the small hit is different between the probability change state (high probability status) and the non -probability (low probability status), but the probability of the probability changes (low probability state) increases in the probability (low probability state). The condition may be lower than the state) and the off -the -box probability may be aligned. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a game machine having less than 6 stages that can actually be set or a game machine having no difference in the advantage due to the setting change function, the hardware/software configuration can be shared with the game machine of the type having the 6-stage setting change function, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type to any one of ``2R normal jackpot'', ``2R probability variable jackpot'', ``6R normal jackpot'', ``6R probability variable jackpot'', or ``10R probability variable jackpot'' based on the random number for winning type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of the set value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined with a probability of 9% as "10R probability variable big hit", "6R probability variable big hit" with 56% probability, and "6R normal big hit" with 35% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of the set value "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is determined as "10R probability variable big hit" with a probability of 10%, "6R probability variable big hit" is determined with a probability of 50%, "2R probability variable big hit" is determined with a probability of 5%, and "2R probability variable big hit" is determined with a probability of 35%. It is determined to be a normal jackpot.

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of two rounds and transitions to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game state is completed. A "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state and controlled to a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of "10R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot", in each round of the jackpot game, a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the big winning holes are controlled to be open, and up to 10 big winning holes can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' and the ``2R normal jackpot'', the jackpots are controlled to be open only for a short period (in this example, 1.8 seconds) in each round of the jackpot game, and the number of wins to the jackpots that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the big win game is finished, it is controlled to the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big win game and the kind of the big win, but how the game state changes after the big win game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small winning type determination table is a table referred to for determining the type of the small winning to any of 'small winning A', 'small winning B' or 'small winning C' based on the random number for determining the winning type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small winning pattern.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability is 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, "small hit B" is determined with a probability of 70%, and "small hit C" is determined with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small win A", the special winning hole is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small winning game (see FIGS. 10-12), and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole during the small winning game. In addition, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see FIGS. 10-13), and the winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can be expected to some extent during the small winning game. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see FIGS. 10-14), and the winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can be most expected during the small winning game.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characterizing portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, 9 types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special design and decorative design, and 34 types of second variation pattern #01 to #34 for the second special design and decorative design are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the case of the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the game is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined as a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small win is achieved, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game balls into the special winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened to reduce the execution frequency of the variation display, thereby reducing the occurrence frequency of the small hit instead, thereby preventing the situation where the player is targeted to acquire the prize ball by the small hit even though the player is in the non-KT state. In this characteristic part 052IW, the ``occurrence frequency of small hits'' is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small wins per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the rate of occurrence of small wins per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), in this characteristic part 052IW, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 minutes, which is relatively long even in the case of a big hit, so as to prevent the act of unfairly aiming for a prize ball by winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to consume the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variable time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win.

When executing the variable display of the second special pattern, in the case of the low probability/first KT state, a variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of variation after finishing the big win game based on the 6R normal big win or the 2R normal big win triggered by the low probability/first KT state. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low-probability/first KT state is a failure, the second variation pattern #04 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. In addition, when a small win is determined as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, a second variation pattern #05 (variation pattern for preparing for opening the second start winning opening) having a relatively long variation time of 7 seconds is determined as the small win. In this characteristic part 052IW, as already explained, when controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened so that the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 17 is set so as not to actually win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom surface members of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and if the special variable winning ball device 17 is immediately controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls enter the special winning hole. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, after a sufficient time has elapsed before all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 fall from before the transition to the 1KT state, the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state to enable winning to the special winning hole. It prevents possible situations from occurring. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In addition, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variations is executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/1KT and the 2nd to 49th variations shown in FIG. 10-8(E) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #07 to #13. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability/1st KT state are missed, the second fluctuation pattern #07 with a shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #08 with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/first KT state are missed, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #11 with a shorter variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns which can be selected only when the second reserved storage is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are variation patterns which can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, if the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability/1KT state) is executed after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/1KT time and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the fiftieth variation in the low probability/1st KT state, one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined.

In the characteristic portion 052IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "in chance time". As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!". Also, as shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when it is determined to be a big hit as the 50th variation in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display of displaying characters such as "Chance time is over!" on the image display device 5 is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7, this characteristic part 052IW is configured to determine the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a big hit during the KT state. This is a case in which a big win occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol, and if the variation time of the big win variation of the first special symbol is set to be a long variation time, the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big win variation of the first special symbol is forcibly lost, so the forced failure occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player cannot receive any profit from the small win. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, by setting the variation time of the big win variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the transition to the big win game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is made before frequent forced failures occur.

In addition, unlike this characteristic part 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forcibly lost (for example, when the second special symbol is fluctuating when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forced to be lost). may be This is a case where a big win occurs immediately after the transition to the 2nd KT state due to the variation display of the first special pattern, and if the variation time of the big win is set to the same short variation time as the loss, the player cannot receive any profit from the small win. Therefore, if the variation time of the first special pattern jackpot in the KT state is set to a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time (for example, 1 minute) for generating at least a plurality of small wins is ensured.

When the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, in the case of the high probability/1st KT state, a variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times of variation after finishing the big win game based on the 6R probability variable big win which triggered the high probability/1st KT state. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined.

As with the first variation in the low-probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), even when it is determined to be a failure as the first variation in the high-probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #17, which has a short variation time of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern #18 with reach. Further, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined as a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/1KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/1KT and the second and subsequent variations shown in FIG. 10-9(H) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 is determined.

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability/1KT state are missed, the second fluctuation pattern #22 with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern #23 with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to the second variation pattern #24 with reach. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #26 with a shorter variation time with a shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns which can be selected only when the second reserved storage is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are variation patterns which can be selected only when one or more second reserved storages are stored. As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when it is determined as a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9(I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be off in the high probability / 2nd KT state, the second variation pattern # 29 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Or, the second variation pattern # 30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #32 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds may be determined, or the second variation pattern #33 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When the variation pattern is determined, more specifically, it is determined which variation pattern is to be used by performing a lottery process based on a random number for determining the variation pattern using a variation pattern table corresponding to which variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the result of the variable display. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit, out of the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I).

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the high probability/second KT state, and when the variation display of the small hit is performed, the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%, regardless of which of the set values ``1'' to ``6''. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortened variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but the other variation pattern tables shown in FIGS.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the second KT state with a high probability. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of a high probability state.

(Open pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. 10-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 10-11 (1), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to a jackpot game based on the 10R variable probability big hit, the 6R variable probability big hit, and the 2R variable probability big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as "variable probability big hit") will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big winning game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is controlled to open. When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In addition, in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball into the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to open, and the game ball can enter the V-region 052IW104. Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of big winning holes is detected, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) is controlled to be closed again, and when the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state after the big hit game is over. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and after the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be closed again, a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-11(2), the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to a jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot") will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big winning game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is controlled to open. When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In addition, in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball into the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of big winning holes is detected, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is a period from an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101 to a predetermined period (500 ms in this example).

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and is likely to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 substantially during the predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the big win game based on the variable probability big win, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big win game than in the big win game based on the normal big win.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. FIG. 10-13 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. FIG. 10-14 show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. FIG. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIGS.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 20. When the normal symbol hit is determined, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when the loss is determined, the lost symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), the normal symbol variation time is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after 0.2 seconds of the pattern fixing time elapses and 0.1 seconds of the time before the second starting winning opening processing elapses, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can win in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball wins a prize in a second starting winning hole while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variation display of the second special pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a small winning, the small winning pattern is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. 10-12(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13(1), and the small winning C is shown in FIG. 10-14(1). A variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter a special winning hole (however, in the case of a small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, so winning can hardly be expected). However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the next normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning hole opening preprocessing time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-open processing time of 0.1 seconds, has passed, and after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the variable entry is possible. It is configured so that the required time to reach the prize ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state in which the normal symbols are not changed to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. It will reach the prize ball device 6B. Therefore, in the 1KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. When the normal symbol hit is determined, the winning symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when the loss is determined, the lost symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 1.0 seconds, and the design determination time for deriving and displaying winning symbols and losing symbols is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), after the pattern fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed and the time before the second starting winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can win in the second starting winning opening.

When a game ball wins a prize in a second starting winning hole while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variation display of the second special pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a small winning, the small winning pattern is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. 10-12(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-13(2), and the small winning C is shown in FIG. 10-14(2). The variable winning ball device 17 is kept open for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, a relatively long period of at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0.2 seconds + second start winning opening opening processing time 2.6 seconds) is ensured as an interval period (closed period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Therefore, compared to the first KT state, the game balls are more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game balls are more likely to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, so even in the 2KT state, winning of game balls into the special winning opening can hardly be expected.

In the second KT state, since game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and prize balls are easily obtained, this example is also called ``small hit RUSH'', and in the second KT state, characters such as ``small hit RUSH'' are displayed.

In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed according to which of the small wins A to C the type of the small win is, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be varied depending on which of the small wins A to C the small win type is. In this case, for example, in the case of the small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small winning game, whereas in the case of the small winning B or the small winning C, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened twice to 11 times during the small winning game. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) may be configured to provide a small winning type in which a certain amount of game balls can win, and various modes are conceivable. In addition, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three kinds of small hits A to C is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect, and may be configured to provide, for example, four or more small hit types.

In addition, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. It is configured so that the required time to reach the prize ball device 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 while the normal symbols are not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when the normal symbols are not changed until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. It will reach the sphere device 6B. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In this characteristic part 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executing the normal symbol process (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, determines whether or not the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), whether the game state is a non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot game state or not, with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to win a normal pattern.

In this characteristic portion 052IW, the normal symbol variation time and the symbol fixation time are the same 0.2 seconds each in the 1KT state and the 2KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is shortened to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and increased to 2.6 seconds in the 2KT state, thereby making the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B different. For example, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have different closing periods (interval periods) by differentiating the fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be controllable, and the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the time after the second starting winning hole opening process different between the first KT state and the second KT state. In particular, by shortening the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state.

As will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base flag indicating the high base state is set in the characteristic portion 052IW to set the high base state, thereby controlling the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B to be longer as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS.

For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) for a long time. It may be configured to control with the second open pattern (short open). That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Also, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when the left-hand shot is reported after the low-probability/first KT state is ended.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable display of the special symbols may be controlled using the flag for the shortened variation of the variable display of the special symbols. In this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is increased in the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), it is possible to prevent winning of the variable winning ball device 6B only by shooting several game balls, and to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of normal symbols is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state in a state where the variation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbol, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the variation of the second special symbol. The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until it reaches 17, and the winning of the special winning opening becomes possible). On the other hand, in the characteristic part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started before the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Therefore, in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the shooting operation aiming at the timing of occurrence of the small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Production control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are production control commands (variation pattern commands) that specify the variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000(H) to 8009(H) and 8011(H) to 8032(H), it controls the image display device 5 so as to start variable display of decorative patterns.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variable big hit. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variable big hit. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variable big hit. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In this characteristic part 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received immediately before the first variation pattern command by the effect control CPU 120 can be determined to be the display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol. 2 special symbols can be shared, but the display result designation command for the first special design and the display result designation command for the second special design may be separate.

Instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designating command, the variation pattern command may be determined corresponding to each of the 10R probability variable big win/6R probability variable big win/6R normal big win/2R probability variable big win/2R normal big win/minor win/losing, and the performance control CPU 120 may determine the decorative pattern stop pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol determination designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design determination designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent out from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. B001(H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates a display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates display after a round (display of interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening while the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command) designating a first customer waiting state (a state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) designating a second customer waiting state (a state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second reserved memory is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, and changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in FIGS. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS50A). Note that when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag does not indicate the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small winning end process (step S128), it is neither a big win game (special variable winning ball device 7 opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17 opened).

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number stored in the save area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, stores it in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53A), reduces the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each save area (step 052IW). S54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number are extracted is also stored so as to be identifiable.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55A, but the set value command is also transmitted when the setting change processing (processing for changing the set value) is executed when the power is turned on.

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and for example, it may be configured to transmit the set value command each time the variable display ends, or to transmit the set value command during the variable display.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that it is in a low probability / non-KT state and a low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined to be in a high probability/second KT state, and a high probability/second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57A, when the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit change, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) for winning as the random number for winning judgment is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59A, regardless of which random number for winning judgment has been acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly made to lose.

Further, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation in step 052IWS57A, without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A, by setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number and performing a small hit determination, regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly lost.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step 052IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (or the random number for the small-hit determination) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small win (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating a small win based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67A), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68A). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 052IWS75A. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), and determines whether or not it has reached "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of the special symbols is under control (step 052IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variation display in the high base state is managed when the 50 times variation display is performed by controlling to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, the high base flag is reset in steps 052IWS72A and S72B, and the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the transition to the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). become.

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed informing to continue the right-handed state, and is a flag for setting the variable shortening state common to the 1KT state although the high base state has ended as a game state, and to make the performance background common to the 1KT state.

In this example, the process of step 052IWS74A and the process of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, are executed, and when the final variation of the high base state (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started by the start of variation of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the 50th variable display in this example) ends, or the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset according to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (the 51st variable display in this example), and the extension of the variable shortened state is preferably configured to end.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set (step 052IWS1700A). In this example, the special figure time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol (see FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined at step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer to start measuring the variation time (step 052IWS1705A), and starts the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). Note that when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag does not indicate the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small winning end process (step S128), it is neither a big win game (special variable winning ball device 7 opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17 opened).

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, performs control to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit and the determination result of the jackpot type (step 052IW). S1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is displaying the big hit symbol (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big winning symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stopping process and whether or not the second big winning flag indicating that the big winning will be achieved based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, and whether or not the second small winning flag indicating that the second special symbol will be a small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127A). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R probability variable big hit or a 6R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big-hit symbol (Y of step 052IWS1125A), or when the minor-hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126A) and does not result in either the 10R probability variable big win or the 6R probability variable big win (that is, the 6R normal big win), the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (step 052IWS1127). Y of A, N of step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characterizing part 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot in this example) while the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is displayed. To prevent a big win or a small win from occurring at the same time with a pattern and a second special pattern. In this case, when the variable display of the first special pattern is forced to be lost, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern as a result of the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second forced pattern confirmation designation command transmitted at step 052IWS1129A.

Incidentally, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variation big hit (in this example, a 10R probability variation big hit or a 6R probability variation big hit) is being executed, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the small winning, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small winning game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variable big win is being executed, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and even when the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small win is being displayed in a variable display, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol resulting in a loss or a small win is being executed, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the first variation time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation, and the right-handed display 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated during the low-probability/first KT state, but by executing the processing of steps 052IWS69A-S74A, S69B-S74B, the low-probability/first-KT state is terminated and transitioned to the normal state (non-KT state) when the 50th variation display is started, and steps 052IWS2010A-S2013A, S2010B. By executing the processing of S2013B, the right-handed display 26 is turned off when the 50th variation display ends.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the lost design is forcibly derived and displayed as the stop design of the first special design.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating the start of the jackpot (step 052IWS2016A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game, and the right-handed display 26 is lit.

In this example, since the big win game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 after the big win pattern is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 may be started at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加

When the first big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hitting indicator 26 is not lit and the right hitting lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right side of the game area. In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stop-displayed in the first special pattern, as the right-hand hitting notification, it may be constituted so as to be able to execute the shooting promotion notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the state where the big win pattern is stopped and displayed with the second special symbol, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed, and when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state, the right hitting notification and launch promotion notification are executed (in this case, since the game ball is waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first reserved memory may be made).

Conversely, when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a normal state (low probability/non-KT state), a mode with a low degree of recognition (for example, a low-volume sound output or a small screen display) may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode with a high degree of recognition (for example, outputting a loud sound or displaying on a large screen) may be configured to perform left-handed notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area may be notified of a light left-handed hit with a low degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine, while a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation may be notified of a left-handed hit with a high degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the game store clerk to return to the left-handed operation to the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected in the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In the passage gate 41, when game balls are detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and in the second start winning opening or special winning opening, left-handed notification is performed when a specific number (for example, 1) or more game balls smaller than the predetermined number is detected.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when a winning of a game ball to the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected while the demonstration display is being performed in the normal state, the execution of the demonstration display being performed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS50B). Note that when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag does not indicate the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small winning end process (step S128), it is neither a big win game (special variable winning ball device 7 opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17 opened).

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and stores it in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 052IWS53B), reduces the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (subtracts the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each save area (step 052IW). S54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55B, but the set value command is also transmitted when the setting change processing (processing for changing the set value) is executed when the power is turned on.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win will be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the first special pattern, it is forced to lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the midst of a big hit change, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) for winning as the random number for winning judgment is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59B, a winning may be forcibly made regardless of which random number for winning judgment has been acquired at the time of starting winning.

Further, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 052IWS57B, without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B, by setting a random value (fixed value) as the hit determination random number and performing a small hit determination, regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of the start winning, it may be forcibly lost.

If the first special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit change, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B), and executes the big hit determination module (step 052IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B), and the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small win (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating a small win based on the second special symbol variation display (step 052IWS66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67B), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68B). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), and determines whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and resets the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variable display of special symbols is under control (step 052IWS73B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern according to whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for any one of KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I). For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / 1st KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected for the first variation. If it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected for the first variation, and the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is ON and the high base flag is OFF (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 10-22 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). Note that when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag does not indicate the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small winning end process (step S128), it is neither a big win game (special variable winning ball device 7 opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small winning game (special variable winning ball device 17 opened).

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a jackpot and the determination result of the jackpot type, performs control to transmit any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052 IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to transmit a second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the big winning symbol can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stopping process and whether or not the first big winning flag indicating that the big winning will be achieved based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and whether or not the first small winning flag indicating that a small winning will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127B). It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big win can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second big win flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128B). Whether or not it is a 10R variable probability big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the jackpot symbol (Y of step 052IWS1125B), or when the minor winning symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126B) and is neither a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, nor a 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot), the second special symbol variation display is being executed (step 0) At 52IWS1127B Y, step 052IWS1128B N), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a small win and becomes a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example) is being executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is displayed. To prevent a situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously with a pattern and a second special pattern. In this case, when the variable display of the second special pattern is forced to be lost, the effect control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern as a result of the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second forced pattern confirmation designation command transmitted at step 052IWS1129B.

In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and when the variation display of the second special symbol that is the probability variation big hit (in this example, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, or the 2R probability variation big hit) is being executed, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, Based on the change display of the first special symbol becoming a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120B is determined as N, steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B are skipped, and step 052IWS1122B does not update the second variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a probability variable big win is being executed, the update of the second variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Also, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and even when the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small win is being displayed in a variable display, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol resulting in a loss or a small win is being executed, the update of the second variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the second variation time timer is resumed.

By constructing as described above, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing due to the absence of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning hole), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol (a starting winning hole that is not a variable winning ball device) is provided on the right side of the game area. A configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced to miss. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is increased, the frequency of occurrence of a small win based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases, but along with this, the frequency of forcibly losing the variation display of the second special symbol is also increased, the occurrence of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the big win at unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display device 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the missing design is forcibly derived and displayed as the stop design of the second special design.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game, and the right-handed display 26 is lit.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start specification command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game, and the right-handed display 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 052IWS2023B, when a small win is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the processing of starting lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 or transmitting the right hitting lighting start designation command is not performed redundantly.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessory control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing a role product control normal process (step S120) in the role product control process process. In the role product control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot (step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the role product control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the variable probability flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, the gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big win game is not started immediately when the big win pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern, but the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21 as a condition to shift to the big win game.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flow chart showing the process during jackpot opening (step S123) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is on (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is on, that is, if the game ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening (step 052 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is on (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is on, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104 (step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and confirms whether or not the opening time timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y at step 052IWS2406) or when the opening time timer times out (Y at step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 82 for the door of the big winning prize and controls the big winning gate to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Also, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the big win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big win end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS2201), and ends the processing.

At step 052IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V prize flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. In the case of the 10R variable probability big win or the 2R probability variable big win, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, it will be controlled to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state).

If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2209). It should be noted that whether or not the 6R probability variable big hit can be determined by confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/1st KT state), and since the value of the high-base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display, it is determined to be Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS7. The 0B high base number counter is not decremented. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big win occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2215).

(small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flow chart showing a small winning end process (step S128) in the role product control process process. In the small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (small win end display time) during which the small win end display is performed on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS2301), and ends the processing.

At step 052IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2306), and controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win during the non-KT state, lighting of the right hitting display 26 is started at the start of the small winning game (see steps 052IWS2023B-S2025B), but by executing the processing of steps 052IWS2304-S2307, lighting of the right hitting display 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in this characteristic portion 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in this characteristic portion 052IW. First, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, the start winning to the first start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win or a 6R normal big win mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). reference). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state) after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S22). 11). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. When a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low-probability/low-base state, the state shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052, IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), in this characteristic part 052IW, the player shoots the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area (right hitting). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win, a 2R probability variable big win, or a 2R normal big win occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the 10R variable probability big hit or the 2R variable probability big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) after the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. (See step 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2206). , S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of the 6R probability variable jackpot is 50% (see FIG. 10-5), so once the high probability/high base state is reached, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the 10R variable probability big hit or the 2R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state) after the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. (See step 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Further, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/1KT state) is made after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2206). , S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), so once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state loops at a rate of 35%. After the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot occurs and the low-probability/high-base state is reached, when the fluctuation display ends 50 times without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R variable probability big hit or a 2R variable probability big hit occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs. (See step 052 IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 10R variable probability big hit or the 2R variable probability big hit is 15% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), so once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big win game, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (steps 052IWS2204 to S2206). , S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Further, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/2nd KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but there is a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, when a 10R variable probability big hit or a 2R probability variable big win occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but there is a possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but there is a possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed at a low rate. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 052IWS5111), and performs control to transmit a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113, a gate passage specification command is transmitted. In this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operation area, but the gate passage designation command is transmitted regardless of whether or not there is a state of waiting for passage of the gate before starting the jackpot game after stopping and displaying the jackpot pattern.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether or not the game is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing is executed in step 052IWS5113, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. For example, the variable display of normal patterns may be executed only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not waiting for passage of the gate, and the variable display of normal patterns may not be executed even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state of waiting for passage of the gate.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special symbol process (see steps S25A and S25B) is executed before the normal symbol process (see step S26). done. Therefore, the processing for starting the big win game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the normal figure holding indicator 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the normal symbol per determination random number and stores it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passage memory number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is the value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol is not displayed in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening/closing operation based on the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol being derived and displayed. case), check the value of the gate passing memory number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is to be a winning pattern). Then, the normal pattern process timer is set for the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "1") indicating the design variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the design stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it is not a hit pattern (if it is a lost pattern), the value of the normal design process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a hit pattern, the time before opening the normal electric accessary product is set to the normal pattern process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "3") indicating normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103).

Ordinary electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory operating time to the ordinary pattern process timer, starts the timer, and starts opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating normal electric auditors product operation processing (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessary product operation processing (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flow chart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number of gate passage memories is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passages stored is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N of step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol per determination random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol per determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number=n-1. Therefore, the order of extraction of the random number values for judging the normal pattern winning stored in the storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers always coincides with the order of the gate passing memory numbers=1, 2, 3, 4.例文帳に追加

Next, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers (random number values for judging normal symbol hits) using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not normal symbol hits are awarded, and determines whether or not normal symbol hits are awarded (step 052IWS5127). In this characteristic portion 052IW, at step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 determines to uniformly win the normal symbol with a probability of 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state, whether it is in the KT state, or whether it is in the high base state.

At step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol winning determination random number value is within the winning range (if it is a winning), the CPU 103 sets a winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. In step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random number value is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a losing symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

At step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds to the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (Y at step 052IWS5130, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 052 IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time elapses (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (whether or not it is determined to be a winning symbol at step 052IWS5127) (step 052IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a winning pattern can be confirmed by setting a normal pattern winning determination flag, for example, when the winning is determined in step 052IWS5127, by checking whether or not the flag is set.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a losing symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS3708).

At step 052IWS3703, when the stopped design of the normal design is a winning design (Y at step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if set, that is, in the first KT state, sets 0.1 second to the normal design process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IW). S3706). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product release preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 normally -1 the value of the symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 052 IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessary product opening has passed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803), and if it is set, that is, in the first KT state, sets the normal symbol process timer to 5.5 seconds as the normal electric accessary product opening time (step 052IWS3805). . Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in the present characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the 1KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the 2KT state, so that the 1KT state is a state where it is easier to start and win the second start winning port than in the normal state or the 2KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

Incidentally, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the method of control for making it easier to start winning in the second start winning opening is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic portion 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is set to 1, while in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is set to be opened twice). By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start winning in the second starting winning hole.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the normal state or the second KT state, the above-described control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the control to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened may be executed in combination.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620).

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced pattern confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received pattern confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the first compulsory determination command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the second compulsory determination command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to execute a set value suggestion effect that suggests the current set value. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, normally the right-handed display is started in white display color, but when the execution of the setting value suggestion effect is decided, the right-handed hitting display in blue display color is started at a relatively high rate when the set value is "1", the right-handed hitting display in green display color is started at a relatively high rate when the set value is "2", and the right-handed hitting display in yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate when the set value is "3". When the setting value is "4", right-handed display of orange display color is started at a relatively high rate, when the set value is "5", right-handed display of red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "6", right-handed display of rainbow display color is started at a relatively high rate.

Further, for example, it may be constructed so that the right-handed display is continuously executed even in the KT state after the end of the big-win game, and the set value suggesting performance is executed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display at the timing of the end of the big-win game.

Further, for example, when the change display of 50 times is completed in the low probability/first KT state and the state is shifted to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the left-handed display may be started, and the display mode (for example, the display color) of the left-handed display may be changed to execute the set value suggesting effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form, the setting value suggesting effect may be executed.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening (step 052IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of game balls winning the big winning opening during the round of the big winning game (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a large winning opening open flag that designates that the large winning opening is being opened (in the round period during the big winning game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052 IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening open display command (the timing of starting the round), so even when over winning is detected in the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that designates the interval period after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 controls the background image on the image display device 5 to display a background image (for example, a blue background image) corresponding to the low-probability/non-KT state (step 052IWS643). Also, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, it resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 resets (clears to 0) the value of the prize ball counter for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning hole and the special winning hole during the big win game and the high probability/second KT state (step 052 IWS 645).

In this example, when a game ball enters the big winning opening during the big winning game (except during the big winning game based on the 2R probability variable big winning or the 2R normal big winning), or when the game ball wins the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state, the value of the winning ball number counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but step 052IWS. By executing the processing of 645, the value of the winning ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the game state changes to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) and then to the low probability/low base state after finishing 50 times of variable display.

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 controls the background image on the image display device 5 to display a background image (for example, a green background image) corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (step 052IWS647). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, resets the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 controls the background image on the image display device 5 to display a background image (for example, a yellow background image) corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (step 052IWS651). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 controls the background image on the image display device 5 to display a background image (for example, a red background image) corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (step 052IWS655). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received performance control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS658), the performance control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big win game based on the 10R probability variable big win, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is in progress (step 052IWS659). Whether or not the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the production control process flag is a value indicating the jackpot middle production process (step S176) to the ending production process (step S177), and by confirming whether the display result designation commands stored in the display result designation command storage area are the display result 2 designation command to the display result 4 designation command. I can judge.

During the jackpot game based on the 10R variable probability jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the winning ball counter (step 052IWS660). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS661). The display of the number of prize balls is a display of the accumulated number of the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the value of the winning ball counter and the winning ball number display are updated based on the occurrence of winning to the big winning opening during the big winning game based on the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R variable probability big win, or the 6R normal big win. On the other hand, even during the jackpot game, when winning to the jackpot is generated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated and the prize ball number display is not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestive effect process for determining and executing an over winning suggestive effect (step 052IWS662). Note that the "over-winning effect suggesting effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when an over-winning to the big winning hole occurs, and suggests the currently set set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a number-of-balls display suggestion effect process for determining and executing a number-of-balls display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). Note that the ``suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls'' is performed at the timing when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of a big winning hole or a special winning hole during a big win game or a high probability/second KT state reaches a predetermined number (456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666 in this example), and is a production suggesting the currently set set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball number emphasizing effect processing for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). The "prize ball number emphasizing performance" is a performance that emphasizes that the accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of a big winning opening or a special winning opening during a big win game or a high probability/second KT state has reached a predetermined number (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000 in this example).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the number-of-balls counter (step 052IWS667). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the number of prize balls counter and the display of the number of prize balls are updated based on the fact that a small win has occurred during the high probability/second KT state and a prize has been won in the special prize winning opening. On the other hand, even in the KT state, when a special winning prize occurs during the high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1st KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated and the display of the number of prize balls is not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball number counter is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small-hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing a small-hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). The ``suggestion performance at the time of winning a small win'' is a performance which is executed at the timing when a small win occurs in the high probability/second KT state and a prize is awarded to a special winning slot, and suggests the currently set set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 052IWS663, and executes the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes processing for storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052IWS670). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS611.

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flow chart showing the over winning suggestive effect process (step 052IWS662). In the over winning suggestive effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning prize number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if over winning to the big winning opening occurs), the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using an over winning suggesting performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of over winning suggesting performance, and determines the presence or absence and type of over winning suggesting performance (step 052 IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggesting effect determination table, judgment values are allocated to no over-winning suggesting effect, over-winning suggesting effect A, over-winning suggesting effect B, over winning suggesting effect C, over winning suggesting effect D, over winning suggesting effect E, and over winning suggesting effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the image display device 5 displays a winning display (character display of "+15" in this example) in a normal display color (white in this example), and normal winning sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the ``over winning effect suggesting effect A'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound A different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``over winning performance B'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound B different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``excessive prize-winning performance C'' is executed, the prize-winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the prize-winning sound C different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``excessive prize-winning performance D'' is executed, the prize-winning display is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and the prize-winning sound D different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``excess winning performance suggesting performance E'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound E different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``excessive winning performance suggestive effect F'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5, and the winning sound F different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over winning suggestive effect determination table, different determination values are assigned according to which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. At step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the suggestive effect at the time of over winning is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestive effect B is determined to be relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C to be determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggesting effect D is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of execution of the over winning indication effect E to be executed is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F to be determined is relatively high.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over winning suggestive effect by summing the over winning suggestive effects A to F is 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, when the set value is "2", it is 45%, when the set value is "3", it is 50%, and when the set value is "4", it is 55%. , 60% when the set value is "5", and 65% when the set value is "6". Thus, in this example, since the over winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over winning suggesting performance is relatively high compared to the small winning winning suggesting performance to be described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the suggestive effect at the time of over winning has been determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If execution of the over winning suggesting performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the determined over winning suggesting performance (step 052 IWS 305). For example, if it is determined to execute the over-winning indication effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning indication in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a prize winning sound corresponding to the determined type of suggestive effect at the time of over winning from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N at step 052IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of over winning (N at step 052IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of small hit winning)
FIG. 10-40 is a flow chart showing the hint effect process (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small prize. In the small winning prize suggesting performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a small winning winning suggesting performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small winning suggesting performance to determine the presence or absence and type of the small winning suggesting performance (step 052 IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the small winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small winning prize suggesting performance determination table, judgment values are assigned to no small winning winning suggestion performance, small winning winning suggesting performance A, small winning winning suggesting performance B, small winning winning suggesting performance C, small winning suggesting performance D, small winning winning suggesting performance E, and small winning suggesting performance F.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 displays a winning display (character display of "+10" in this example) in a normal display color (white in this example), and normal winning sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the ``suggestion performance A at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion performance B at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion performance C at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion performance D at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound D different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound E different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion performance F at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the prize display is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound F different from the normal sound is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different determination values are assigned to the small winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. At step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and identifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. In addition, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small prize is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of execution of the hint effect C at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the hinting effect when winning a small win, which is the sum of the suggesting effects when winning a small win A to F, is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, when the setting value is "2", it is 6%, when the setting value is "3", it is 7%, when the setting value is "4", it is 8%, and when the setting value is "5". In one case it is 9% and in the case of the set value "6" it is 10%. Thus, in this example, compared with the above-described over winning suggesting effect, the ratio of determining the execution of the small winning suggesting effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If execution of the small winning prize suggesting performance is determined, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the type of the determined small winning winning suggesting performance (step 052 IWS 323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small win winning suggestion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect A at the time of winning a small prize, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggested effect at the time of winning a small prize (N in step 052IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display in a normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of setting value suggestion may be different between the case of executing the over winning suggestion performance and the case of executing the small winning prize suggestion performance. For example, the suggestive performance F at the time of over winning can be executed at any of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', but is performed at a relatively high rate when the set value is ``6'', whereas the suggested performance F at the time of small win winning may be determined to be the set value ``6'' when the set value is ``6''. Conversely, for example, although the suggesting performance F at the time of winning a small prize can be executed at any of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', it is performed at a relatively high rate when the set value is ``6'', whereas if the suggesting performance F at the time of over winning is performed, the setting value ``6'' may be determined.

In addition, in this example, the suggesting effect at the time of over-winning and the suggesting effect at the time of small winning are shown to be executed in such a manner that the display mode (in this example, display color) of the winning display is different from the normal one and the winning sound different from the normal one is output, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making only one of the display mode (display color in this example) of the winning display and the winning sound different from the usual mode, the suggestion performance at the time of over winning or the suggestion performance at the time of small win may be executed. Further, for example, it may be configured to execute a suggesting performance at the time of over winning or a suggesting performance at the time of small winning by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of a lamp or an LED at the timing of occurrence of over winning or winning to a special winning opening.

(Suggestion effect processing for displaying the number of prize balls)
FIG. 10-42 is a flow chart showing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters a big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15, so at step 052IWS341, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 for performance control determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the performance control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance A (step 052 IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the performance A suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is ``4'' or more, if the performance A suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed, it is determined that the number of prize balls display is at least ``4'' or more.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball enters a big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15, so at step 052IWS344, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 for performance control determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance B (step 052 IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggesting effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, since the performance B indicating the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value '5', when the performance B suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed, it is determined that the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the set value '5'.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (step 052IWS347). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained when game balls enter the big prize opening during the big win game, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, at step 052IWS347, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 for performance control determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion performance C (step 052 IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current setting value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls-display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, since the performance C suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is ``6'', if the performance C suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed, the set value ``6'' is determined.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the jackpot game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state. , the value of the number-of-balls-counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance D (step 052 IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, since the performance D suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the performance D suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed, it is determined that the number of prize balls display is equal to or greater than the set value "4".

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the jackpot game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state. , the value of the number-of-balls-counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the performance control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a prize ball number display suggestion performance determination table, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion performance E (step 052 IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is the set value "5" or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value ``5'', if the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed, it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the set value ``5''.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (step 052IWS356). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the jackpot game, 15 winning balls are obtained, and if a game ball enters the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state, 10 winning balls are obtained, and the value of the winning ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. , the value of the number-of-balls-counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers by using the number-of-balls display suggestion performance determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion performance F (step 052 IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting that the current set value is "6". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, since the performance F suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is ``6'', if the performance F suggesting display of the number of prize balls is executed, the set value ``6'' is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the award number display suggestion effect is determined in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355 and S358 (step 052IWS359). If execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of number-of-balls display suggestion effect in the image display device 5 (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when looking at the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game, as the period of the big win game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%. Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH
), as the period during the small winning RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the number of prize ball display suggestion performance decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value '4' or more is confirmed, the set value is '5' or more, and the set value is '6'.

In addition to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big win game or the period during the small win RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the performance suggesting the number of prize balls may be increased. Further, for example, as the period during the big win game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of winning balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the setting value may be lowered.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the execution probability of the number of prize ball display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game and the number of prize ball display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period of the small winning RUSH are different, but not limited to such a mode, the number of prize ball display suggestion effects may be executed with the same execution probability.

(Number of prize balls emphasis effect processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flow chart showing the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasizing effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the value of the prize ball counter has reached the threshold value for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) (step 052 IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, at step 052IWS371, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, for example. Also, for example, if the value of the winning ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the winning ball counter has reached 2000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the winning ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the winning ball counter has reached 3000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the winning ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the winning ball counter has reached 5000 first.

When the value of the number-of-balls counter first reaches the threshold for each 1000, a performance control CPU 120 uses a number-of-balls-number-emphasizing performance determination table for determining whether or not to emphasize the number-of-balls-winning performance, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines whether or not to emphasize the performance of number-of-balls-winning (step 052, IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 1000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize number emphasizing effect A is executed, the character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "2000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 3000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "3000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 4000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize number emphasizing effect D is executed, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "4000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 5000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "5000 OVER".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the prize number emphasizing effect has been determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the number-of-balls emphasizing effect of the determined type (step 052IWS374). For example, if execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, the case where the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000 is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number-of-prizes-balls emphasizing performance may be executed not only in all these cases, but also when the number of prized-balls reaches 1000, 2000 and 3000. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the number-of-prize-balls emphasizing effect may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the number-of-balls emphasizing effect is an effect that is determined and executed independently of the current set value, unlike the number-of-balls display suggestive effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a mode, for example, by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect, the number-of-balls-number-emphasizing effect may be executed in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" and "2000 OVER" in a display color different from usual, the current set value may be suggested.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received can be determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75), and in step 052IWS811, it can be confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the first variation pattern #01 to #09 can be determined by checking. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS814). It should be noted that whether or not it is the case to execute the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the second variation pattern #01 to #34 can be determined by checking. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and in the case of the KT state, the variable display of the decorative design is executed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the second special design. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed in the case of the KT state even when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, or in the non-KT state even when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 052IWS920). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designates the first variation patterns #01 to #09 It can be determined by checking whether or not. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of this time is for a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the current variation display is a small win can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach losing symbol as a stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small win is achieved, there is only a case of a small win A, and the winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can hardly be expected during the small win game. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variation display of the first special pattern is executed and a small win is achieved, the non-reach-losing pattern is forcibly stop-displayed to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N of step 052IWS920) or when there is no small hit variation (N of step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result (step 052IWS923). At step 052 IWS 923, when the display result 1 designating command is received (when it is determined to be lost), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of the winning patterns in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are completely unmatched or the ready-to-win lost patterns in which only the left and right decorative patterns are matched. When a display result 2 designating command is received (when a 10R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns and are aligned with the pattern '7' is determined. When a display result 3 designating command is received (when 6R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns other than "7" is determined. In addition, when a display result 5 designation command is received (when 2R probability variable jackpot is determined), a combination of patterns including a special pattern (in this example, pattern 'R') is determined as a decoration pattern inside. When a display result 4 designating command or a display result 6 designating command is received (when a 6R normal big win or a 2R normal big win is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are even-numbered patterns is determined. Also, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined as a small hit), a combination of decoration designs of a small hit design (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change display of this time is a loss (step 052IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the current variable display is a failure can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. If it is not an outlier change, the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of a set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set value (step 052IWS925).

At step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, a performance control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestive performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the set value suggestive performance, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence and type of the set value suggestive performance.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the no setting value suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect A, the set value suggesting effect B, the setting value suggesting effect C, the setting value suggesting effect D, the setting value suggesting effect E, and the setting value suggesting effect F.

The setting value suggesting effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Also, the set value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect that is executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Also, the set value suggesting effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Also, the setting value suggesting effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Also, the set value suggesting effect E is, for example, a effect that is executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. Also, the set value suggesting effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the 2KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the 2KT state), the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, if it is in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of a small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the second KT state (small win RUSH) continues (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, judgment values are assigned to no small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5 . Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the highest, when the set value is "2", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the second highest, and when the set value is "3", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest, and when the set value is "4", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the second highest, and the set value is "5". In the case of , the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance B is the highest when the set value is "6".

In this example, the probability of a big win is lowest when the set value is "1" and highest when the set value is "6". However, since the second KT state may end when a big win occurs during the second KT state, the second KT state is most likely to continue when the set value is "1" (the degree of expectation for continuation is high), and when the set value is "6", the second KT state is least likely to continue. It can be said that it is in a setting state (low continuation expectation). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is ``1'', the execution ratio of the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the highest, and when the set value is ``6'', the execution ratio of the small win RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the lowest.

As described above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without the occurrence of a big win.

In addition, in this example, since the execution ratio of the small winning RUSH continuation suggesting performance A is the highest when the set value is "1", especially by executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggesting performance A, the expectation for the continuation of the second KT state (small winning RUSH) can be further enhanced.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the set value suggestion performance and the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion performance when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the execution of the set value suggestion performance and the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion performance are determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step 052 IWS 928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected at step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 052IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting performance, step 052 IWS 930 and variable display performance processing (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggesting performance selected in step 052 IWS 928, whereby the set value suggesting performance is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when the execution of the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive performance is determined, step 052IWS930 and variable display medium performance processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive performance selected in step 052IWS928, thereby executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive performance during the variable display of the decorative pattern (during the deviation fluctuation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time to the decoration design variation time timer and starts the decoration design variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-50 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101), and subtracts 1 from the value of the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the 1st KT state flag nor the 2nd KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, confirms whether the first confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, confirms whether the second confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol determination designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second forced symbol determination designation command is received (for example, whether or not the second forced determination command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

When the first compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8108, or when the second compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the decorative design variation time timer has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol results in a small win, and when the variation display of the first special symbol for a loss, a small win, or a probability variable big win is being executed, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol such as a loss, a small win or a probability variable big win is being executed, the updating of the second variation time timer is interrupted during the small win game and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration pattern variation time timer has timed out at step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processes of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 are executed to switch to the standby effect, and thereafter, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and the standby effect is continued until finally the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, a temporary stop state effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are shaken or slightly fluctuated.

It should be noted that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small pattern, the fourth pattern, etc. is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth pattern is also continuously executed. When the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is finally stopped and displayed, the variable display of these system small patterns and the fourth pattern is also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting process per special figure)
Figures 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS9706. In this characterizing portion 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set at step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the performance during the big win is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop pattern display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed but the performance during the jackpot is not yet executed, so the process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without executing the processing for displaying the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in step 052IWS9703.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small winning symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In this characterizing part 052IW, when a small winning design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag 2 is set at step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small winning. Therefore, the fact that the stop pattern display flag 2 is set means that the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed but the effect during the small winning is not executed yet, so the processing for displaying the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in step 052IWS9703 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the stop symbols (loss symbol, big win symbol, small win symbol) of the left, middle and right decoration symbols being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052 IWS9703). In addition, when the first compulsory design decision designation command and the second compulsory design decision designation command are received and the process of replacing with the missing design is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the losing design in step 052IWS9703.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of winning balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of the hit that has occurred this time is the 10R variable probability jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052 IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. If the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R variable probability big win, or the 6R normal big win, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of winning balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, display of the number of winning balls is started when a big win game based on the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big win, when a big win game based on the 2R probability variable big win or the 2R normal big win is started, the display of the number of winning balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as component for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as component for effect) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 052IWS9714).

If the big winning pattern is not confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (N of step 052IWS9704), if the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as component for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as component for effect) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the losing pattern is displayed) (N of step 052IWS9704 and N of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723). ).

(Ending effect processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). It should be noted that the effect period measuring timer is set based on the completion of all the rounds of the big win game in the effect process during the big win (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measuring timer has not timed out (step 052IWS952 N), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and executes processing for controlling the effect devices (image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) according to the content of the process data n (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the effect period measuring timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to terminate the display of the number of winning balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball count display is displayed during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the prize ball count display is erased, and the prize ball count display is displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. not.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the display of the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS960 to S962, in this example, when a jackpot game based on the 2R variable probability big win is executed, the number of prize balls is not displayed during the big win game (however, in this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R variable probability big hit is displayed, the number of prize balls is displayed continuously, but the display is not updated), but after the end of the big win game. The number of prize balls is displayed during the high probability/second KT state.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols that are lost. As shown in FIG. 10-54(A), when the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, when it comes time to execute the setting value suggestion performance, the set value suggestion performance is executed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, as shown in FIGS. 10-54(B1) to (B3).

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this case, for example, when the set value suggesting effect A is executed, the set value suggesting effect is executed by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1). Further, for example, when executing the set value suggesting effect C, the set value suggesting effect is executed by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW002 in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2). Further, for example, when executing the set value suggesting effect E, the set value suggesting effect is executed by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW003 in a red display color on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3).

In the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the setting value suggesting effect A, the setting value suggesting effect C, and the setting value suggesting effect E are executed. For example, when the setting value suggesting effect B is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in green, when the setting value suggesting effect D is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in orange, and when the setting value suggesting effect F is executed, the predetermined character image is displayed in rainbow color.

In this example, depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and a set value suggesting performance is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation as to which set value is currently set.

Next, the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is to be lost during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as "small win RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed in a recognizable manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is executed in the image display device 5 during the second KT state, when it is time to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3).

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this example, a case is shown in which racing car images are displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a blue display color. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a red display color.

In this example, the player can have expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small winning RUSH) by executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggesting performance during the variable display of the decoration pattern to be lost in the second KT state or depending on which performance image is displayed and the small winning RUSH continuation suggesting performance is executed.

Next, the display mode of the right hitting information will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the notification of hitting to the right. In this example, regardless of whether it is a jackpot in the floating display of the first special pattern, or whether the fluctuation display of the second special pattern is executed and becomes a big hit, if it is in the jackpot, as shown in FIG. The device 26 is lit (see Step 052IWS2018a, S2018b). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) lights the right-handed display 26 (see step 052 IWS 2024B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed informing LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps 052IWS2025B, S639). However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (3), during the small win game, the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are not lit, and the right hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the performance aspects of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . . Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the case of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the 10R probability variable jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jacking!", the number of rounds such as "Round 2", and the number of prize balls 052IW008. Further, when a normal winning (not over winning) to the big winning opening occurs during the big win game, as shown in FIG. 10-57(B), a winning display 052IW009 (character display of "+15" in this example) is displayed in a normal display color (in this example, white), and a normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (see steps 052IWS307, S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and execution of the over-win-time suggestive performance is determined based on the occurrence of the over win. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), a winning display 052IW010 (character display of "+15" in this example) corresponding to the determined type of suggestive effect at the time of over winning is displayed, and a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined suggestive effect at the time of over winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning effect A is executed, the image display device 5 displays the winning display in a blue display color, and the winning sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggesting performance A is shown, but for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggesting performance B is determined, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggesting performance B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is determined, the image display device 5 displays "666
OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big win game ends. In addition, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "small win RUSH in progress!"

Next, in the high-probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and the game ball enters the special winning hole, but if execution of the hint effect at the time of the small win is not determined, as shown in FIG. 052IWS325, S326).

Next, it is assumed that a small win occurs during the high-probability/second KT state, and a game ball enters a special winning hole, and execution of a suggesting presentation at the time of a small win is determined based on the occurrence of the winning of the game ball into the special winning hole. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), a winning display 052IW013 (in this example, character display of "+10") corresponding to the type of the determined small winning suggestion effect is displayed, and a winning sound corresponding to the determined small winning winning suggestion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, in the case of executing the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect F is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggesting effect F is shown, but for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggesting effect D is determined, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggesting effect D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although illustration is omitted, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of winning balls reaching 1,000, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing performance B is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2000, the character display such as ``2000 OVER'' is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasis performance B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing performance C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3000, the character display such as ``3000 OVER'' is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing performance C is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing performance D is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 4000, the image display device 5 displays characters such as ``4000 OVER'' and the prize ball number emphasis performance D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing performance E is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as ``5000 OVER'' is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing performance E is executed.

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, the total game value given by the small win during the jackpot game or the high probability/second KT state), the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, according to the number of small wins occurring during the high probability/second KT state and the number of execution times of variable display executed during the high probability/second KT state, it may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios, and various modes are conceivable.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small win is achieved in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display of the first special symbol is the big winning variation of the probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable big hit or 6R probability variable big hit), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, see Y in step 052IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped as a lost symbol (see step 052IWS1128A N, step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1127A, see N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that becomes a probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, or 2R probability variable big hit), as shown in FIG. Display continues. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, see Y in step 052IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), as shown in FIG.

In addition, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F), even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, see N in step 052IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, there is no determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modified example 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129A as it is, and performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, there is no determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129B as it is, and performs control to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that is a big hit, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that is a probability variable big hit or a big winning variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. N of IWS 1127A, see step 052 IWS 1129A).

On the other hand, when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that results in a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the updating of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1127A, see N).

When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, regardless of whether the variable display of the second special symbol is a big winning variation that is a probability variable big hit or a big winning variation that is a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. N of IWS 1127B, see step 052 IWS 1129B).

On the other hand, when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the first special pattern during the variable display of the second special pattern that results in a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, see N in step 052IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 2, instead of the determination processes of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In modification 2, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-63, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 2, instead of the determination processes of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22, the process of step 052IWS1127D is included.

In the modification 2, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern to be a big hit, the variable display of the first special pattern is continued even if the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Specifically, during the small winning game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, see Y in step 052IWS1127C).

On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the first special pattern during the variable display of the second special pattern to be a big hit, the variable display of the second special pattern is continued even if the small winning pattern is stop-displayed as shown in FIG. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1127D, see Y).

On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG.

In addition, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, other than the method shown in the modified example 1 and the modified example 2, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol to be lost, the forced losing is stopped, and when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol to be a small hit. may be configured to continue to fluctuate.

Further, for example, when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes the 10R probability variable big hit, the game may be forced to lose and stop, while if the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes the 2R probability variable big hit, the fluctuation may be continued.

In addition, for example, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special pattern during the normal state (low probability/low base state), it may be constituted so as to be forced to stop regardless of whether the variable display of the second special pattern in execution is a losing variation, a small winning variation or a big winning variation. With such a configuration, in this example, when 50 fluctuation displays are completed in the low-probability/high-base state, the state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state (see FIG. 10-29). However, when 1 to 4 second reserve memories are accumulated when the change display is completed 50 times and the state is shifted to the low-probability/low-base state, and if there is a second reserve memory that will result in a big win among them, a forced loss stop can be made to prevent a big win at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in the present example, it is possible to make the second start winning opening, which is likely to start winning, start winning by performing the right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner, while causing the first start winning opening to start winning and perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

As described above, various aspects can be conceived as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the missing symbol. FIG. 10-66 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, in the modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 3, there is no determination process of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22. Therefore, in Modification 3, if the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol (N of step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a variable probability big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67(B), in the third modification, during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped as a missing symbol as in FIG. 10-59(B).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped in the variable display of the first special symbol, unlike FIG. 10-59(E), even if the small winning symbol is stopped, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

As shown in FIG. 10-67, in the modification 3, the control for forcibly stopping and displaying the special symbols by removing the variable display of the special symbols is different between when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

In the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stop-displayed by the variable display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big win, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stop-displayed by the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a normal big win, while the variable display is continued. For example, on the contrary, when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed by the variable display of the second special pattern during the execution of the variable display of the first special pattern which is usually a big win, the variable display is continued, and when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed by the variable display of the first special pattern during the execution of the variable display of the second special pattern which is a normal big win, the machine may be forced to come off and stop. Further, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variable display during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big hit or a normal big win), while the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big win (regardless of whether the variable probability big hit or the normal big win). may be configured. As such, in some form, the control for the forced dropout stop may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A-S1128A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In modification 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variable flag is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory design confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modification 4, the determination processing of step 052IWS1131A is executed, so that when the small winning symbol is stop-displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is not uniformly displayed in a lost symbol and is forcibly stopped, but in the definite variable state, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a lost symbol. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is not in the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B-S1128B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R variable probability big hit, the 6R variable probability big hit, nor the 2R variable probability big hit (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1131B is executed, so that when the small winning pattern is stop-displayed in the variable display of the first special pattern during the variable display of the second special pattern which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special pattern is not uniformly displayed in a lost pattern and is forcibly stopped, but in the definite variable state, the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed in a lost pattern. On the other hand, even during variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, if the probability variable state is not in effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the fourth modification, the case where control is performed to forcibly stop and display the winning pattern depending on whether the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state) is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set, it may be configured to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Further, for example, only when the high probability/low base state (high probability flag is ON, high base flag is OFF), control may be performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols. In some form, it may be configured so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, in the case of performing the control to forcibly stop and display the losing pattern only in the high probability/low base state, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of one identification information from causing a normal big hit, and to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the characterizing portion 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big winning game state) that is advantageous to the player, can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given according to the special state. Then, in response to the passage of the game medium (eg, game ball) through the specific area (eg, special winning hole), it is possible to execute a setting suggestive effect (eg, when winning a small prize). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is configured to be able to execute the suggestion performance at the time of winning a small win based on the fact that a game ball has entered a special winning hole during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), but since the frequency of winning to the special winning hole is particularly high during the small win RUSH, it is possible to draw attention to the set suggestion performance (in this example, the suggestion performance at the time of a small win), and to improve the interest of the setting suggestion performance.

In this example, a case is shown in which a setting suggestive effect (in this example, a suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a special winning hole as a specific area, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be able to execute the setting suggesting effect based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole (ball winning device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning hole 10, or the big winning hole as the specific area. Moreover, it may be configured such that the setting suggesting effect can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the out port as the specific area. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the setting suggesting effect based on the game ball passing through the gates such as the passage gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big winning game state) that is advantageous to the player, can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given according to the special state. In addition, setting suggestion effects (for example, number-of-balls display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease with which the setting-suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period during which the special state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect B can be executed with a probability of 2%, and the number of prize balls is 666. When the number of prize balls reaches 2456, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance C can be executed with a probability of 1%, when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance D can be executed with a probability of 5%, when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance E can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2666, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance F can be executed with a probability of 2%. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the "length of the period of control in the special state" indicates the case where the number of prize balls display suggesting effect is executed at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, the period until a certain game value is given), but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the ``length of the period controlled to the special state'' may be the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big win game state), the length of the period controlled to the special state (in this example, the small win game state), or the total length of these periods.

In addition, when the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the big win game to the ending may be used, or the length of the period of only the round game during the big win game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game, the higher the ratio of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, for example, in the case of a big win with a small number of rounds during a big win game, compared to a big win with a large number of rounds, it may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion performance at a higher rate.

Further, for example, as the ``length of the period controlled in the special state'', the number-of-prizing-balls display suggesting effect may be executed according to the number of small wins occurring during the high-probability/second KT state or the number of times variable display is executed during the high-probability/second KT state. In this case, for example, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. Further, for example, at the timing when the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, the number-of-balls display suggesting effect may be executed at a high rate, and various modes are conceivable as the ``length of the period controlled to the special state''.

In addition, in general, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as ``XXX OVER'' is displayed in a game machine, the display is performed in units with a certain limit, such as the display of ``1000 OVER'' or ``2000 OVER'' in the prize ball number emphasizing effect shown in this example, in units of 1000 prize balls. On the other hand, the performance suggesting display of the number of prize balls shown in the present example is executed at a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 and 2666, so that high setting can be expected while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the display suggestion performance of the number of prize balls, and interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for big hit determination) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that a game ball wins a small hit in the high probability/second KT state and the game ball wins in the special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize and a suggesting effect to display the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, a case is shown in which setting suggesting performance (in this example, suggesting performance at the time of winning a small prize, and suggesting performance for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in a special winning hole, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be constructed such that the setting suggesting effect is executed at the start of the small winning game during the fluctuation of the small winning or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, for example, by changing the mode of notification of a small hit when a small hit occurs, the setting suggesting effect may be executed. As long as it executes the setting suggestion effect in some form in response to the control to the small hit.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when controlled to an advantageous state and when controlled to a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) can be controlled to an easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) in which game media (for example, game balls) can easily enter and a non-easy-to-enter state (for example, closed state) in which entry is difficult or impossible. Also, in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect (for example, based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in an open state and a game ball has entered the big winning hole or the special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect for displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, a setting suggestion performance (in this example, a suggestion performance at the time of winning a small prize, a presentation suggestion performance for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won in a big winning hole or a special winning hole, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the opening performance is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion performance may be executed by changing the performance mode of the opening performance. In some form, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the jackpot game, when shifting from the low probability/1st KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)), it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed at step 052IWS624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the switching of control of the game state.

In this example, as "when the control of the game state is switched", when the big win game is started or ended, or when the low-probability/first KT state is shifted to the normal state (low-probability/low base state), the setting-suggestion performance is configured to be executable, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggesting performance may be executable in the performance period when shifting to the big winning game during the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) or during the performance period when shifting from the big winning game to the high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state). Further, for example, in a game machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays during a high base state or the occurrence of a predetermined number of small wins, the setting suggesting performance may be executed during the performance period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH).

Also, in this example, the case where the setting suggesting effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by changing the performance modes of the fanfare performance at the start of the big win and the ending performance at the end of the big win, the setting suggestion performance may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at different selection ratios according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is performed during the special state (for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, the number of prize ball display suggestions can be made at different selection ratios. Alternatively, for example, according to the number of small wins occurring during the high probability/2nd KT state or the number of executions of variable display during the high probability/2nd KT state, the number of prize ball display suggesting effects A through F may be executed at different selection ratios. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total game value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, the special state can be controlled between an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous special state. In addition, when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state, it is possible to execute the set suggestion performance at different selection ratios (for example, only when the game ball enters the special winning hole as a small win during the 2KT state, the suggestion performance at the time of winning a small prize or the number of winning balls display suggestion performance can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, only when a game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole during the second KT state, a case is shown in which a suggesting performance at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting performance for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, even when a game ball wins in a special winning hole during the 1KT state, it may be configured to be able to execute a small win suggesting effect and a prize ball number display suggesting effect, and depending on whether a game ball wins in the special winning hole during the 2KT state or a game ball wins in the special winning hole during the 1KT state, the small win suggesting effect and the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed at different rates. In addition, for example, even when an irregular winning of a game ball into a special winning hole occurs during a non-KT state, the suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or the suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls may be configured to be executable.

In the case of the above configuration, when a special prize winning opening or an irregular winning occurs during the first KT state (high base state), compared with the case where the special winning opening occurs during the second KT state, it may be configured to execute the small winning prize suggesting performance and the prize ball number display suggesting performance at a higher rate, or may be configured to execute the small winning prize suggesting performance and the winning ball number display suggesting performance at a lower rate.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the value of the number of prize balls counter and the display of the number of prize balls are updated during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), and during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first During the KT state), the value of the prize ball counter is not updated (however, the prize ball counter is not reset), the display of the number of prize balls is not displayed in principle, and the value of the prize ball counter is reset when the variable display of 50 times in the low probability/first KT state is completed and the state is shifted to the normal state (low probability/low base state). The value of the number-of-balls counter may be updated during a big-hit game based on the 2R variable probability big-hit or the 2R normal big-hit.

In this example, due to the configuration as described above, for example, after ending the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) and transitioning to a high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state), when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs during the high base state and shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small win RUSH While the number of balls is taken over, the value of the number of prize balls counter can be updated and the display of the number of prize balls can be displayed.

In addition, not only the display of the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 10R variable variable jackpot is obtained and the state shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) and the jackpot game immediately before that are set as one section, and the number of prize balls in the section may be counted and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, by changing the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the aggregated value, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current setting value may be executed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 052IW, a case of executing a suggesting performance at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting performance of displaying the number of prize balls in a mode in which the current set value suggests any of the set values ``1'' to ``6'' as ``setting suggesting performance'' is shown, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a mode of suggesting whether or not the setting change for changing the set value has been performed when the game machine is powered on. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any format that suggests settings.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and when the specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player, and the special display result (e.g., small win symbol) is displayed as the display result of the variable display. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state when it is derived and displayed. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big win pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big win pattern), and the derived display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game). Also, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, is performed, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed). Also, during execution of variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on this, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a failed symbol). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one identification information results in a normal big win (non-probability variable big win) in spite of the shift to the second KT state (small win RUSH) or probability variable state, the second KT state (small win RUSH) or probability variable state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. On the other hand, if the winning symbols are uniformly stopped and displayed (forcibly lost) in the variable display corresponding to the remaining retention of the identification information on one side, even the variable display of the probability variable big win will be forced to be lost, and the game value given to the player in an advantageous state (big win game state) will decrease, which is undesirable. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, while the variable display of the normal big win (non-probable variable big win) is forcibly missed, the variable display of the probability variable big win is extended (interrupted the measurement of the variable time), thereby suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player and improving the interest in the game.

In this example, as a mode of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be resumed after the end of the small winning game. As long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form, it is acceptable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game value (for example, prize balls) is likely to be awarded due to the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be given due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the non-specific state (e.g., low probability state). Also, based on the derivation display of the first specific display result, it is controlled to the specific state (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the big win game based on the variable probability big win is finished), and it is controlled to the non-specific state based on the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is not controlled to the variable probability state after the big win game based on the normal big win is finished). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the non-specific state (e.g., low probability state). Further, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the game medium (eg, game ball) passing through the specific region (eg, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, game media pass through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (see FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to derive and display the special display result in both the case of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of executing the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Also, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into account whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is taken into consideration.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the non-specific state (e.g., low probability state). Further, the variable display executing means derives and displays the variable display of the one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result derived from the variable display of the other identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). Further, when the control is performed in the non-specific state, when the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is executed, if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 052IW, the first identification information (e.g., the first special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium (e.g., game ball) into the first start area (e.g., the first start winning opening), and the second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (e.g., the second start winning opening). In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 17) that can be changed between a first state (for example, open state) in which game media can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which game media cannot or cannot enter is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, it is controllable to either an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player or a special state (for example, a small win game state) having a lower advantage than the advantageous state, and the variable means is controlled to the first state when being controlled to the special state. The first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths that the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is provided so that a game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) can enter. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, the right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting the shooting of the game medium to a specific path, and when the first identification information is controlled to a special state after the variable display is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Specifically, as shown in the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small win type on the first special symbol side is configured to have a lower winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening than the small win type on the second special symbol side, and when the small win is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is forced to stop. 2, if right-handed notification is executed for a small win on the side of a first special pattern having a low winning ratio (advantage), the player wastes the game ball even though it is virtually impossible to expect a prize in the special winning hole, and rather disadvantageous launch promotion notification is performed, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, by executing right-handed notification for the small win on the second special symbol side and not executing right-handed notification for the small win on the first special symbol side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantage due to the player's wasteful hitting and realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the first reserved storage means (e.g., first reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage, and a second reserved storage means (e.g., second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the derived display of the special display result as the display result of one of the variable displays, the predetermined display result (for example, the missing pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the other variable display. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball into a special winning opening), and a value higher than the predetermined value can be given when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 winning balls are paid out based on a winning of a game ball to a big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the second specific notification having higher visibility than the first specific notification (For example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56 (1)) can be executed. Also, when controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. When controlled to the special state, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, the special state (for example, a small winning A) is controlled to a type with a low advantage by a high rate compared to the case where the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decoration pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display performance in a common mode when it is controlled in a special state and when it is not controlled in a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed and a small win is obtained, the non-reach out pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, the regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member may be provided as a delay means for causing the game ball to meander left and right.

In addition, according to this characterizing part 052IW, game control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on information from the game control means. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the case is shown in which the notification of hitting to the right is executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. In this case, it may be structured so that right-handed information is executed during the big winning game when the variation display of the second special pattern results in a big win, while right-handed information is not performed during the big winning game when the variation display of the first special pattern results in a big win. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute left-handed notification during the big win game. In other words, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special pattern, the player can be restrained from erroneously performing a right-hand hitting operation by executing left-hand hitting information during the big-win game, and the player's disadvantage can be suppressed.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even in the KT state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning hole is provided on the left side of the game area, it may be configured not to execute right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the big win game, the right hitting display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even in the second KT state (during the small win RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big win game, in addition to lighting the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37, the right hitting display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37, the right hitting display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1), a symbol indicating right-handed hitting (for example, right-pointing triangle display) is displayed on the image display device 5. It may be configured to be able to execute right-handed notification.

In addition, the way of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices may be provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of the small win, and the selection ratio of the small win type may be different between when the small win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol and when the small win is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of prize balls (or the small winning type with the open mode with the low winning rate) is likely to be selected, and when performing the variable display with the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with the large number of winning balls (or the small winning type with the open mode with the high winning rate) is likely to be selected.

Also, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and when a small hit occurs in the first special symbol variation display, right-handed information is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)). can be configured to For example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small win occurs in a situation where the left-hand hitting operation should be performed, the right-hand hitting information may not be performed during the small winning game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for big hit determination) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the set value changes the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the set value becomes too noticeable, and gambling may become excessively high. Therefore, in this characterizing part 052IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value, and preventing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the special state can be controlled between a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, when a variable display is executed in which a predetermined display result (for example, a winning symbol) different from a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small winning symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, a set value suggesting effect suggesting a set value (for example, a set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the case where the small winning RUSH continuation suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are executed in the variation display of losing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a small winning RUSH continuation suggesting effect or a set value suggesting effect during the big winning game or the small winning game, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Also, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small win type is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value from becoming excessively large, and preventing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, regardless of which of the setting values ``1'' to ``6'', the allocation of the small hit type is the same. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that the determination ratio of the small hit type is changed according to which one of the set values "1" to "6", so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of kinds of advantageous states (for example, 10R variable probability big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the big win type is shared), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value, and preventing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, regardless of which of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', the allocation of the jackpot types is the same. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Also, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (variation pattern distribution is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value from becoming excessively large and preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is common, the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) will greatly differ due to elements other than the big win lottery, which is not preferable, but in this characteristic part 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the setting value, such a problem does not occur.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, regardless of which of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', the case where the allocation of the variation pattern is the same was shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by varying the rate of determination of the variation pattern according to which of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency may be varied depending on the set value, and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (e.g., determination value for big hit determination) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, a special determination value (e.g., determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display, and a predetermined determination value (e.g., determination value for deviation determination) for determining a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and special display result as the display result of variable display. . In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Also, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state include a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when a variable display is executed in which a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) is derived and displayed by being controlled to a special state, a set value suggesting effect (for example, a set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for big hit determination) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the number of special determination values differs between the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), the control that takes into account the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display regarding the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined display result (forced stoppage) could not be realized. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, the following (means A1) to (means A6) are also disclosed for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol); Advantageous state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a winning pattern) is derived and displayed, and a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. (For example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the variable display execution means is based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the second control that derives and displays the variable display of the one identification information with a predetermined display result (e.g., lost symbol) (e.g., the lost symbol is displayed and stopped (e.g., the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost symbol)). is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) Steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B and S1130B are executed according to the determination results of WS1127A and S1127B. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) The means A1 may be configured to include a special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2208) capable of controlling a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game values (for example, prize balls) are likely to be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In means A1 or means A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (e.g., variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (e.g., normal jackpot pattern). Specific state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103), the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result (for example, controls to the variable probability state after the jackpot game based on the probability variable big hit is over), and controls to the non-specific state based on the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, controls to the variable probability state after the big win game based on the normal jackpot). not). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of means A1 to A3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern), and a specific state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specific Specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means can be controlled to a specific state based on the game medium (eg, game ball) passing through the specific region (eg, V region 052IW104) when being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) can control steps 052IWS2404, S24 05, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (as shown in FIG. As shown in (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big win pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern), and the derived display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the big win game ends), and the variable display executing means is configured to vary the first identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Step 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), and during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result which is the variable display of the first identification information, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. Based on that, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B).), during the execution of the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result , When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information, the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control considering whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is performed.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big win pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern), and the derived display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game is finished), and is in a state different from the advantageous state and unspecified. Specific state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206) that is controllable to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probability variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the state (e.g., low probability state), and the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when being controlled to the specific state. A variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B when Y is Y, steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A. 0-69), when the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is executed while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052IWS1. 131A and S1131B, if N, step 052IWS1129A and S1129B are not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control of deriving the variable display of the identification information based on the predetermined display result (forced deviation stop), the control considering the advantageous degree of the display result of the variable display could not be realized. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, the following (means B1) to (means B6) are also disclosed for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol); Advantageous state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a winning pattern) is derived and displayed, and a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. (For example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result in either case of executing the variable display of the first identification information or executing the variable display of the second identification information. 10-3 and 10-4), while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed), and the one of the identification information 2nd control (e.g., display the missing symbol and stop displaying the variable display with a predetermined display result (e.g., the missing symbol) (e.g., the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol) can be executed, and which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is step Steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B and S1130B are executed according to the judgment results of 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) The means B1 may be configured to include a special state control means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) that executes step 052IWS2208) capable of controlling a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game values (for example, prize balls) are likely to be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or means B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (e.g., variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (e.g., normal jackpot pattern). Specific state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103), the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result (for example, controls to the variable probability state after the jackpot game based on the probability variable big hit is over), and controls to the non-specific state based on the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, controls to the variable probability state after the big win game based on the normal jackpot). not). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any of the means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern), and a specific state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specific Specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means can be controlled to a specific state based on the game medium (eg, game ball) passing through the specific region (eg, V region 052IW104) when being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) can control steps 052IWS2404, S24 05, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (as shown in FIG. As shown in (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big win pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big win pattern), and the derived display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends), and the variable display executing means is configured to vary the first identification information. During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed based on the special display result derived from the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. 67 (B)), when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. -66, see FIG. 10-67 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability big win pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern), and the derived display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derived display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a variable probability state after the big win game ends), and is in a state different from the advantageous state and unspecified. Specific state control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206) that can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probability variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the state (e.g., low probability state) When the variable display execution means is controlled to the specific state, the variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B when Y is Y, steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A. 0-69), when the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is executed when the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed and the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 052IWS1. 131A and S1131B, if N, step 052IWS1129A and S1129B are not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the control is in a specific state.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the present characteristic portion 052IW, and the set value suggestion performance can be executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance can be executed, the right-hand hitting notification can be executed, the over winning prize suggestion performance can be executed, the small win prize winning suggestion performance can be executed, and the number of prize balls display suggestion performance can be executed. Further, for example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM to be changed may be applied to the present characteristic portion 052IW, and when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the one special symbol may be forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol or the variable display may be continued.

Also, when applying the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 021TM, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the configuration may be such that the set value is suggested by changing the aspect of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small win RUSH and a chance mode is executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card is executed, and a maker logo is displayed, and the set value may be suggested by changing the display mode of the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, and the maker logo display, or by changing the display mode of the image displayed at the same time.

By combining the gaming machines described in Patent Document (JP 2018-033787A) and Patent Document (JP 2010-200902A), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. However, simply executing the setting suggestion effect in a game configured to be controllable to a special state cannot sufficiently improve the interest in the game. Therefore, the characteristic part 052IW also discloses the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means C1) to (means C7) for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine which is capable of playing a game and which can be set to one of a plurality of set values (e.g., set values "1" to "6") with different degrees of advantage for the player, and which is different from the advantageous state control means (e.g., the part that executes steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is a state, and a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the game value is likely to be given by the special state (for example, steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2 in the game control microcomputer 100) 213), and set suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion for executing 052IWS323 and S324 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a set suggestion performance (for example, a suggestion performance at the time of winning a small prize) in response to the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning hole). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and the special state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small win game state) when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and determines the display result of the variable display. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, step 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) using the judgment value (for example, the judgment value for judging the big hit, the judgment value for judging the small hit). value) and a special judgment value for determining to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment), and a plurality of setting values with different numbers of specific judgment values (for example, setting values ``1'' to ``6''). may be configured to be common regardless of set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or C2, the setting suggesting effect execution means can execute the setting suggesting effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that a game ball wins a small win in the high probability/second KT state and the game ball wins in the special winning hole, it is possible to execute the suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or the number of winning balls display suggesting effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) Variable means control means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which an entry is difficult or impossible (for example, a closed state) in any of the means C1 to C3 when the control is in the advantageous state or in the special state. S122 to S124, S126 and S127), and the setting suggesting effect executing means can execute the setting suggesting effect in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in an open state and a game ball enters the big winning hole or the special winning hole, a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect for displaying the number of prize balls is provided. executable). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In any of the means C1 to the C4, the setting suggestions can be executed (for example, when the control of the gaming status is switched (for example, when the start of the jackpot is started or the first kt, the normal state (low -probability / low base)), in any of the C1 to the C4. It may be configured to be configured to change the display form of the right -handed display (for example, display color) in the up 052IWS624. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of control of the game state.

(Means C6) In any one of means C1 to means C5, the setting suggestion effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect at different selection ratios according to the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times variable display is performed during the special state (for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666). Alternatively, for example, according to the number of small hits occurring during the high probability/second KT state or the number of variable display execution times during the high probability/second KT state, the number of prize balls display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total game value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Means C7) In any one of means C1 to C6, the special state control means can control the special state to be an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous special state, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs setting suggestion effects at different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific region during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes the specific region during the disadvantageous special state. It may be executable (for example, only when a game ball wins a small win in the second KT state and a game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small win or a suggesting effect for displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 020SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 020SH includes game state control means, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, holding storage means, setting means, and effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the pending storage means, and the setting means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can control to an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. The special state is a game state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small winning game state.

The special state is a state that is likely to be controlled to a special state, such as the second KT state. The second KT state is a gaming state in which small hits are likely to occur, and is a gaming state in which game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening. The non-special state is a game state that is less likely to be controlled to a special state than the special state, such as the first KT state. The first KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur, but a gaming state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the special winning opening. Although the second KT state and the first KT state may be compared with each other, the frequency of occurrence of small wins may be the same, but the second KT state is more likely to be controlled to the small win game because the time (for example, opening time, etc.) during which the second KT state is controlled to the small win game is longer.

In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as "variable display") is not performed. Specifically, a state in which variable display is not performed is a state in which identification information (big hit pattern) indicating an advantageous state is derived and displayed and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or a state in which identification information (small winning pattern) indicating a special state is derived and displayed and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in the configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, the state in which the variable display is not performed includes the case where one symbol (special symbol) is being stopped and displayed with a big winning symbol or a small winning symbol derived and displayed, and the variable display of the other symbol is being interrupted.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, when the special state (second KT state) is controlled to the special state (minor winning game state), the effect executing means can execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state. When the special state (second KT state) is controlled to the special state, the game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening. For this reason, the effect executing means executes, for example, a special effect of informing a small winning game.

On the other hand, when the performance executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestive performance which is different from the special performance and which suggests contents advantageous to the player. Even if it is controlled to a special state in a non-special state (first KT state), almost no game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestive effect includes, for example, a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, a probability change notification effect, etc. based on the look-ahead determination, as will be described later. However, the suggestive effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of times of consecutive games, the total number of variable display times, the total number of winning balls, etc. in the pachinko game machine 1, or the explanation of the effect contents in the pachinko game machine 1, or the like. In addition, the content that is advantageous to the player suggested by the suggestive effect may be any information that the player wants to know when playing the game, and includes, for example, content that suggests a disadvantageous state for the player (for example, suggestion that the set value is low).

Further, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect executing means can variably display the decoration identification information in correspondence with the variably displayed identification information. Decoration identification information is a decoration design, for example. Further, the effect executing means displays a special display result as a display result of the decoration identification information when the special state is controlled in the special state. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (for example, "1, 3, 5") indicating a small hit. Incidentally, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the effect executing means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Further, the effect executing means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information when being controlled to the special state in the non-special state. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a failure. A combination of losing symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The determination performed by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, and more specifically, the same determination as the various determinations performed when the variable display is started, and is performed before the various timings. The various determinations include, for example, jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect for suggesting the pre-start determining means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the prefetch determination.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the reservation storage means stores information regarding variable display as reservation storage information. The pending storage information is, for example, information that has been judged by the pre-start judging means, but may also include information that has not been judged. The performance executing means displays the pending storage information stored in the pending storage means as a pending display. For example, the effect execution means holds and displays the hold storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determination means. The display mode of the pending display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal display mode.

Further, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect acting on the pending display in the suggestive effect. Specifically, the effect executing means can execute an effect effect suggesting that the display mode of the pending display may change as the pending change suggesting effect. For example, an effect rendering is a rendering that reveals a pending display of a subject that may change and performs some action on the pending display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect that an object hits the pending display of the target, an effect that lightning strikes the pending display of the target, or the like. In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the pending display changes and times when the display mode of the pending display does not change. The effect in which the effect effect is performed and the display mode of the pending display does not change is a so-called fake effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "false pending change suggestive effect"). Note that the suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means is not limited to the pending change suggestion effect. For example, when the pending memory information prefetched to be a big hit is stored, or when the pending memory information prefetched to be the variation pattern of SP (super) reach to lose is stored, a performance of displaying a background image or a character image suggesting that the pending memory information with a high degree of expectation of the big hit is stored may be performed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the setting means can set any one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values are a plurality of values set corresponding to the odds of winning the jackpot, and are values set to any one of "1" to "6", for example. The effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect (hereinafter referred to as "set value suggestive effect") for suggesting the setting means. The setting value suggesting effect is an effect that makes the player guess the setting value, for example, from the background image or the character image. Note that the set value suggesting effect may be an effect showing the set value itself. In the characteristic portion 020SH, the setting value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the setting value is high than when the setting value is low.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the non-special states include a first non-special state and a second non-special state that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-variable probability state (low probability state), for example, low probability/first KT state. The second non-special state is a probability variable state (high probability state), for example, high probability/first KT state. The effect executing means can execute a common effect when being controlled in the first non-special state and when being controlled in the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, a effect controlled to a common effect mode ("chance time mode" in the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, a effect in which a specific effect image, specific BGM, or the like, which is different from normal, is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image referred to here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a pending image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Also, the suggestive effect is a effect that suggests that the second non-special state is being controlled (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probability variable suggestive effect"). The probability variation suggesting effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (eg, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) that suggests that the second non-special state is being controlled.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different modes as the suggestive effects. The plurality of types of suggestive effects are, as described above, a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, a probability variable suggestive effect, and the like. In addition, there are multiple types of suggestive effects for each suggestive effect. For example, in the case of the pending change suggesting effect, there may be an effect with a high possibility that the pending display will change and an effect with a low possibility that the pending display will change. Further, for example, in the case of the set value suggesting effect, there is a mode suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high, and a mode suggesting that the possibility of the low setting is high. In addition, in the case of probability variation suggesting production, there are aspects suggesting that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the probability variation state, and aspects suggesting that the possibility of being controlled to the probability variation state is low.

In the characteristic part 020SH, the advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed. For example, in the setting value suggesting performance, when the set value suggesting performance suggesting that the possibility of high setting is high is executed, the advantage for the player is higher than the case of performing the set value suggesting performance suggesting that the possibility of low setting is high. Further, for example, in the variable probability suggesting performance, when the variable probability suggesting performance suggesting that the possibility of being controlled to the variable probability state is high is executed, the advantage to the player is high compared to the case of executing the variable probability suggesting performance suggesting that the possibility of being controlled to the variable probability state is low.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. A gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH includes a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means can be changed between a first state (open state) in which game media easily pass through the start area and a second state (closed state) in which game media hardly pass through the start area.

The game state control means can control the first variable prize winning means to a predetermined state in which it is easy to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small winning game in which game balls hardly win a prize is repeatedly executed). The effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect when controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 020SH has a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for a small hit. The second variable winning means can be changed between an easy winning state (open state) in which game balls can easily win and a difficult winning state (closed state) in which game balls cannot win easily. The second variable winning means can change to an easy winning state in a special state (small winning game state). The effect executing means executes a suggestive effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state. Specifically, for example, the effect executing means executes the suggestive effect in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 020SH, when the special state (for example, the second KT state) is controlled to the special state (minor win), the performance execution means can execute a predetermined performance corresponding to the passage of the game medium through the special area based on the passage of the game medium through the special area. Specifically, the special area is an area (for example, a V area or a discharge area) through which a game ball that has won the special variable winning device 7 passes. A game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by a second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. As a result, prize balls are paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect indicating winning to the special variable prize winning device 7 or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out due to the winning.

Further, the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area when it is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state). Specifically, when the special state is controlled in the non-special state, the effect executing means executes the suggestive effect without executing the predetermined effect.

(Regarding the transition of the game state and the production mode after the jackpot game in the characteristic part 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-1, the transition of the game state after the jackpot game in the characteristic portion 020SH and the transition of the effect mode according to the game state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the jackpot game according to the characteristic portion 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the characteristic portion 020SH, the normal state (low probability/low base state) is controlled to the normal mode. In addition, in the high probability / low base state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Also, in the high-probability/high-base state and the low-probability/high-base state, the chan-time mode is controlled. That is, in the high-probability/high-base state and the low-probability/high-base state, a common effect is executed.

Also, regarding the performance during the big win game, a common performance may be executed in the case where the big win game based on the 6R probability variable big win is executed and the case where the big win game based on the 6R normal big win is executed. In other words, a common combination of decoration symbols is stop-displayed in the 6R probability variable jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and a common jackpot performance is executed during each jackpot game. This makes it impossible for a player to discriminate whether a big winning game based on the 6R probability variable big winning is executed (controlled to a high probability/high base state) or whether a big winning game based on the 6R normal big winning is executed (controlled to a low probability/high base state).

In the characteristic part 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined as the 6R normal jackpot, but is determined as the 2R normal jackpot in principle. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the transition to the low probability/high base state or the continuation of the low probability/high base state is made. Therefore, when a big win game based on the 2R normal big win is executed in the KT state, an effect (separately prepared big win effect or effect mode) for notifying the low probability/high base state may be executed.

In addition, when a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player will know that the state has changed to the high probability/high base state or that the high probability/high base state has been continued. Therefore, when a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect (separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) for notifying the high probability/high base state may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the case of a so-called first hit, that is, in the case of transition from the normal state to the high probability/high base state or to the low probability/high base state.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R normal jackpot may be determined instead of the 2R normal jackpot. Thus, in the KT state, a common performance is performed in the case where the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed and the case where the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot is executed, so that the player cannot discriminate which type of jackpot game has been executed (whether it is controlled to a high probability/high base state or a low probability/high base state).

(An example of production mode setting processing related to characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-2, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the characteristic part 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure per waiting process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 020SHS11). When a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it is a variable probability jackpot (step 020SHS12). If it is not a probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, if it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 decides to control the performance mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14), and terminates a series of processing. In addition, in the case of the 2R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the effect mode (separately prepared effect mode) for notifying the low probability/high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, when the probability variable jackpot is determined (step 020SHS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 6R probability variable jackpot is achieved (step 020SHS13). If the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS14 to determine to control the effect mode to the chance time mode. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of the normal jackpot and in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot. On the other hand, if it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 020SHS13: NO), the effect control CPU 120 decides to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and terminates a series of processes.

In step 020SHS11, when the big hit start designation command is not received (step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit start designation command is not received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has passed (step 020SHS17). At step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state has passed without receiving the command (corresponding to "predetermined period" at step 020SHS17).

At step 020SHS17, when the predetermined period has not elapsed (step 020SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. When the predetermined period has passed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special game is "losing", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter for effect is "0" (step 020SHS18). When the value of the effect high base number counter is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processes. When the value of the effect high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts "1" from the value of the effect high base number counter (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become "0" (step 020SHS20). If the value of the effect high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the performance high base frequency counter becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines to control the performance mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and terminates a series of processes.

In the production mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, after the jackpot game is executed by the processing of steps 020SHS12 to 14, when controlled to the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state, it is controlled to the chance time mode which is a common production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing between the high probability/high base state and the low probability/high base state.

(An example of display control processing corresponding to variable display related to characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, an example of display (holding display and active display) control processing corresponding to variable display related to the characteristic portion 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11C. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of display control processing for variable display according to the characteristic portion 020SH. The display control process corresponding to variable display is a process executed in the pre-reading notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning designation command is received (step 020SHS31). If the starting winning designation command (first effective starting winning designation command or second effective starting winning designation command) is not received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. When the starting winning designation command has been received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color, which is the display mode when the suspension display is started, is determined (step 020SHS32), and the final color, which is the final display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspension display and active display), is determined (step 020SHS33). Initial color determination and final color determination use the initial color determination table and final color determination table described below.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display compatible display)
FIG. 11D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for display corresponding to variable display. In FIG. 11-4, (A) shows the initial color determination table, and (B) shows the final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates a display mode when the display corresponding to the variable display (holding display) is started. In addition, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) that is finally displayed.

In the characteristic part 020SH, the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display can be changed at a change timing such as during the execution of the variable display, when the variable display is started (during so-called holding shift), or during execution of the small winning game in the chance time mode. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "gray". The display mode of "gray" is a normal display mode. Moreover, the display mode of "red", "green" and "blue" is a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

In addition, in (A) and (B), the variation pattern indicates one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the characterizing section 020SH, since the description is mainly directed to the production in the chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state), in FIG. 11-4, the variation pattern (the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 10-8 (E) and 10-9 (H)) used in the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state will be described as an example.

The "big hit" variation pattern is, for example, the second variation patterns #13 and #28 with a variation time of 2 minutes. In the second variation patterns #13 and #28, decorative symbols indicating a big hit are stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss" is, for example, second fluctuation patterns #09, #12, #24, #27 with a fluctuation time of 2 minutes. In the second variation patterns #09, #12, #24, and #27, decorative symbols indicating a loss are stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The variation patterns of "other failures" are, for example, the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 with a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.

In addition, the "other losing" variation patterns include second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, and #26, which are selected when the variation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and a small hit is determined. In the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26 having a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds, the variable display mode of the decorative patterns is not the SP ready-to-win mode, and the determined decorative patterns of the losing combination are stopped and displayed. In the second variation patterns #07, #08, #22, #23 and the second variation patterns #10, #11, #25, #26 with a variation time of 1 second or 5 seconds, normal ready-to-win performance may be performed, and fixed decoration patterns of the winning combination of ready-to-win mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the “jackpot” variation pattern, the final color display mode is such that “red” is most likely to be selected, followed by “green”, then “blue”, and “gray” is least likely to be selected. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of “SP reach loss”, the display mode of the final color is that “green” is most likely to be selected, followed by “red”, and then “blue”. In addition, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "Other failures", the display mode of the final color is that "gray" is most likely to be selected, followed by "blue", then "green" is most likely to be selected, and "red" is least likely to be selected. For this reason, when the degree of expectation for a big hit in the display mode is represented by an inequality sign, it becomes "red">"green">"blue">"gray".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any variation pattern, the display mode of the initial color is that "gray" is most likely to be selected, followed by "blue", then "green", and "red" is least likely to be selected. As a result, at the change timing of the display mode, it is possible to gradually change the display mode from the display mode with a low degree of expectation to the display mode with a high degree of expectation. In addition, when comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the variation patterns of “other failures”, it is easier for (B) to select display modes (“blue” and “green”) with higher expectations. As a result, even in the case of the variation pattern of "other failures", it is possible to change in stages from a display mode with a low degree of expectation to a display mode with a high degree of expectation. Also, in the characteristic part 020SH, the display mode is changed to a display mode with a low degree of expectation, which is a so-called decline in performance.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, when the initial color and final color are determined, the effect control CPU 120 compares the degree of expectation for the display mode of the determined initial color and final color, and determines whether the degree of expectation for the display mode of the final color is higher than the degree of expectation for the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS34). When the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display corresponding display by the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS37). When the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the initial color, if a change performance for changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display is performed, the performance will fall down, so the change performance is not performed by shifting to step 020SHS37.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, if the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the final color is higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 stores the display mode of the final color in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts display corresponding to variable display (holding display) in the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS37), and ends the series of processing.

(An example of the suggested effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when it is controlled to the small winning game state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6, an example of the suggestive effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when being controlled to the small winning game state will be described. FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 are flow charts showing an example of the suggestive effect execution processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small winning game state is controlled. The suggested effect execution processing shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 is processing executed in the special figure per waiting processing of S173 in the effect control process processing shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command is not received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51: YES), it is determined whether or not the production mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the production mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the production mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53).

When the performance mode is controlled to the small win RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: YES), the performance control CPU 120 performs setting for executing a performance (performance to inform the small win) corresponding to the small win RUSH mode (step 020SHS54), and terminates a series of processing. On the other hand, when the performance mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the performance control CPU 120 performs setting for executing performance (loss performance: continuously displaying the decoration pattern stopped and displayed in the combination of failure) according to the normal mode (step 020SHS55), and a series of processing is completed.

At step 020SHS52, when the production mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change production for changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display is performed is set (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the pending display at this time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the pending display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YES), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the display mode of the pending display at present is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS58). A pending change suggesting effect determination table, which will be described below, is used to determine whether or not there is a pending change suggesting effect.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestive effects. FIG. 11-7(A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The pending change suggesting effect determination table is a table for determining either "with pending change suggesting effect" or "without pending change suggesting effect". "With pending change suggesting effect" indicates that after performing the pending change suggesting effect (for example, at the start of the next variable display), a series of changing effects are performed in which the display mode of the pending display changes. "No pending change suggestive effect" indicates that no pending change suggestive effect is performed and that the display mode of the pending display does not change (no change effect is performed).

In FIG. 11-7(A), the determination rate of "with suspension change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination rate of "without suspension change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small winning game state, when the pending display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the pending change suggesting effect is likely to be performed. By performing the pending change suggesting effect, the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode showing the degree of expectation that is one level higher than the display mode of the pending display being displayed. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the pending display at present is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the pending display at present is "blue", it changes to "green".

The display mode of the pending display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation level is increased by one level, but may be a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by two levels, or a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by three levels. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the pending display may be any display mode that is equal to or less than the degree of expectation indicated by the final color. For example, if there are a plurality of display modes leading to the final color display mode (for example, when the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), any one of the multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") may be determined.

Further, in the embodiment according to the characteristic part 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect for changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display is determined each time, for example, when the variable display or the small winning game is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) may be determined in advance to indicate the timing at which the change effect is performed until the final color is reached, and whether or not to perform the change effect may be determined by referring to the scenario. Further, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the change effect and the color after the change by referring to the scenario.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS59). If the pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, if the suspension change suggesting effect is to be performed (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the suspension display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, at step 020SHS60, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether or not the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color.

When the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing the pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS62), and ends the series of processes. An example of the pending change suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-10, but it is a series of effects including a first fan effect, a second fan effect and an action effect.

In FIG. 11-6, at step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a set value suggesting effect (step 020SHS63). A setting value suggesting effect determination table, which will be described below, is used to determine whether or not there is a set value suggesting effect.

FIG. 11-7(B) shows a setting value suggestion effect determination table. The setting value suggesting effect determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of the setting value suggesting effect and the type of the set value suggesting effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7(B), "set value" indicates any one of "1" to "6".

Further, the ``type'' of the set value suggestion performance indicates three kinds of ``odd number setting suggestion'' that suggests that the set value is set to an odd number, ``even number setting suggestion'' that suggests that the set value is set to an even number, and ``set value 4 or more suggestion'' that suggests that the set value is ``4'' or more. The "odd number setting suggestion" effect is a determinable effect when the set value is an odd number (one of "1", "3" and "5"). The effect of “suggestion of setting even number” is a effect that can be determined when the setting value is an even number (one of “2”, “4” and “6”). The effect of "Suggestion of set value 4 or more" is a determinable effect when the set value is 4 or more (one of "4", "5", and "6").

In addition, the set value suggesting effect has a different effect mode for each type, for example, a different background image. The background image is, for example, an image indicating morning in the case of ``suggesting setting of odd number'', an image indicating daytime in the case of ``suggesting setting of even number'', and an image indicating night in the case of ``suggesting set value 4 or more''.

As shown in the set value suggesting effect determination table, "no set value suggesting effect" is determined at the highest rate regardless of whether "set value" is "1" to "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggesting effect from being performed frequently, and to prevent the player from easily guessing the setting value.

Also, the effect of "suggestion of odd number setting" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" increases to "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the setting value is likely to be "5" by performing the effect of "suggestion of odd number setting". Similarly, the effect of "suggestion of even setting" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" increases to "2", "4", and "6". Therefore, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by performing the effect of "suggestion of even number setting". Also, the effect of "suggestion of set value 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" increases to "4", "5", and "6". Therefore, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by performing the effect of "suggest set value of 4 or more".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggesting effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the set value suggesting effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). If the setting value suggesting effect is to be performed (step 020SHS64: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for executing the setting value suggesting effect (step 020SHS65), and terminates the series of processes. An example of the set value suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, but it is a series of effects including a first fan effect and a second fan effect. On the other hand, if the setting value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a certain variation suggestive effect (step 020SHS66). A probability variation effect determination table described below is used in determining whether or not there is a probability variation effect.

FIG. 11-7(C) shows a probability variation suggestion effect determination table. The probability variation suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence or absence of the probability variation suggestion effect and the type of the probability variation suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7(C), the “probability state” indicates either “high probability” which is a variable state (high probability/high base state) or “low probability” which is a non-variable state (low probability/high base state). In addition, the types of probability-variable suggesting effects are ``suggest high possibility'' that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is high, ``suggest medium possibility'' that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than ``suggest high possibility'', and ``suggest low possibility'' that suggest that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than ``suggest medium possibility''.

As shown in the probability variation suggestion effect determination table, "no probability variation suggestion effect" is determined at the highest rate regardless of whether the "probability state" is "high probability" or "low probability". As a result, the variable probability suggesting performance can be prevented from being frequently performed, and the player cannot easily guess whether the control is in a high probability state or a low probability state.

Further, as shown in the probability variation suggesting performance determination table, when the ``probability state'' is ``high probability'', the ratio of determining ``no probability variation suggesting performance'' is lower than in the case of ``low probability'', that is, the percentage of determining any kind of probability variation suggesting performance is high. As a result, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high-probability state by the fact that the probability variation suggesting effect itself is performed.

Also, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the production of "suggesting a high possibility" is most likely to be decided, followed by the production of "suggesting a medium possibility", and the production of "suggesting a low possibility" is the least likely to be decided. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "suggesting a low possibility" is most likely to be decided, followed by the effect of "suggesting a medium possibility", and the effect of "suggesting a high possibility" is the least likely to be decided. This makes it possible to suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high-probability state when the effect "suggests high possibility" is performed. In addition, when the effect of ``suggestion of possibility'' is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the control is in a high probability state or a low probability state. In addition, when the effect of "suggest low possibility" is performed, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a low probability state.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probability variation suggestive effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the probability variable suggestive effect in step 020SHS66 (step 020SHS67). If the variable probability suggestion effect is to be performed (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for executing the variable probability suggestion effect (step 020SHS69), and ends the series of processes. Incidentally, the probability variation suggestive effect is a series of effects including a first fan effect and a second fan effect, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-13. On the other hand, if the probability variation suggesting effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not all the final colors of the pending memory during the pending display are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color of each reserved memory stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, thereby determining whether or not the final colors of the reserved memories being displayed are all determined to be gray.

When all the final colors of the suspended memories being displayed on hold are not determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: NO), that is, when at least one of the suspended memories being displayed on hold is determined to be in a special display mode, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the first fanning effect (see (C) of FIG. 11-10) (step 020SHS73), and terminates the series of processes. On the other hand, when all the final colors of the suspension memory during suspension display are determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a guess suspension change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). The false pending change suggesting effect is a pending change suggesting effect that is executed even though the display mode of the pending display does not change, and is a series of effects that result in the false pending change suggesting effect. In the determination of the presence or absence of the false hold change suggestion effect, a false hold change suggestion effect determination table, which will be described below, is used.

FIG. 11-7(D) shows a table for determining a false hold change suggestion effect. The false hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either one of "there is a false hold change suggestion effect" or "there is no false hold change suggestion effect". "With fake pending change suggestive effect" indicates that the display mode of the pending display does not change after performing the pending change suggestive effect (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No guess pending change suggestive effect" indicates that the pending change suggestive effect is not performed and the display mode of the pending display does not change (no change effect is performed).

The decision ratio of "with counterfeit pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the decision ratio of "no fake hold change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small winning game state, the performance can be made lively by the guess pending change suggestion performance.

In the characteristic part 020SH, as the false effect, the false setting value suggesting effect is executed, but it may be possible to execute the false set value suggesting effect which is not performed while pretending that the set value suggesting effect is performed, or the false probability changing suggesting effect which is not performed although it is pretended that the probability changing suggesting effect is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the effect of suggesting change in the hold of the game as a result of determining the presence or absence of the effect of suggesting change in the hold of the game in step 020SHS70 (step 020SHS71). When performing the guess pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for executing the guess pending change suggesting effect (step 020SHS72), and ends the series of processes. Note that the false hold change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-11, but it is a series of effects including a first fan effect, a second fan effect and an action effect. On the other hand, if the guess pending change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 020SHS74.

By the above-described processing, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state), it is possible to execute any one of the holding change suggesting performance, the set value suggesting performance, and the definite variable suggesting performance.

(One example of change effect execution processing for display corresponding to variable display performed by effect control CPU 120 during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-8, an example of change effect execution processing for display corresponding to variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display will be described. FIG. 11-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the change effect execution processing of the display corresponding to the variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The variable display corresponding display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start waiting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display is to be set (step 020SHS101). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, if the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current display mode of the display corresponding to variable display is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display at the present time is the last color (step 020SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processing. On the other hand, if the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display compatible display is active display (step 020SHS103). When the target variable display compatible display is active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for forcibly executing the display mode of the final color for the active display (step 020SHS107).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, so the expectation level may change to a display mode that increases by one level, or the expectation level may change to a display mode that increases by two levels or more. On the other hand, if the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SHS103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the pending display (step 020SHS104). The ratio of determining to change the display mode of the pending display is, for example, the determination ratio of changing the pending display with the pending change suggesting effect during the small hit game (determining ratio of pending change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 11-7 (A): 70/100), but may be a different ratio.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the pending display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, when changing the display mode of the pending display (step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the pending display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, at step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and determines whether or not the display mode of the pending display after the change is the final color.

If the display mode of the pending display after change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YES), settings are made to execute a change effect to change the display mode of the pending display to the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108), and ends the series of processes. At step 020SHS106, when the display mode of the pending display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for executing a change effect to change the display mode of the pending display to a display mode with a degree of expectation higher by one level (step 020SHS109), and terminates a series of processes.

The change effect of changing the display mode of the pending display during the variable display and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display with the pending change suggesting effect during the small winning game are different effects. Specifically, in the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display during the variable display, the pending change suggestion effect is not performed.

(Example of transition of effect screen during small hit RUSH mode)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-9, an example of transition of the effect screen during the small hit RUSH mode will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 11-9 shows the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the small hit RUSH mode (during the high probability/second KT state). FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of effect screens during the small hit RUSH mode.

(A) of FIG. 11-9 shows a variable display during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 variably displays a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 020SH201. In the small winning RUSH mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the display result or variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern #32 in FIG. 10-9) and the game state specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, various advance notice effects, the effect mode according to the game state, whether or not to execute various effects such as the ready-to-win effect, various advance notice effects, and the execution start timing. Then, based on the result of the determination, the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

In addition, (A) shows the total number of prize balls display 020SH204. The total number of prize balls display 020SH204 shows the total number of prize balls in the continuous game including the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a notification image including the characters "Right-handed" is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification. Note that the notification image may include an image showing a right-pointing arrow to encourage hitting to the right. Also, in FIG. 11-9, pending indications and active indications are not shown, but they may be shown. In the screen shown in (A), when it is time to stop the variable display, the screen transitions to the screen (B).

(B) of FIG. 11-9 shows a screen at the time of fluctuation stop when it is determined that a small hit is made during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the small winning notification image 020SH202 indicating a small winning is displayed on the image display device 5, and the small symbols 020SH201 are stopped and displayed as a combination of fixed symbols "1, 3, 5" indicating a small winning game. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 responds, for example, to the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 (and the small symbol 020SH201) read out from the effect control pattern, or the reception of a command designating the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol 020SH200 from the main board 11, etc., and the determined decorative symbol 0 resulting in the display of the decorative symbol 020SH200. 20SH200 is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

(C) of FIG. 11-9 shows a screen during a small-hit game in the small-hit determination in the small-hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when there is a win in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls). Also, the total number of awarded balls display 020SH204 shows the number added by 10 balls compared to (B) of FIG. 11-9.

(D) of FIG. 11-9 shows the screen when the second ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. In the small winning game state, when the second ball wins in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020SH203 (two images in total) indicating the number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls). Also, the total number of awarded balls display 020SH204 shows the number added by 10 balls compared to (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same is true for the third and subsequent balls, and when there is a win in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 additionally displays a winning effect image 020SH203.

When the screens shown in (C) and (D) are displayed, the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the winning ball number counter and displays the winning effect image 020SH203 if the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high probability/second KT state) when receiving the special winning opening prize designation command (effect control command). When the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the screen shown in (E), and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined to execute a small winning game in the small winning determination in the small winning RUSH mode, the small winning notification image 020SH202 and the small pattern 020SH201 indicating the small winning are stopped and displayed, and during the small winning game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning to the special winning opening. That is, in the high probability/second KT state, when the small winning game state is controlled, a small winning notification image 020SH202, a small symbol 020SH201, and a winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small winning game state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small-hit game in the small-hit RUSH mode.

(Example of transition of suggestion production during chance time mode)
Next, an example of suggestive effects during the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. 11-10 to 11-13 show the transition of the effect screen when the small winning game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability/during the 1st KT state or low probability/during the 1st KT state). In the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same reference numerals are given to the same contents as those described in FIG. 11-9, and description thereof is omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the transition of effects for changing the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the false effect of the effect for changing the display mode of the pending display during the chance time mode. 11-10 and (A) to (E) of FIG. 11-11 show similar screens.

FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11(A) show the variable display during the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 variably displays a decorative pattern 020SH200 and a small pattern 020SH201. Further, on the image display device 5, an active display 020SH205 and a pending display 020SH206 are displayed as variable display compatible displays. In the chance time mode, only the small pattern 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative pattern 020SH200. In (A), all of the display corresponding to the variable display show a normal display mode (for example, "gray").

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern based on the display result or the variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern #11 in FIG. 10-8 or the second variation pattern #26 in FIG. 10-9) and the game state specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. In addition, when displaying the variable display compatible display, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the variable display compatible display, for example, based on the determination result of the pre-reading advance notice performance, and displays the variable display compatible display in the display mode according to the determination result. In the screen shown in (A), when it is time to stop the variable display, the screen transitions to the screen (B).

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11(B) show the screen at the time of stop of variation when it is determined as a small hit in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, although it is determined to be a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected, so both the decorative pattern 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are displayed in a stopped state with a symbol indicating a combination of losing, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 (see (B) of FIG. 11-10) is not displayed. In (B), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11(C) show a screen during a small winning game in the chance time mode (encouragement effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in a small win game state during the chance time mode, a first swaying performance image 020SH211 is displayed, which suggests that there is a possibility that a suggesting performance (holding change suggesting performance, set value suggesting performance, and definite variable suggesting performance) is performed. The first fan effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image indicating that a character will appear. Also, the decoration pattern 020SH200 is erased, and the small-hit notification image 020SH202 is stopped and displayed as it is with the pattern indicating the combination of losing. In addition, in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, there is almost no winning in the special winning opening. Further, even if the special winning opening is won in the small winning game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9(C) is not displayed.

FIG. 11-10 and (D) of FIG. 11-11 show the screen during the small winning game in the chance time mode (encouragement effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a second fanning effect image 020SH212 suggesting that there is a possibility that the suggesting effect (one of the pending change suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect, and the probability variation suggesting effect) will be performed rather than the fanning effect 1 of (C). The second fan effect image 020SH212 is an image developed from the first fan effect image 020SH211, and is, for example, an image of a character moving (an image of a character brandishing a sword).

FIG. 11-10 and (E) of FIG. 11-11 show a pending change suggestion effect, specifically, a screen during a small winning game in the chance time mode (action effect: step 3). Specifically, an effect effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5 . The effect effect image 020SH213 is an image that is a development of the second fan effect image 020SH212, and is, for example, an image in which the character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword touches the hold display 020SH206).

(F) of FIG. 11-10 shows the change of the pending display (step 4) in the chance time mode. Specifically, at the timing of the pending shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decoration pattern 020SH200 is started, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 is changed to the high-expected display mode (for example, changed from "gray" to "blue") on the image display device 5. That is, as shown in (E), when the action effect image 020SH213 acts on the pending display 020SH206 in the small winning game state, a series of changing effects are performed in which the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes in (F) of FIG. 11-10. In FIGS. 11-10, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the end of the small winning game, but the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 may be changed during the small winning game (before the start of the next variable display), for example.

On the other hand, (F) of FIG. 11-11 shows a false effect (false pending change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the pending display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, even at the timing of the pending shift 020SH214 at which the variable display of the decorative pattern 020SH200 is started, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change to the high-expectation display mode. That is, as shown in (E), the effect effect image 020SH213 (image showing a bow and arrow) acts on the pending display 020SH206 in the small winning game state, but in (F) of FIG. 11-11, the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change (the effect does not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined that a small winning game is to be executed in the chance time mode judgment, the decoration pattern 020SH200 and the small winning notification image 020SH202 are both stopped and displayed as symbols indicating a combination of losing, and during the small winning game, a pending change suggesting effect (action effect image 020) suggesting advantageous contents for the player. display of SH213) can be executed. In addition, the change in the display mode of the pending display can be expected by the pending change suggesting performance or the fake pending change suggesting performance shown in FIGS. Therefore, interest can be improved.

In addition, in (C) of FIG. 11-11, although the first fan effect image 020SH211 is displayed, there is a case in which the second fan effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. In addition, in (D), there is a case where a fake effect is performed in which the second fan effect image 020SH212 is displayed but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. In addition, in (E), there is a case where the effect effect image 020SH213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which a character flies to the upper left of the image display device 5).

A plurality of display modes may be prepared for each image (or at least one of them) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213, and the easiness of changing the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 may differ according to these display modes. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 changes and a display mode that is easily determined when the display mode of the pending display 020SH206 does not change may be prepared. Further, the display mode of the suspension display 020SH206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the suspension change suggesting effect.

(Example of transition of setting value suggestion effect in chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of setting value suggesting effects during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) of FIGS. 11-12 are the same as (A) to (D) of FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, so description thereof is omitted.

(E) of FIG. 11-12 shows a screen (set value suggestion effect) during a small winning game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a setting value suggestion image 020SH220 whose background image is night. The night background image in the setting value suggesting image 020SH220 is an image suggesting that the setting value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).

(F) of FIG. 11-12 shows that the small winning game is over and the next variable display is being performed. In the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period during which the small winning game state is controlled, but the setting value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed even after the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute the small winning game in the small winning determination in the chance time mode, both the decoration pattern 020SH200 and the small winning notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with the symbols indicating the combination of losing, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small winning game. That is, in the characteristic part 020SH, when the game is controlled to the small winning game state in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, it is possible to execute a set value suggestion performance (display of a set value suggestion image 020SH220) that suggests advantageous content for the player. 11-12, it is possible to make effective use of the period during which the chance time mode is controlled to the small winning game state, and to improve the interest.

Incidentally, even in the setting value suggesting effect, a false effect may be performed in the same manner as the pending change suggesting effect. Specifically, in (C) of FIG. 11-12, although the first fan effect image 020SH211 is displayed, a fake effect may be performed in which the second fan effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. In addition, in (D), there is a case where a fake effect is performed in which the second fan effect image 020SH212 is displayed but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

A plurality of display modes may be prepared for each image (or at least one of them) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213, and the easiness of execution of the set value suggesting effect may differ according to these display modes. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggesting effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the setting value suggesting effect is not executed may be prepared.

(Example of transition of probability variation suggestion production in chance time mode)
FIGS. 11-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a variable probability suggesting effect during the chance time mode. Note that (A) to (D) of FIGS. 11-13 are the same as (A) to (D) of FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, so description thereof is omitted. (E) of FIG. 11-13 shows a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (probability variation suggestive effect). Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a variable probability suggesting image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The variable probability suggesting image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image indicating that there is a high possibility of being controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

(F) of FIG. 11-13 shows that the small winning game is over and the next variable display is being performed. In the variable probability suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-13, the variable probability suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period during which the small winning game state is controlled, but not limited to this, for example, after the start of the next variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the characteristic part 020SH, when it is determined to execute a small winning game in the small winning determination in the chance time mode, both the decoration pattern 020SH200 and the small winning notification image 020SH202 are stopped and displayed with the symbols indicating the combination of losing, and the probability variation suggesting image 020SH230 is displayed during the small winning game. That is, in the characteristic part 020SH, when controlled to the small winning game state in the high probability/1st KT state or the low probability/1st KT state, it is possible to execute a probability variation suggesting effect (display of probability variation suggesting image 020SH230) suggesting advantageous contents for the player. 11-13, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the chance time mode is controlled to the small winning game state, and to improve the interest.

It should be noted that even in the probability variation suggestion production, there is also a case where the fake production is performed in the same manner as the pending change suggestion production. Specifically, in (C) of FIG. 11-13, although the first fan effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fan effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) may not be displayed. In addition, in (D), there is a case where a fake effect is performed in which the second fan effect image 020SH212 is displayed but the probability variation suggestive image 020SH230 is not displayed.

A plurality of display modes may be prepared for each image (or at least one of them) of the first fanning performance image 020SH211, the second fanning performance image 020SH212 and the action performance image 020SH213, and the easiness of execution of the definite suggestive performance may differ according to these display modes. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is likely to be determined when the variable probability suggesting effect is executed and a display mode that is likely to be determined when the variable probability suggesting effect is not executed may be prepared.

The suggestive effects shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve interest in the small winning game state during the chance time mode. Specifically, in a chance time mode in which variable display of 1.5 seconds is mainly continuously executed, even if a small winning game exceeding 1.8 seconds is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed and to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity that the game may be stopped during the small win game in the first KT state, and to realize a light game (a game with a good tempo and a pleasant feeling) in the first KT state.

(Regarding small hit release timing and execution timing of various suggestive effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game and the execution timing of various suggestive effects will be described. FIGS. 11-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of timing for opening a small win and timing for executing various suggestive effects. FIGS. 11-14 show variable display of a special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination, and a small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) to be executed thereafter.

First, the variable display of special symbols and the small winning game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the 1KT state is 1 second if the second pending memory number is "1 or more" (second variable pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8, or 10-9). If the second pending memory number is "0", it is 5 seconds (second variable pattern # 10 in FIG. 10-8 or second variable pattern # 25 in FIG. 10-9). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small winning symbol) is confirmed and displayed until a symbol confirmation period (also referred to as a symbol confirmation period) of 0.5 seconds elapses.

Then, when the symbol fixing period elapses, it is controlled to a small winning game state. The small winning game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small winning ending period. Specifically, in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened after a small winning fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has passed, and after a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) has passed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and shifts to a small winning ending period. When the small hit ending period elapses, the variable display of the next second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the pending change suggesting effect (including the fake pending change suggesting effect) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small win fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, the first fan effect (display of the first fan effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-10), the second fan effect (display of the second fan effect image 020SH212), and the effect effect (image in which the effect effect image 020SH213 touches the hold display 020SH206 are displayed. ) is performed. Then, when changing the pending display (in the case of the pending change suggesting effect), the pending display changes at the timing (timing of the pending shift) at which the next second special symbol variable display is executed. On the other hand, in the case of the fake pending change suggesting performance, the pending display does not change at the timing (timing of the pending shift) when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed next, and the display mode of the current pending display is maintained.

Thus, in the characterizing part 020SH, an effect is performed in which the display mode of the pending display is changed over the small winning game and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small winning game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the progress of the game.

Next, the setting value suggesting effect and the probability variation suggesting effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11 to 14, the setting value suggesting effect and the variable probability suggesting effect are referred to as "set value suggesting effect, etc.". As shown in FIG. 11-14, when the small winning fanfare period has passed and the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, the first swaying effect (for example, the display of the first swaying effect image 020SH211 in FIGS. 11-12), the second swaying effect (display of the second swaying effect image 020SH212), and the setting value suggesting effect (display of the setting value suggesting image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The setting value suggesting effect and the like are executed until the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, for example.

In this way, in the characterizing part 020SH, the set value suggesting effect or the like is performed corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to draw attention to the effect suggesting the set value. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small winning game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly. In addition, the period during which the small winning game state is controlled can be effectively utilized by setting value suggesting effect or the like, and the amusement during the small winning game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic part 020SH, each suggestive effect is started in accordance with the timing when the special variable winning ball device 17 starts to be opened. Therefore, since each suggestion performance can be started immediately after shifting to the small winning game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed, and to suppress the player from having a sense of incongruity with the progress of the game.

The timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be timing corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, specifically, timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. For example, the start timing of each suggestion effect is not limited to the timing of opening the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small winning fanfare period. As a result, since these performances can be started at the earliest timing after shifting to the small winning game state, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small winning game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestive effect may be the timing during the symbol fixing period, or the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small winning game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the progress of the game.

Also, the end timing of the setting value suggesting effect etc. is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, but may be the timing during the small winning ending period. Thereby, since these effects can be executed until the end of the small winning game state, it is possible to make more effective use of the period during which the small winning game state is controlled.

Also, the end timing of each suggestive effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the transition from the small winning game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is progressing smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the embodiment described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Here, the enhancement of interest will be specifically supplemented. In the 1st KT state, for example, a shortening variation (1-second variation) and a small winning game (decorative symbols stop at a losing symbol) are repeatedly executed. If no special performance is performed in the small winning game state, it seems as if the progress of the game is stopped in the small winning game state. For this reason, the game does not seem to progress quickly and lightly in the first KT state (high base state), and the player may feel uncomfortable. Also, the time during which the small winning game state is controlled in the first KT state may be a waste of time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment according to the characteristic part 020SH, when controlled to a small winning game state in the 1KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, any one of a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, and a probability variable suggestive effect) suggesting contents that are advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which almost no game balls win prizes, the player can be given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the player can be prevented from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the first KT state. In addition, since the period during which the small winning game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to prevent the period from becoming a waste of time for the player.

In addition, when it is controlled to the small winning game state in the second KT state, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the control of the small winning game state (for example, the display of the small winning notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 1 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH described above, the configuration in which the characteristic part 020SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko game machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the characteristic portion 020SH to a so-called one-and-two mixed type pachinko game machine. A specification example of a pachinko game machine of the one-and-two mixed type will be described below.

In the one-and-two mixed type pachinko gaming machine, in the normal state (non-special state: low-base state), the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by hitting to the left. When the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special pattern, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning to the first start winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, for example, 6298/65536 (approximately 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if a small winning game is executed based on the winning to the first starting winning hole, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to pass through the specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning to the first start winning opening, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning to the first starting winning opening will be shown below.

If the set value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
If the set value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
When the set value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
When the set value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the set value is "5", 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

Since the small winning probability is constant in the determination based on the winning to the first starting winning hole, the big winning probability can be set according to the set values '1' to '6' by changing the losing probability according to the set values '1' to '6'.

For example, in the first special game, when it is determined that a big win game is to be executed, it shifts to a special state (for example, a time saving state) after the big win game is executed according to the big win type (with a predetermined probability). It should be noted that, when the jackpot game is executed, depending on the jackpot type, the state may return to, for example, the normal state without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, a game (mainly the second special game) is performed by hitting rightward, in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the gate and the second starting prize opening located on the right side of the game area. The special state is the high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of per normal pattern higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the normal electric accessory longer than the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the variation time of the normal/universal pattern game compared to the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbols more than the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, and increases the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed. The special state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are performed.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits to the right in the normal state, the probability of winning the normal game is low, the opening time of the normal electric role object is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal game is long, so it is almost impossible to expect the player to win the second start winning port.

In addition, in the determination based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, for example, 62986/65536 (approximately 96/100). It should be noted that the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning to the second starting winning opening and the small winning probability in the determination based on winning to the first starting winning opening are different.

Also, in the determination based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the big hit probability varies depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning to the second start winning opening will be shown below.

If the set value is "1", 329/65536 (approximately 1/199).
If the set value is "2", 346/65536 (approximately 1/189).
When the set value is "3", 366/65536 (approximately 1/179).
When the set value is "4", 387/65536 (approximately 1/169).
When the set value is "5", 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", 439/65536 (approximately 1/149).

Since the small winning probability is constant in the determination based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the big winning probability can be set according to the set values '1' to '6' by changing the losing probability according to the set values '1' to '6'.

As described above, in the determination based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the small winning probability is 96/100, so in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special game), the small winning symbols are likely to be derived and displayed. In the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small winning ball attacker), and when it passes through a specific area (so-called V area) provided in the special variable winning ball device 17, the big winning game is executed. In the small win game state in the special state, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than that in the normal state, so winning in the special variable winning ball device 17 is easy and the V area is easily passed.

In a special state (mainly a second special game), when a game ball passes through a V area under control in a small win game state until variable display is executed for a predetermined number of times, the special state is ended and a big win game is executed. Also, in the special state, when it is determined to execute a big winning game (even when a big winning pattern is derived and displayed) until the variable display is executed for a predetermined number of times in the special state, the special state is similarly terminated and the big winning game is executed. Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the special state is controlled again according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). In this way, the player can expect a large number of prize balls by executing the jackpot game in the special state (by Renso).

On the other hand, in the special state, even when a big win game is executed before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, depending on the kind of big win, the game may shift to, for example, a normal state without being controlled in the special state. In addition, when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times in the special state, the state also shifts to the normal state. Specifically, in the special state, when the big win game is not executed until the variable display is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, when the game ball is not won in the special variable winning ball device 17 or does not pass through the V area even though it is controlled to the small win game state, or when the big win pattern is not derived and displayed), the state is shifted to the normal state. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the renso ends. In addition, even in the pachinko game machine of the mixed type of one and two types, variable display of special symbols, for example, is not performed in the big win game state and the small win game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixed type pachinko game machine, when it is controlled to a small winning game state in a special state, it is possible to execute a special performance corresponding to the control of the small winning game state (special state) (for example, display an image of ``Aim for the small winning attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!''). As a result, the player can expect a big win in the small win game in the special state.

In addition, in the variable display of the first special symbol game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), small winning symbols may be derived and displayed (small winning probability: about 1/100). In a small winning game in a normal state, the game is played by hitting to the left, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right area, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17.例文帳に追加Even if the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if the ball enters the special variable winning ball device 17, it is difficult to pass through the V area, so it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to pass through the V area.

In the modified example 1, in such a one-two-type mixed type pachinko game machine, when the game is controlled to the small win game state (special state) in the normal state (non-special state), the suggestive performance related to the characteristic part 020SH may be executed. The suggestive effect is a effect suggesting contents that are advantageous to the player, and includes, for example, a suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestive effect, and the like. The suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a pending change suggestive effect, but is not limited to this, and may be an effect (for example, display of a high-expectation background image, character image, etc.) that suggests that pending memory information with a high expectation of a big hit is stored.

Even in the special state, when the first reserved memory is stored, it is possible that a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol game. In this case, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to pass through the V area in the small winning game, the suggestive effect related to the feature part 020SH may be executed when the small winning game is controlled.

According to the modified example 1, even if the small winning game is executed in the normal state in which the game ball hardly wins, the player can be given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the player can be prevented from having a sense of incongruity with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the normal state. Therefore, according to Modification 1, it is possible to improve the interest during the small winning game in the normal state in the pachinko gaming machine of the mixed type of one and two types. The pachinko machine of the one-and-two mixed type is not limited to the specifications described above, and may have other specifications as long as a small winning game is executed in a normal state in which game balls are rarely won.

In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the modified example 1 of the characteristic part 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (one-and-two mixed type pachinko gaming machine), comprising: a game state control means for controlling a game state; a variable display execution means for variably displaying identification information (e.g., special symbols) and deriving and displaying a display result; , A non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a special state according to the modification 1 of the feature part 020SH: for example, a time-saving state) that is easier to control to the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed. 7) Aim for!” image) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect based on the judgment result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestive effect, etc.) that is different from the special effect and suggests contents that are advantageous to the player.

(Modified example 2 of characteristic part 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 2 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portion 020SH described above, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit has been described. In modification 2, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened multiple times according to the type of small hit.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is 1.8 seconds×1 time in the case of the small hit C with the longest opening time (see FIGS. 10-14), but is not limited to this. For the opening pattern, for example, when the opening time is set to the longest, the total opening time may be within 1.8 seconds, and may be 0.9 seconds x 2 times or 0.2 seconds x 9 times. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suggestive presentation of contents corresponding to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestive effect corresponding to opening 0.9 seconds×2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is set to be opened a plurality of times, by performing the suggestive performance corresponding to the opening pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 and to make each suggestive performance to be noticed.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 3 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portion 020SH described above, a configuration has been described in which the suggestive effect can be executed in the first KT state. In modification 3, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, it may be possible to execute suggestive effects in the normal state (low probability/low base state).

For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly by winning the first start winning opening, but in this case the small hit probability in the small hit determination is "6298/65536" (about 10%) as shown in FIG. 10-3. In addition, the small hit type by winning to the first start winning opening is a small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). In addition, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed to result in a small win (small win A), the non-reach-losing pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

Therefore, in the modification 3, when the small winning game state is controlled in the normal state, the suggestive effect may be executable. In addition, in order to secure the time for executing the suggestive effect, the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be set long. As a result, the effect in the small winning game in the normal state can be a beneficial effect for the player. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the small winning game is controlled in the normal state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the small winning game in the normal state.

It should be noted that variable display based on the second reserved memory may be executed after the transition from the low-probability/high-base state to the normal state. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low-probability/high base state to the normal state, the variable display based on the second reserved memory stored in the low-probability/high base state before transition may be executed. Since the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second reserved memory in the normal state, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the small winning game is executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period during which the small winning game state is controlled, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game ends. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is extended for the period during which the small winning game state is controlled. In the modification 3, it is possible to perform the suggestive effect during the period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability/low base state). Thereby, the period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 4 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration for executing the pending change suggestive effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit as the suggestive effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination has been described. In the modification 4, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion performance based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, it may be possible to execute a suggestion performance of suggesting a big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit.

For example, when a reserve memory prefetched to be a 2R normal jackpot is stored during a small winning game in a high probability/first KT state, that is, when it is known that the high probability/first KT state will be shifted to a low probability/first KT state, a disappointing performance (disappointing performance) for the player may be executed during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, in the small winning game before starting the variable display based on the reserved memory prefetched as the 2R normal big winning, the background image may be darkened, or the background image may be displayed with a skull mark image or an effect image. Further, in this case, for the target pending memory, for example, a pending change suggestion effect may be performed to change the pending display to a pending display with a skull mark image attached.

On the other hand, when the reservation memory prefetched as the 10R probability variable big win or the 2R probability variable big win is stored during the small winning game in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, i.e., when it is known that the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state will shift to the second KT state, it is possible to execute a pleasing performance (high expectation performance) for the player during the small winning game. Specifically, for example, in the small winning game before starting the variable display based on the reserved memory prefetched to be the 10R variable probability big win or the 2R probability variable big win, the background image may be displayed brightly (in rainbow color), or the background image may be displayed with an image of an angel's mark or an effect image. Further, in this case, a pending change suggesting effect may be performed for the target pending memory, for example, by changing the pending display to a pending display with an image of an angel mark.

In addition, when the small winning game is executed a plurality of times until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory of the object read ahead is executed, the same suggestive performance (disappointing performance or high expectation performance) may be performed in the small winning game a plurality of times, that is, the suggestive performance may be performed a plurality of times. In addition, when the variable display is executed a plurality of times until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory of the object is executed, the same suggestion performance may be performed in the variable display a plurality of times in addition to the small winning game state. That is, such a suggestive effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the reserved memory of the prefetch-determined target is started.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 5 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the characteristic part 020SH, the ratio of determining to change the display mode of the pending display during the variable display in FIG. In Modification 5, the change determination ratio during variable display and the determination ratio of pending change suggestion effect may be different.

For example, the decision ratio of the pending change suggesting effect may be higher than the change decision ratio during the variable display. As a result, the change of the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggesting performance is made easier than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and the period controlled to the small winning game state can be effectively utilized.

In addition, depending on the result of the look-ahead judgment (judgment of big hit) with respect to the pending storage information of interest, the change determination ratio during variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggesting effect may be set to different ratios. For example, when it is determined to execute a big hit by the look-ahead determination, the determination rate of the pending change suggestion performance may be set to be higher than the change determination rate during variable display, and on the other hand, when the look-ahead determination is determined to be a loss, the determination rate of the suspension change suggestion performance may be set to be lower than the change determination rate during the variable display. Thereby, the change of the pending display accompanied by the pending change suggesting effect can be made to have a higher degree of expectation than the change of the display mode of the pending display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggesting effect during the small winning game.

In the first KT state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than in other game states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be the mode in which the display mode of the pending display is most likely to change. Also, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change determination ratio during the variable display. That is, among the effects of changing the display mode of the pending display, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display accompanied by the pending change suggesting effect during the small winning game may be the most likely to be executed. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the period during which the chance time mode is controlled to the small winning game state.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 6 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the characteristic part 020SH, the configuration that the guess pending change suggesting effect during the small winning game is executed when the final color of the pending memory during the pending display is all gray (020SHS70 in FIG. 11-6: YES). In the modification 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the guess pending change suggesting performance during the small win game may be executed even when the pending memory determined as the special display mode with the final color other than gray is stored in the pending memory during the pending display.

In this case, the false pending change suggesting effect may be performed more easily with the suspended memory determined to have the gray final color than the suspended memory determined to have the special display mode. As a result, even when the reserved memory determined as the special display mode is stored, the false reserved change suggesting performance can be performed for the retained memory determined as the display mode whose final color is gray, so that the performance can be livened up during the small winning game.

Conversely, the false pending change suggesting effect may be more easily performed for the suspended memory determined to be in the special display mode than to the suspended memory determined to be in the display mode in which the final color is gray. For example, the false pending change suggesting effect may be forcibly executed for the pending memory whose final color is determined to be the special display mode, and the pending change suggesting effect may not be executed. In this case, the display mode is changed to the final color in the active display. As a result, the player's expectation can be intentionally lowered at the stage of the suspended display, and the expectation at the time when the display mode changes at the stage of the active display can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 7 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH described above, the configuration for performing the pending change suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect, and the probability changing suggesting effect as the suggesting effect has been described. In modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as the suggestion performance, it is possible to execute an explanation suggestion performance regarding the progress of the game.

The explanation suggestion effect is, for example, a character image effect related to the progress of the game in the chance time mode. It is an explanation suggestion performance.

Here, in the characteristic part 020SH, the game state is controlled to one of a plurality of game states such as the normal state, the high probability/1st KT state, the low probability/1st KT state, and the 2nd KT state. Therefore, by enabling execution of the explanation suggesting effect of the modification 7, the player can easily grasp the game state to which the game can be shifted after the chance mode, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 020SH)
Next, Modified Example 8 of the characteristic portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 020SH described above, the configuration in which the characteristic part 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled to the high probability state until the next big hit when the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot is executed has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the characteristic part 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a specified number of times has passed. Here, one specification example of the ST machine pachinko game machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when a variable probability jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display is executed for the prescribed number of times (ST number of times), and when the variable display is executed for the prescribed number of times, the high probability state is shifted to the low probability state.

Further, when the variable probability big win is executed, the game is controlled to a high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the variable probability big win game. The period (variable display count) controlled to the high probability/first KT state is a period (transition variation count) corresponding to the probability variation jackpot symbol. After being controlled to the high-probability/first KT state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the high-base state (high-probability/first KT state) transitions to the low-base state (second KT state). The transition fluctuation count is, for example, a count smaller than the ST count.

As a result, the game can be controlled in the second KT state from the passage of the number of transition fluctuations to the passage of the number of STs, that is, a small winning game in which a prize can be expected is executed. In the second KT state, if no big win is won before the ST count variable display is performed, the ST count variable display is performed to return to the normal state. Here, when it is controlled to the small winning game state in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small winning game state (for example, the display of the small winning notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9) can be executed.

In addition, in the ST machine, when the normal jackpot pattern is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period (variable display count) controlled to the low probability/first KT state is a period (transition variation count) corresponding to the normal jackpot symbol. After being controlled to the low-probability/first KT state, when the number of transition fluctuations is executed, the high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) transitions to the low-base state (normal state).

In the high-probability/first KT state and the low-probability/first KT state, a common effect (for example, a chance mode) may be executable. In the 1KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is difficult for game balls to enter the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, winning balls cannot be expected.

In modification 8, in the 1KT state (high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1KT state) in the ST machine, when controlled to a small winning game state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, any one of a pending change suggestive effect, a set value suggestive effect, and a probability variable suggestive effect) suggesting contents that are advantageous to the player.

According to the modified example 8, even if the ST machine repeats a small win game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins a prize, the player can be given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly by executing the suggestion performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the first KT state. In particular, in the ST machine pachinko game machine, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the first KT state. The pachinko game machine of the ST machine is not limited to the specifications described above, and other specifications may be used as long as a small winning game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 020SH)
In relation to the above-described characteristic portion 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and a small hit is generated at a high frequency in the variable probability game state (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787.). However, when a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is executed, this period becomes a period in which no variable display is performed, so that the player may be given an impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. Specifically, for example, if a small winning game in which almost no game ball wins is repeatedly executed, the special symbols are stopped and displayed each time in the small winning game state, which may give the player an impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. As a result, the player may feel a sense of incongruity, and the interest in the game may decrease.

(Means D1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means D1 related to the characteristic part 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and a game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, a part that executes steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and identification information (for example, special symbols). (e.g., a part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4) and effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120). (1st KT state) and a special state (for example, 2nd KT state) that is more easily controlled to the special state than the non-special state, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the production execution means, when controlled to the special state in the special state, special production corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, small winning notification image 020SH202, small symbol 020SH20 shown in FIG. 10-9) 1, and winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pending change suggestive effect shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game is repeatedly executed in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can be given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, it is possible to suppress the player from having a sense of incompatibility with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the non-special state. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest during the small winning game in the non-special state by the suggestive effect.

(Means D2)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D2 related to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means D1, the effect execution means is capable of variably displaying the decoration identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and when controlled to the special state in the special state, displays a special display result (for example, a combination of fixed symbols "1, 3, 5" indicating a small winning game) as the display result of the decoration identification information, and the special in the non-special state. When it is controlled to the state, a predetermined display result (combination of decoration patterns indicating failure) different from the special display result is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information.

According to such a constitution, in a non-special state, since it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole during the small winning game, the player is prevented from expecting excessively by forcibly stopping and displaying the predetermined display result (for example, the lost pattern).

(Means D3)
Further, as the game machine of means D3 related to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to means D1 or D2, regarding the variable display that has not yet started, it is provided with a pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, pre-reading determination), and the effect execution means is the suggestive effect (for example, the pending change suggestive effect shown in (E) of FIG. 11-10) that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. is executable.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect based on the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment, so it is possible to increase the expectation for the reserved memory. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D4)
In addition, as the gaming machine of means D4 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of means 1D to D3 includes pending storage means for storing information regarding variable display as pending storage information, the effect executing means displays the pending storage information stored in the pending storage means as a pending display (for example, pending display 020SH206 shown in FIG. Action effect image 020SH213) shown in (E) of 11-10 can be executed, and there are times when the display mode of the suspension display changes and times when the display mode of the suspension display does not change.

According to such a configuration, since a series of performances including the effect performance and the performance of changing the display mode of the suspension display can be performed, attention can be paid to the suspension display and the expectation for the suspension memory can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D5)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D5 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D4 includes a setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the effect executing means can execute the suggesting effect (for example, the setting value suggesting image 020SH220 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-12) for suggesting the setting means.

According to such a configuration, in a small winning game in a non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to allow the player to guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D6)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D5, the non-special state includes a first non-special state (for example, non-variable probability state: low probability/first KT state) and a second non-special state (for example, variable probability state: high probability/first KT state) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state, and the effect execution means controls the first non-special state. It is possible to execute a common effect (chance time mode) when it is being controlled and when it is controlled to the second non-special state, and the suggestive effect suggests that it is controlled to the second non-special state (for example, the variable probability suggesting image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, a common performance is executed when being controlled to either the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, and the probability variation suggesting performance can be executed in the small winning game in the chance mode, so that in the small winning game in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, the player can guess whether or not it is in the probability variable state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D6 as the gaming machine of the means D7 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different modes (for example, suggesting an odd number setting, suggesting an even number setting, and suggesting a set value of 4 or more shown in (B) of FIG. 11-7) as the suggestive effect, and the degree of advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of the suggestive effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestive effects by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestive effects from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the suggestive effect, the player's degree of attention can be varied according to the suggestive effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement during the small winning game in the non-special state.

(Means D8)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D8 related to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D7, the variable display execution means can execute the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. The first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1) is provided in a difficult second state, and the game state control means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) in which the first variable winning means is easily changed to the first state (for example, the first KT state).

According to such a configuration, even if the small winning game in the first KT state in which almost no game balls win a prize is repeatedly executed, the player can be given an impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, the player can be prevented from having a sense of incompatibility with the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the first KT state. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the first KT state.

(Means D9)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D9 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D8 includes a second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can change between an easy winning state (open state) in which a game ball is easy to win and a difficult winning state (closed state) in which a game ball is difficult to win, and the second variable winning means changes to the easy winning state in the special state. The effect executing means executes the suggestive effect in response to the second variable winning means changing to the easy winning state (for example, opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and to make the player pay attention to the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small winning game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the small winning game.

(Means D10)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D9 as the gaming machine of the means D10 related to the characteristic part 020SH, the gaming state control means can control the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special variable winning ball device 17: so-called V area) in the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if a small winning game is executed in a normal state (non-special state) in which the game ball hardly wins in a pachinko game machine of a mixed type of the characteristic part 020SH, it is possible to give the player an impression that the game is progressing smoothly, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of incongruity with respect to the progress of the game due to the small winning game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the amusement during the small winning game in the normal state.

(Means D11)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means D11 related to the characteristic part 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means D1 to D10, when the special state is controlled in the special state, the effect execution means provides a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. A winning effect image 020SH203) shown in (C) of 1-11 can be executed, and when the non-special state is controlled to the special state, the predetermined performance is not executed regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, it is possible to encourage the player to win a prize in the special variable winning opening, thereby improving the interest in the second KT state. On the other hand, in the small winning game in the 1KT state, although the game ball rarely wins the special variable winning opening, the predetermined performance is not executed, so that the player is not expected to win the small winning in the 1KT state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 022SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 022SH includes game state control means, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, and effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, and the pre-start determination means are realized by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can control an advantageous state, a special state, and a special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. The special state is a game state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small winning game state.

The special state is a state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state, for example, the second KT state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state in which small hits are likely to occur, and is a gaming state in which game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening. The first KT state (high-probability/high-base state or low-probability/high-base state) is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but is also a game state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a special winning hole. That is, the first KT state is a state in which almost no game value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 022SH, it is possible to control to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. The advantageous game referred to here is a big win that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big win game state. The game state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the big win game state, and can control to the big win game state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The effect execution means controls the effect mode of the small hit RUSH mode in the second KT state. In the second KT state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and is not controlled to any other performance mode. Further, the small hit RUSH mode is also an effect mode controlled only in the second KT state. That is, when it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, it is always controlled to the second KT state.

The effect executing means can display a specific display corresponding to the presence of a plurality of states in which a game value can be awarded as a state after being controlled to an advantageous state, when being controlled to an advantageous state. The time when it is controlled in an advantageous state is the time when it is controlled in this big hit game. The state in which the game value can be given is the second KT state and the next big win game state. The specific display is a display corresponding to the presence (occurrence) of the second KT state and the next jackpot game state thereafter.

For example, the specific display is an image (hereinafter referred to as "bonus rush icon") corresponding to the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) and the next big hit game state. Specifically, the specific display consists of a plurality of icon images including an icon image corresponding to the current big win, an icon image corresponding to the subsequent second KT state, and an icon image corresponding to the next big win to be won in the second KT state.

The display mode of the bonus rush icon may be a display mode of any shape such as a circle, a square, or a triangle, or may be a display mode with letters or symbols. Each icon image of the bonus rush icon is an image showing a blank column when the corresponding state (game) is not completed, and changes to an image with a predetermined color when the corresponding state is completed. A blank icon image corresponding to the current big win, a blank icon image corresponding to the second KT state, and a blank icon image corresponding to the next big win, which constitute the bonus rush icon, are all displayed in the same display mode.

Further, in the characteristic part 022SH, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the controlled state among the states including the advantageous state and a plurality of states in which game value can be awarded. For example, when the current big win ends, the effect executing means changes the predetermined display mode of the blank icon image corresponding to the current big win. Specifically, the effect execution means changes the display mode to indicate a state in which the blanks are filled by coloring the blank bonus rush icon in red. Note that the change in the display mode is not limited to filling blanks with colors, but may be, for example, adding characters such as "done" to the corresponding icon, or changing the shape of the corresponding icon.

Now, the timing of changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon will be described. For example, in the case of a bonus rush icon corresponding to a big win, the display mode is changed during the ending period of the big win. However, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the big hit is not limited to these, and may be during the round game (for example, the final round). Also, in the case of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state, for example, the display mode is changed during the fanfare period of the big win. However, the timing for changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state is not limited to these, and may be during a round game (for example, the first round).

Further, in the characteristic portion 022SH, there are a plurality of different display modes for the specific display. The effect execution means can display a specific display in a display mode corresponding to a controlled state among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which game value can be awarded. Specifically, when the big win ends, the effect executing means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the big win to a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the big win.

When the second KT state ends, the performance executing means changes the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) is controlled.

Further, in the characteristic part 022SH, the effect execution means can display a specific display of a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state and a specific display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which game value can be awarded. The specific display of the specific mode is, for example, an icon image filled with red or yellow. The specific display of the predetermined mode is, for example, a blank icon image. The effect executing means can display a bonus rush icon including an icon image filled with red and an icon image with blanks.

Further, in the characterizing part 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display over a plurality of states among states including an advantageous state and a plurality of states in which game value can be awarded. Specifically, the performance executing means can display the specific display over the current big win game state, the second KT state after the current big win, and the next big win game state, that is, across a plurality of game states. In addition, the effect executing means can always display the specific display during variable display, during stop display of symbols, during standby for variable display, during a small winning game, during a big winning game, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 022SH, the effect executing means can display the game value given in the advantageous state and the game value given in the special state over the advantageous state and the special state. The game value is, for example, prize balls. Specifically, the performance executing means can display the total number of prize balls over the current big win game state, the second KT state after the current big win and the next big win game state, that is, across a plurality of game states.

In addition, in the characteristic part 022SH, the performance executing means executes a suggestive performance suggesting that the special state is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. Specifically, in the next big win game, the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting that the second KT state will be controlled again after the next big win game. The suggestive effect is, for example, a success/failure effect indicating either success or failure.

Also, the performance executing means can display a specific display of a prescribed mode corresponding to the presence of a plurality of states in which game values can be given as states after being controlled to a later advantageous state, corresponding to the performance result of the suggestive performance. For example, when the effect result of the suggestive effect is the effect result indicating success, the effect executing means adds and displays a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon in the next jackpot game. On the other hand, the effect executing means does not add a blank icon image in the next jackpot game when the effect result of the suggestive effect indicates a failure.

For example, the effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect within the same round (for example, in the fifth round) and add and display a blank icon image. However, the effect executing means may execute the suggestive effect over a plurality of rounds and add a blank icon image. For example, the suggestion effect may be executed in the fifth round, and the icon image may be added in the sixth round. Also, the effect executing means may execute the suggestive effect over a plurality of rounds.

Further, in the characteristic portion 022SH, the same number of round games are executed in the advantageous state before being controlled to the special state and the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. That is, the same number of round games are executed for the current big win and the next big win. The effect executing means can display a specific display in a common display mode when the current advantageous state is controlled and when the subsequent advantageous state is controlled. Specifically, the performance executing means displays the corresponding icon images in a common display mode with a red color, regardless of whether the current big win or the next big win is completed.

Further, in the characteristic part 022SH, the variable display executing means can concurrently execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Specifically, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. The game state control means can control to an advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The specific display result is, for example, a display result (jackpot symbol) indicating a big win. Therefore, the game state control means controls to the big win game state when the display result indicating the big win is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display.

Also, in the characteristic portion 022SH, the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, in the characteristic part 022SH, the big win based on the variable display of the second special pattern is more likely to be executed than the big win based on the variable display of the first special pattern, and the big win to shift to the second KT state after the big win game state is finished, or the big win with a large number of rounds.

The effect executing means erases the specific display when the specific display is displayed when the control is performed to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information. Since the specific display is mainly displayed in the second KT state in which the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is irregular to be controlled to the big winning game state based on the variable display of the first identification information during the display of the specific display.

Here, when the big win to shift to the second KT state after the big win game state is over is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information, the specific display is not erased. In other words, the performance executing means erases the specific display only when a big win excluding the big win to shift to the second KT state after the big win game state is over is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information.

Here, the timing for erasing the specific display is, for example, the period of the big win fanfare. For example, even when a big win game based on the variable display of the first identification information is performed, the control of the second KT state is completed by this big win (completion of the small win RUSH mode), so during the fanfare period, the icon image may be changed to a display mode (e.g., yellow) indicating that the second KT state is controlled, and thereafter (during the fanfare period), the bonus rush icon may be erased. Also, the timing of erasing the specific display is not limited to the jackpot game based on the variable display of the first identification information, and may be during the round game or during the ending period. In the case of erasing the specific display during the round game, for example, a suggestive effect may be performed, the effect result indicating failure may be displayed as the effect result of the suggestive effect, and then the specific display may be erased.

Further, in the characteristic part 022SH, the effect executing means can display the specific display before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, when the variable display of this time results in a big win, the effect executing means can change the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state during the variable display to a display mode (e.g., yellow) indicating that it is controlled to the second KT state.

Further, in the characterizing portion 022SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state. The determination performed by the determination means before the start is, for example, a look-ahead determination, and specifically, various determinations (jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc.) performed when the open variable display is started. The determination timing performed by the pre-start determination means is the timing before the timing for performing the various determinations.

The effect execution means can display a specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means. For example, when there is a pending memory determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, the performance executing means can change the icon image of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the second KT state to a display mode (e.g., yellow) indicating that it is controlled to the second KT state before the variable display of this pending memory is started.

(Regarding the transition of the game state and the production mode after the jackpot game in the characteristic part 022SH)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the jackpot game in the characteristic portion 022SH. FIG. 12-1 differs in the type of big win from the transition of the game state and effect mode after the big win game in the characteristic part 020SH shown in FIG. 11-1. In the description of FIG. 12-1, points different from FIG. 11-1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the characteristic portion 022SH, there are five types of jackpots: 10R variable probability jackpot A, 10R variable probability jackpot B, 6R probability variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot. The 10R probability variable jackpot A is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability/second KT state after a jackpot game. The 10R probability variable jackpot B and the 6R probability variable jackpot are jackpots that shift to the high probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. The 10R normal jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot are jackpots that shift to the low-probability/first KT state after the jackpot game. In the case of a 10R jackpot, an equivalent prize ball is obtained for any jackpot. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 022SH has specifications that make it easier to obtain more prize balls than the characteristic portion 020SH described above.

Next, the rate at which each jackpot type is determined in each game state will be described. For example, in the normal game state, mainly, the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. In the jackpot type determination based on the starting prize to the first start prize winning port (that is, in the normal game state), the 6R normal jackpot is 35%, the 6R probability variable jackpot is 30%, and the 10R probability variable jackpot A is determined at a rate of 35%.

On the other hand, in the low-probability/1st KT state, high-probability/1st KT state, and low-probability/2nd KT state, mainly, the start winning to the second start winning port occurs, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In the jackpot type determination based on the start winning to the second start prize opening (that is, in the low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, and low probability/second KT state), the 10R normal jackpot is 35%, the 10R variable variable jackpot B is 15%, and the 10R variable variable jackpot A is determined at a rate of 50%. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 022SH has a higher ratio of being determined to be the 10R probability variable jackpot A compared to the characteristic portion 020SH described above, so that it is a specification that makes it easy to obtain more prize balls.

In addition, a common performance is executed during the big win game between the case where the big win game based on the 10R probability variable big win B is executed and the case where the big win game based on the 10R normal big win is executed. Specifically, a combination of common decorative symbols is derived and displayed for the 10R probability variable big win B and the 10R normal big win, and a common big win performance is executed during each big win game. After the jackpot game, it is controlled to a common chance time mode.

As a result, the player cannot discriminate the type of the executed big win between the 10R probability variable big win B and the 10R normal big win, and the player cannot discriminate the game state (either the high probability/high base state or the low probability/high base state) controlled by the big win game. Therefore, in the characteristic part 022SH, not only when the normal mode is changed to the chance mode, but also when the chance mode is started from any mode, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing the controlled game state.

(Regarding the jackpot type determination table of the characteristic part 022SH)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the jackpot type determination table of the characteristic portion 022SH. (A) of FIG. 12-2 is a jackpot type determination table when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. (B) of FIG. 12-2 is a jackpot type determination table when executing the variable display of the second special symbol.

As shown in (A) of FIG. 12-2, as the jackpot type when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, one of the three types of jackpots of 10R probability variable jackpot A, 6R probability variable jackpot, and 6R normal jackpot is determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), as the jackpot type when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, one of three types of jackpots, 10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B, and 10R normal jackpot, is determined. In both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, regardless of the set value, the ratio of determining each jackpot type is constant. Also, in both (A) and (B) of FIG. 12-2, the ratio of determination of the probability variable jackpot is 65%, and the ratio of determination of the normal jackpot is 35%.

Hereinafter, description will be made by comparing (A) and (B) of FIGS. 12-2. The 10R probability variable jackpot A is more likely to be determined in (B) than in (A). Specifically, the 10R probability variable jackpot A is 35% in (A) and 50% in (B). Also, in (A), the 6R variable probability big hit can be selected and the 10R variable probability big hit B cannot be selected, but in (B), the 10R probability variable big win B can be selected and the 6R probability variable big win cannot be selected. As for the normal jackpot, in (A), the 6R normal jackpot can be selected (the 10R normal jackpot cannot be selected), and in (B), the 10R normal jackpot can be selected (the 6R normal jackpot cannot be selected). Therefore, the jackpot type determination using (B) rather than (A) is more likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is a variable display with a higher advantage for the player than the variable display of the first special symbol.

(Bonus and rush icon control processing at the start of the jackpot)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-3, the processing for displaying the bonus rush icon at the start of the big win or changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon will be described. FIG. 12-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the bonus/rush icon control process at the start of the big win. The bonus/rush icon control process at the start of the big hit is a process executed in the special figure win waiting process of S173 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 022SHS11). When the jackpot start designation command is not received (step 022SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is.

On the other hand, if the jackpot start designation command is received (step 022SHS11: YES), that is, if a jackpot occurs, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12). When it is the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12: YES), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 022SHS14. If it is not the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13).

When the big hit is not based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: NO), that is, when the big win is based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS14: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS15), and ends the series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS14: YES), the icon image corresponding to the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) among the bonus rush icons is executed and set to change the display mode (yellow) indicating that the icon image is controlled to the small win RUSH mode (step 022SHS16), and the series of processing is completed.

At step 022SHS13, if the big hit is based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 022SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS17: YES), that is, for example, in the second KT state (small winning RUSH mode), when the irregular jackpot game is controlled based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 erases the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS18) and ends the series of processing.

According to the above-described processing, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is executed, the bonus rush icon can be displayed during the fanfare period of the jackpot. Also, when a big win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small win RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small win RUSH mode is controlled during the round game. Also, when an irregular big win based on the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the small win RUSH mode, the bonus rush icon can be erased during the fanfare period.

(Bonus/rush icon control processing during round game)
Next, referring to FIG. 12-4, processing for adding a blank for the bonus rush icon during the round game will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flow chart showing an example of bonus/rush icon control processing during a round game. The bonus rush icon control process during the round game is a process executed in the effect process during the big hit of S176 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening is received (step 022SHS31). When the command for displaying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received (step 022SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is. When the large winning opening open display command is received (step 022SHS31: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current big win is a big win when controlled to the small win RUSH mode (step 022SHS32).

If the current big win is not a big win when the small win RUSH mode is controlled (step 022SHS32: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, if the current big win is a big win when the small win RUSH mode is controlled (step 022SHS32: YES), it is determined whether or not the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the 5th round based on the value of the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the big win counted by the CPU 103, or may determine whether it is the 5th round or not by counting the number of times the large winning opening open display command is received.

If the round game is not the fifth round (step 022SHS33: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, if the round game is the fifth round (step 022SHS33: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processes.

On the other hand, when the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35). If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35: YES), the effect control CPU 120 additionally displays a bonus rush icon by executing and setting a success effect as a suggestive effect (step 022SHS36), and ends the series of processes. On the other hand, if it is not the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS35: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes and sets a failure effect as a suggestive effect (step 022SHS37), and terminates a series of processes.

By the above-described processing, in the big win game in the small win RUSH mode, if the current big win is the 10R probability variable big win A, the success performance can be executed as the suggestive performance, and on the other hand, if the current big win is the 10R probability variable big win B or the 10R normal big win, the failure performance can be executed as the suggestive performance.

(Bonus and rush icon control processing during the ending period)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-5, the bonus/rush icon control process for changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon during the ending period will be described. FIG. 12-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the bonus/rush icon control process during the ending period. The ending period bonus/rush icon control process is a process executed in the ending effect process of S177 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51). If the bonus rush icon is not being displayed (step 022SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes. When the bonus rush icon is being displayed (step 022SHS51: YES), the performance control CPU 120 executes and sets a display change performance for changing the icon image corresponding to the current big win among the bonus rush icons to a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the big win (step 022SHS52).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53). When the current jackpot is the 10R probability variable jackpot A (step 022SHS53: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes and sets an ending effect indicating a transition to the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS54), and terminates a series of processes. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is not the 10R variable probability big hit A (step 022SHS53: NO), that is, if the current jackpot is the 10R variable probability big hit B or the 10R normal jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes and sets the ending performance indicating the transition to the chance mode (step 022SHS55), and terminates a series of processing. In addition, the bonus rush icon is not displayed in Chantime mode.

Through the above-described processing, the bonus rush icon can be changed to a display mode (for example, red) indicating the completion of the big win during the ending period of the big win game. In addition, in the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot A, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even in the small hit RUSH mode. Also, in the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the bonus/rush icon can be made not to be displayed in the chance mode.

(An example of the transition of the production mode and the big hit production screen)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect mode and the big hit effect screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-6 to 12-8. FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the normal mode to the small win RUSH mode. FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen from the small win RUSH mode to the chance mode. FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of transition of effect screens when the small hit RUSH mode continues.

(A) of FIG. 12-6 shows the variable display during the normal mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 variably displays a decoration pattern 022SH100 and a first small pattern 022SH101 corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the ready-to-win effect, various advance notice effects, and the production mode according to the game state, and determines whether or not to execute various effects such as the ready-to-win effect, various advance effects, and the effect mode according to the game state, and the execution start timing, etc., based on the display result, the variation pattern, and the game state, which are specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. let it run. In (A), an active display 022SH110 is displayed in the lower central area of the image display device 5 . In (A), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 12-6(B) shows the screen when the decoration symbol 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot A is derived and displayed in the normal mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the first small symbol 022SH101 are stopped and displayed as the final symbol "7, 7, 7" which is a combination indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot A. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 responds, for example, to the fact that an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 022SH100 (and the first small pattern 022SH101) is read from the effect control pattern, or the reception of a command designating the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol 022SH100 from the main board 11, etc., and the final decorative pattern resulting in the display of the decorative symbol 022SH100 is received. The pattern 022SH100 is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (C).

(C) of FIG. 12-6 shows the screen during the fanfare period in the 10R probability variable jackpot A jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot A and a bonus rush icon 022SH120. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 consists of three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicating blanks. The three icon images 022SH120a to 120c indicate that there is a state in which game values are given three times, namely, the current big win, the small win RUSH mode after the end of the current big win, and the next big win. In displaying the screen shown in (C), the performance control CPU 120 displays a big win notification image 022SH105 and a bonus/rush icon 022SH120 in response to, for example, receiving a big win start designation command from the main board 11. - 特許庁

(D) of FIG. 12-6 shows a screen during the fifth round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A during the round game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 for notifying that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A. Also, (D) shows the total number of prize balls display 022SH130. The total number of prize balls display 022SH130 shows the total number of prize balls in the continuous game including the small hit RUSH mode. It should be noted that the total number of awarded balls display 022SH130 may display the fanfare period shown in (C) of FIG. 12-6. Further, in (D), a notification image including the characters "Right-handed" is displayed in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification. In displaying the screen shown in (D), the effect control CPU 120 displays the round notification image 022SH106, for example, in response to receiving the display command during opening of the big winning opening from the main board 11.

(E) of FIG. 12-6 shows the screen of the ending period in the 10R probability variable jackpot A jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small winning RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 indicating that the small winning RUSH mode is controlled, and an icon image 022SH120a (first from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 with color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120a is a color (for example, red) indicating that the big win has been completed. In displaying the screen shown in (E), the performance control CPU 120 displays, for example, a small winning RUSH transition notification image 022SH107 and an icon image 022SH120a in color in response to receiving a big winning end designation command from the main board 11. - 特許庁

In this way, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Also, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) corresponding to the jackpot gaming state.

(F) of FIG. 12-6 shows a variable display during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 variably displays a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern. The bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of game states such as a big win game state and a second KT state (small win RUSH mode). In (F), a pending display 022SH111 indicating the second pending storage is displayed in the right area of the active display 022SH110 of the image display device 5 .

(G) of FIG. 12-6 shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decoration symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game.

(H) of FIG. 12-6 shows the screen during the small winning game in the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small winning game state, when there is a win in the special winning hole, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 022SH131 indicating the number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls). (H) shows that, for example, two balls have been entered into the special winning hole, and two prize balls (a total of 20 balls have been paid out) have been awarded. Also, the total number of prize balls display 022SH130 indicates the total number of prize balls in the big hit and prize balls in the small hit RUSH mode, and can be displayed over the big hit game state and the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state). The total number of awarded balls display 022SH130 shows the number added by 20 balls compared to (G) in FIG. 12-6. After that, the screen transitions to either one of (I) in FIG. 12-7 and (I) in FIG. 12-8.

(I) of FIG. 12-7 shows a variable display during the small hit RUSH mode.

(J) of FIG. 12-7 shows a screen when a decoration pattern 022SH100 indicating either a variable probability big win (10R variable probability big win A, 10R variable probability big win B) or a normal big win (10R normal big win) is derived and displayed in the small win RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "2, 2, 2" which is a combination indicating that there is a possibility of either the probability variable big win or the normal big win. In (J), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to that shown in (K).

(K) of FIG. 12-7 shows the screen of the fanfare period of the big-hit game controlled in the small-hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, and an icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled. Also, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is continuously displayed even after the transition from the second KT state (small win RUSH mode) to the big win game state. Also, the big win notification image 022SH115 indicates that the character has a bow and arrow, and in the big win game, a suggestion performance using the bow and arrow is performed to suggest that there is a possibility of being controlled to the small win RUSH mode after the big win game.

Thus, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is displayed over a plurality of game states including the previous big win game state, the second KT state (small win RUSH mode), and the current big win game state. Also, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game. Also, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 (icon image 022SH120b) is displayed in a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode (second KT state) is controlled.

(L) of FIG. 12-7 shows the screen during the fifth round game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a suggestion effect image 022SH116 suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to the small win RUSH mode after this big win. For example, the suggestion effect includes a success effect in which the displayed character hits the target with a bow and arrow, and a failure effect in which the target cannot be hit.

(M) of FIG. 12-7 shows a screen indicating failure as a result of the suggestive effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a failure effect image 022SH117 in which the displayed character cannot hit the target with a bow and arrow. By displaying the failure effect image 022SH117, it is suggested to the player that the game will not be controlled to the small winning RUSH mode after the big winning game of this time.

In the 5th round, the failure performance image 022SH117 is displayed, and in the subsequent rounds, the ending period, etc., the revival performance of displaying the image indicating success (performance indicating that the game is controlled to the small win RUSH mode after the current big win game) may be executed. Further, as a suggestive effect, a effect with a high possibility that a blank icon image is added or a effect with a high possibility that it is not added may be prepared, and one of the effects selected by determination may be executed.

(N) in FIG. 12-7 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a chan-time mode transition notification image 022SH118 indicating control to the chan-time mode, and an image in which the blank (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is filled. An image in which the icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored is displayed. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the big win has been completed. In this way, the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 changes according to the progress of the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 022SH, the jackpots that can be won in the small jackpot RUSH mode are jackpots of 10 rounds having a common number of rounds. Therefore, the game value given to the player by the big hit game in the small hit RUSH mode is common. For this reason, in the characteristic portion 022SH, the icon image of the bonus rush icon 022SH is uniformly displayed in "red" regardless of the type of the big win when the icon image is displayed to indicate the completion of the big win.

Further, among the icon images 022SH120a to 120c of the bonus rush icon 022SH120, the bottom icon image 022SH120a and the top icon image 022SH120c are colored red, and the middle icon image 022SH120b is colored yellow. Therefore, when displaying the icon images 022SH120a to 120c (see, for example, (C) of FIG. 12-6), the icon image 022SH120a at the bottom and the icon image 022SH120c at the top, and the icon image 022SH120b in the middle may be displayed in different display modes from the beginning (from a blank state). For example, the middle icon image 022SH120b may be displayed in a larger display area than the other icon images 022SH120a and 120c. Thus, even if each of the icon images 022SH120a to 120c is in a blank state, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the icon image corresponds to the big win or the icon image corresponds to the small win RUSH mode by the display mode of the blanks.

(O) of FIG. 12-7 shows a variable display during the chan time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 variably displays a decorative pattern 022SH100 and a second small pattern 022SH102 corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern. The chan time mode is controlled in the first KT state (high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state). In Chantime mode, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is cleared.

Next, FIG. 12-8 will be described. (I) to (L) of FIG. 12-8 are screens similar to the screens shown in (I) to (L) of FIG. 12-7. Therefore, description of (I) to (L) in FIG. 12-8 is omitted.

(M) of FIG. 12-8 shows a screen indicating success as the effect result of the suggestive effect. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a success effect image 022SH127 in which the displayed character hits the target with a bow and arrow. In addition, two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. These two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicate that a state in which game values for two times can be imparted after the small winning RUSH mode after the big winning (after the second big winning is completed) and the next big winning (third big winning) is newly added. Thus, in the bonus rush icon 022SH120, the icon images 022SH120a and 120b in the display mode (red or yellow) corresponding to the completed game and the icon images 022SH120c to 120e in the blank display mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which game values can be awarded thereafter can be displayed at the same time.

(N) in FIG. 12-8 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small-hit RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small-hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the big win has been completed.

(O) of FIG. 12-8 shows a variable display during the small hit RUSH mode.

After that, as shown in (P) of FIG. 12-8, each time the 10R probability variable big win A is executed in the small win RUSH mode, two icon images 022SH120f and 120g indicating blanks are additionally displayed in the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

In the description of FIG. 12-8, the 10R probability variable jackpot A is not explicitly indicated until the result of the suggestive effect is displayed, but when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the 10R probability variable jackpot A may be specified. That is, in the description of FIG. 12-8, in the variable display determined as the 10R variable probability big hit A, the decorative symbol 022SH100 is stopped and displayed in combination "2, 2, 2" indicating that there is a possibility of any of the variable probability big hit and the normal big hit, and the success effect image 022SH127 is displayed by the suggestive effect during the big hit game. In the variable display, the decoration pattern 022SH100 may be stopped and displayed with the combination "7, 7, 7" indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot A.

In this case, the timing of adding the two icon images 120d and 120e to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 may be, for example, during the fanfare period, during the round game, or during the ending period. Also, in this case, although the combination ``7, 7, 7'' of the decorative symbols 022SH100 indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot A is stopped and displayed, the suggestive effect may be performed before the two icon images 120d and 120e are added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120. In this case, since it is clear that an effect indicating success is performed as a result effect in the suggestive effect, the player can play the game while watching the suggestive effect with peace of mind. On the other hand, since the combination "7, 7, 7" indicating the 10R variable probability jackpot A is already statically displayed, two icon images 120d and 120e may be added to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 without performing the suggestive effect.

In addition, when the 10R probability variable big win A is determined, it is determined whether the performance indicating or not indicating the 10R probability variable big win A is performed, and one of the performances determined by the determination may be performed.

(Bonus/rush icon control processing in variable display)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12-9, processing for changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon in the variable display will be described. FIG. 12-9 is a flowchart showing an example of bonus/rush icon control processing in variable display. The bonus/rush icon control process in the variable display is a process executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71). If it is not in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the series of processes as it is. If it is in the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pending memory that has been determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination (step 022SHS72).

If there is a reserved memory prefetched as a big hit (step 022SHS72: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon is changed (step 022SHS73). In the determination of step 022SHS73, the bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in (A) of FIG. 12-10 is used.

(Regarding the bonus/rush icon display change determination table)
Here, the bonus/rush icon display change determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 12-10. FIG. 12-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a bonus/rush icon display change determination table. (A) of FIG. 12-10 is a table used when determining whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon corresponding to the reserved memory.

Specifically, (A) of FIG. 12-10 is a table showing the execution ratio of the bonus/rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when it is determined to be a jackpot by the look-ahead determination. More specifically, in the table of (A) of FIG. 12-10, the "prefetching judgment result" indicates the big hit type by the prefetching judgment. The "bonus/rush icon display change execution ratio" indicates "yes" to change the display or "no" to not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot A, the rate at which the display of the bonus rush icon is changed is "25/100". In addition, in the case of the 10R variable probability jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the rate at which the display of the bonus rush icon is changed is "10/100". Therefore, when the holding memory of the big win is stored, the 10R probability variable big win A, that is, the case where the small win RUSH mode continues after the big win game is easier to change the display of the bonus rush icon than the case where the small win RUSH mode does not continue after the big win game.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to change the display of the bonus rush icon as a result of the determination in step 022SHS73 (step 022SHS74). If the display of the bonus rush icon is not changed (step 022SHS74: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processes.

When changing the display of the bonus rush icon (step 022SHS74: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes and sets the display change effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding icon image to a display mode (for example, yellow) indicating that it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 022SHS75), and ends the series of processes.

At step 022SHS72, if there is no pending memory prefetched as a big hit (step 022SHS72: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit display result is derived and displayed in this variable display (step 022SHS76). When the display result of the big hit is not derived and displayed in this variable display (step 022SHS76: NO), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processes.

On the other hand, when the display result of the big win is derived and displayed in the current variable display (step 022SHS76: YES), it is determined whether or not the display of the bonus/rush icon has been changed at the stage of pending storage before the start of the current variable display (step 022SHS77). If the display of the bonus rush icon has been changed at the stage of pending storage (step 022SHS77: YES), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the series of processes. If the display of the bonus rush icon has not been changed at the stage of pending storage (step 022SHS77: NO), it is determined whether or not the display of the bonus rush icon has been changed (step 022SHS78), and the process proceeds to step 022SHS74. In the determination of step 022 SHS78, the bonus/rush icon display change determination table shown in (B) of FIG. 12-10 is used.

Here, (B) of FIG. 12-10 is a table used when determining whether or not to change the display of the bonus/rush icon corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, (B) of FIG. 12-10 is a table showing the execution ratio of the bonus/rush icon display change for each jackpot type, which is used when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot by the jackpot determination corresponding to the variable display. More specifically, in the table of FIG. 12-10(B), the "jackpot determination result" indicates the jackpot type when the variable display of this time is a jackpot. The "bonus/rush icon display change execution ratio" indicates "yes" to change the display or "no" to not change the display.

For example, in the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot A, the rate at which the display of the bonus rush icon is changed is "10/100". In addition, in the case of the 10R variable probability jackpot B and the 10R normal jackpot, the rate at which the display of the bonus rush icon is changed is "25/100". Therefore, during the variable display for deriving the display result of the big win, the 10R variable probability big win B and the 10R normal big win (when the small win RUSH mode ends after the big win game) are more likely to change the display of the bonus/rush icon than the 10R probability variable big win A (when the small win RUSH mode continues after the big win game).

By using the tables shown in FIGS. 12-10 (A) and (B), it is possible to suggest continuation or termination of the small win RUSH mode by the timing at which the display of the bonus rush icon changes. Specifically, when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed while being retained and stored, it is highly likely that the small winning RUSH mode will continue, and if the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed during variable display, it can be suggested that the small winning RUSH mode is likely to end.

In addition, in the above description, the possibility that the small hit RUSH mode continues depending on whether the information on the target variable display is in the pending storage or in the variable display is suggested, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regarding the information on the variable display of the target, depending on whether the variable display result (big hit pattern) is before derivation display (during pending storage or during variable display) or after derivation display (during the jackpot game), the possibility of continuing the small hit RUSH mode may be suggested. Specifically, if it is before the derivation display of the variable display result (big hit pattern), there is a high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will continue, and on the other hand, if it is after the derivation display of the variable display result, the possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will end may be suggested.

(Screen transition when changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon during variable display)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12-11, the transition of the effect screen when changing the display mode of the bonus rush icon during variable display will be described. FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen when changing the display mode of the bonus/rush icon during variable display.

(A) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started during the small hit RUSH mode. Also, in (A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating the second pending storage is displayed. The pending display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode different from the normal display mode, and specifically, it is a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. The pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is, for example, a pending memory that has been determined to be a big hit by prefetch determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to active display 022SH110 similar to (A). (B) shows an image in which the icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is colored yellow. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that a big win game is to be played (that the small win RUSH mode is terminated or interrupted). In addition, the color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is, for example, a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

(C) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode. Specifically, on the image display device 5, the decoration symbol 022SH100 and the second small symbol 022SH102 are stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small winning game. After (C), it is controlled to a small winning game state, and when the small winning game ends, the screen changes to the screen shown in (D).

(D) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, (D) shows the screen when the high-expectation pending display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display is started.

(E) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen when a decoration pattern 022SH100 indicating either a variable probability big win (10R variable probability big win A, 10R variable probability big win B) or a normal big win (10R normal big win) is derived and displayed in the small win RUSH mode. In (E), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen during the fanfare period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH115 indicating that there is a possibility of either a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot.

(G) of FIG. 12-11 shows a screen indicating success as the effect result of the suggestive effect performed in the fifth round. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot being executed is the 10R probability variable jackpot A, a success effect image 127 is displayed as shown in (G). When the type of the jackpot being executed is the 10R variable probability jackpot B or the 10R normal jackpot, in (G), a failure effect image 022SH117 is displayed as shown in (M) of FIG. 12-7. In (G), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120.

(H) of FIG. 12-11 shows the screen of the ending period in the jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small-hit RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small-hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the big win (second big win) has been completed.

Note that the symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-11 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions of (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing of performing the effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b shown in (B) may be substantially the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing of displaying the screen shown in (A).

Further, the timing of performing the effect of adding color (yellow) to the icon image 022SH120b may be, for example, the timing when the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing after the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started.

Also, before performing the effect of adding color to the icon image 022SH120b, the fanning effect may be performed. For example, the fan effect includes an action effect acting on the icon image 022SH120b. After this action effect, an effect of coloring the icon image 022SH120b may be performed. It should be noted that a so-called fake effect, in which the icon image 022SH120b is not colored, may be performed after the fan effect.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can indicate that there are a plurality of states (second KT state and the next big-hit game) in which a game value can be awarded as a state after the big-hit game in the big-hit game. For example, in the current jackpot game, after the current jackpot game, there are at least two or more advantageous states for the player including the second KT state and the next jackpot game (in the present embodiment, three states of the current jackpot game, the second KT state, and the next jackpot game exist). Therefore, in this big win game, it is possible to clarify that a state advantageous to the player can occur thereafter, so that the player can be further exhilarated during the big win game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the big win.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 1 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portion 022SH described above, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e showing two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is during the round game in the 10R probability variable jackpot A. Instead of such a configuration or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification 1, the timing of adding the icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating two blanks to the bonus rush icon 022SH120 is set before the display result of the variable display (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed.

More specifically, when it is determined that the performance execution means related to the characteristic part 022SH is a big win by pre-reading determination, and this reserve memory is determined to be a big win to shift to the second KT state after the big win, the performance execution means adds a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon before the variable display of this reserve memory is started. In addition, when the variable display of this time is a big win and the big win is shifted to the second KT state after the big win, the performance execution means may add a blank icon image to the bonus rush icon during the variable display.

Next, the transition of the effect screen according to Modification 1 will be described. FIG. 12-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen according to Modification 1 when the display mode of the bonus rush icon is changed. (A) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH110 is started during the small hit RUSH mode. Also, in (A), a pending display 022SH111 indicating the second pending storage is displayed. The pending display 022SH111 shown in (A) is a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. The pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is the pending memory determined to be the 10R probability variable jackpot A by the prefetch determination.

(B) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during variable display corresponding to active display 022SH110 similar to (A). In (B), two icon images 022SH120d and 120e indicating blanks are additionally displayed on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player that it will be controlled to the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A and that the small hit RUSH mode will continue.

(C) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen on which small winning symbols are derived and displayed during the small winning RUSH mode.

(D) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen when the high-expectation pending display 022SH111 moves to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display is started. In (D), when the variable display period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

(E) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen when a decorative symbol 022SH100 indicating a 10R probability variable big hit A is derived and displayed in the small hit RUSH mode. In (E), when the design confirmation period has passed, the screen changes to the screen shown in (F).

(F) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen during the fanfare period in the 10R probability variable jackpot A jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot notification image 022SH105 indicating the 10R probability variable jackpot A and an icon image 022SH120b (second from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120b is a color (for example, yellow) indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

(G) of FIG. 12-12 shows a screen during the fifth round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A during the round game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a round notification image 022SH106 for notifying that it is the fifth round of the 10R probability variable jackpot A.

(H) of FIG. 12-12 shows the screen of the ending period in the 10R probability variable jackpot A jackpot game. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a small-hit RUSH continuation notification image 022SH128 indicating that the small-hit RUSH mode is continuously controlled, and an icon image 022SH120c (third from the bottom) of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in color. The color attached to the icon image 022SH120c is a color (for example, red) indicating that the big win has been completed.

Note that the symbol variation time in the variation display of FIGS. 12-12 (A) to (C) is, for example, 1 second. That is, the screen transitions of (A) to (C) are performed in a short time. Therefore, the timing of performing the effect of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in (B) may be almost the same as the start of the variable display, that is, the timing of displaying the screen shown in (A).

Further, the timing of effecting the addition of the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be, for example, the timing when the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is stored, or the timing after the pending display 022SH111 is shifted to the active display 022SH113 and the variable display corresponding to the active display 022SH113 is started.

In addition, before performing the effect of adding the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e, the fanning effect may be performed. For example, the fanning effect includes an action effect acting on the bonus rush icon 022SH120. After this action effect, an effect of adding two icon images 022SH120d and 120e may be performed. It should be noted that a so-called fake effect, in which the two icon images 022SH120d and 120e are not added after the fan effect, may be performed.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 2 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characterizing portion 022SH described above, the configuration in which the characterizing portion 022 is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko game machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the characteristic part 022SH to a so-called one-and-two mixed type pachinko game machine. In addition, since the pachinko game machine of the mixed type of one and two types is shown in the modified example 1 of the characterizing part 020SH described above, detailed description is omitted and only necessary points are described.

In the one-and-two mixed type gaming machine, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1/100 in the determination based on the winning to the first start winning opening. Also, even if a small winning game is executed based on the winning to the first starting winning hole, the game ball hardly wins in the special variable winning ball device 17, and even if it wins, it hardly passes through the specific area (V area). That is, it is almost impossible to expect that the game value is awarded by the small winning game based on the winning to the first starting winning hole.

On the other hand, in the determination based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the small hit probability is, for example, about 1/7 (≈14/100). In addition, when a small winning game is executed based on the winning to the second starting winning opening, the game ball almost wins inside the special variable winning ball device 17 and also almost passes through the specific area (V area). Therefore, by performing a small winning game based on the winning to the second start winning opening, the game is controlled to be almost in a big winning game state.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine of a mixed type of one and two types, it is controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state: a state in which variable display of a second special game is mainly performed) until variable display is performed for a predetermined number of times after a jackpot game (with a predetermined probability) according to the type of jackpot. In modification 2, for example, it is controlled to the time saving state until seven variable displays are executed in the jackpot game. Then, in the second special game in the special state, by performing a small winning game, it is controlled to the big winning game state again. In the big win game state, when the second reserve memory prefetched to be a small win is stored, the number of big win games corresponding to the number of the second reserve memories prefetched to be a small win are played.

Here, even in the one-and-two mixed type game, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value (first start opening: about 1/100, second start opening: about 1/7). On the other hand, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening will be shown below.

Approximately 1/100 when the set value is "1".
When the set value is "2", it is about 1/95.
About 1/90 when the set value is "3".
When the set value is "4", it is about 1/85.
About 1/80 when the set value is "5".
When the set value is "6", it is about 1/75.

For this reason, the so-called initial hit (big hit in the normal game state: big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol) can be increased according to the set value. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot of Renso (jackpot during the time-saving game: jackpot via the jackpot game based on the variable display of the second special symbol), the difference according to the setting value can be reduced. That is, during the time-saving game, it is possible to reduce the difference in the continuation rate due to the set value.

In modification 2, in the big win game state, it is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the presence of a plurality of big win game states as a state after being controlled to the big win game state. The specific display referred to here is a specific display (referred to as a "bonus icon") indicating that a jackpot game will be played thereafter. For example, at the start of a big win game, if the second reserved memory number prefetched as a small win is ``2'', the big win this time and two big wins corresponding to the second reserved memory number ``2'' prefetched as the minor prize are added to make three big wins. Therefore, a bonus icon consisting of three icon images is displayed to indicate that three big wins will be made. The timing for displaying the bonus icon may be, for example, the fanfare period of the jackpot game.

When the first big win game ends, the icon image showing the first blank among the bonus icons may be given a color (for example, red) indicating that the current big win is completed. Also, when the second big win game is over, the icon image showing the second blank of the bonus icons may be given a color (for example, red) indicating the completion of the second big win. When the second big hit game is started, if the second reserved memory number prefetched as a small hit is newly stored, a bonus icon indicating the blanks for that amount may be added.

Thus, even in the one-and-two mixed type gaming machine, it is possible to display a bonus icon (specific display) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of big wins after the big win game state.

In the modified example 2, a case has been described in which a blank column of the bonus icon is displayed according to the number of second reserved memories that are prefetched as small hits, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of times of occurrence of big wins can be expected based on the number of times of variable display controlled to the special state (time saving state), the number of blank spaces of bonus icons corresponding to the number of times of occurrence of big wins may be displayed. For example, when the probability of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol is close to 100%, the number of times of variable display controlled to the special state (time saving state) and the number of times of the big win expected to occur are almost equal. Specifically, when the special state is controlled by three variations after the big win game is started, a bonus icon indicating four blanks indicating that four big wins are performed by adding the current big win and three big wins according to the three times variable display in the special state should be displayed. Then, during the ending period of the current big win, a blank corresponding to the current big win may be colored to indicate that the current big win is completed.

In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the modified example 2 of the characteristic portion 022SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (one and two types mixed type pachinko gaming machine), comprising a game state control means for controlling a game state and an effect executing means, wherein the game state control means is controllable into an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player, a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a game value is likely to be imparted by the special state. The game machine can be controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and can be controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state, and when the effect executing means is controlled to the advantageous state, it can display a specific display (for example, a bonus icon) corresponding to the presence of a plurality of states (for example, a jackpot game state) in which a game value can be awarded as a state after being controlled to the advantageous state.

According to the modified example 2, during the big win game, a bonus icon corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of states in which the game value can be awarded as a state after the big win game is displayed. Thus, for example, in the first big win game, after the big win game, it can be suggested that there are at least two or more advantageous states for the player, including the current big win and the next big win game. Therefore, in the first big win game, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that a big win can occur thereafter, so that the player can be further excited during the big win game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the jackpot in the one-and-two mixed type gaming machine.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 3 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portion 022SH described above, the configuration for displaying the specific display (bonus/rush icon) on the image display device 5 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, in Modified Example 3, a configuration for displaying a specific display in an area other than the image display device 5 will be described.

For example, it is possible to display the specific display on a decorative LED or another display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 . First, a case where a specific display is represented by a decorative LED will be described.

When the specific display is represented by decorative LEDs, for example, a predetermined number of decorative LEDs are arranged on the game board 2 . Specifically, for example, ten LEDs are arranged vertically on the game board 2 . Then, when it is controlled to the big win game of 10R probability variable big win A, the three decoration LEDs from the bottom are lit in white in the big win game. The lighting of the three decorative LEDs in white indicates that there is a state in which the game value for three times is given for the current big win, the small win RUSH mode after the current big win is finished, and the next big win.

Then, during the ending period of the first big win, the lowest LED among the three LEDs lit in white is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the first big hit is completed. Further, when the game is controlled to the big win game state (second big win) in the small win RUSH mode, the second LED from the bottom is lit yellow during the fanfare period of the big win. Thereby, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode.

Furthermore, during the ending period of the second big win, the third LED from the bottom is lit in red. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the second big hit is completed. If the second big win is the 10R probability variable big win A, then in the big win game state (for example, the fifth round), the fourth and fifth LEDs from the bottom should be lit in white. By the white lighting of these two LEDs, it is possible to notify that a state in which game values for two rounds are given after the small win RUSH mode after the second big win and the third big win is newly added.

It should be noted that if the continuous residence continues, all 10 decorative LEDs may light up. In this case, assuming that the first round of lighting has ended, the second round of lighting is started. Specifically, it is sufficient to change the display mode of the lowest LED to light it. For example, the bottom LED may be lit in a color (for example, purple) indicating the second round of lighting. Further, when the big hit or small hit RUSH mode is completed after the second round of lighting, the corresponding LEDs may be lit in a display manner different from that of the first round.

In this way, by representing the specific display with the decorative LED, it is possible to draw attention to the decorative LED and to effectively utilize the display area of the image display device 5 .

Next, a description will be given of a configuration that enables a bonus/rush icon to be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal. All of the bonus rush icons related to the characteristic portion 022SH may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. Also, the bonus rush icon may be displayed in different display areas depending on the gaming state. For example, the bonus rush icon may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the big win game state, and may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal in the small win RUSH mode. Thus, in the small winning RUSH mode, the image display device 5 can draw attention to the prize balls in the small winning game and the cumulative number of winning balls in the continuous game, and in the big winning game state, to draw attention to the bonus rush icon. As a result, the image display device 5 and the sub-liquid crystal can be effectively used.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 4 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the characteristic part 022SH, the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled is one display mode (for example, yellow). In modification 4, a case will be described in which a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon indicating that the small hit RUSH mode is controlled.

Specifically, the effect executing means related to the characteristic part 022SH may display the display mode of the bonus rush icon in a display mode according to the number of continuations of the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). For example, when a variable display of 50 or more variations is executed in a small win RUSH mode and controlled to a big win game state (when the degree of profit in the small win RUSH mode is high), the performance executing means makes the display mode of the bonus rush icon yellow.

In addition, the performance execution means makes the display mode of the bonus rush icon blue when the variable display of less than 50 variations is executed in the small winning RUSH mode and controlled to the big winning game state (when the degree of profit in the small winning RUSH mode is low). As a result, the number of continuations for each small-hit RUSH mode can be suggested to the player by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the yellow bonus rush icon is displayed more often than the blue display mode, the player can obtain a sense of superiority and satisfaction, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 5 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment according to the characteristic portion 022SH described above, the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed is one display mode (for example, red). In modification 5, a case will be described in which a plurality of display modes can be taken as the display mode of the bonus rush icon when the jackpot game is completed.

Specifically, the effect executing means related to the characteristic part 022SH may display the icon image of the bonus/rush icon in a display mode according to the type of the big win. For example, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is performed, the effect execution means sets the display mode of the bonus rush icon to red. As a result, the continuation of the small winning RUSH mode (continuation of consecutive games) can be suggested by displaying the bonus rush icon in a red display mode. In addition, the effect executing means displays the bonus rush icon in green when a 10R probability variable B jackpot game or a 10R normal jackpot game is performed. Thus, by displaying the bonus rush icon in a green display mode, it is possible to suggest the end of the small winning RUSH mode (the end of the series).

In addition, in the embodiment according to the characteristic portion 022SH, the jackpot type that allows the small hit RUSH mode to continue is one type of 10R probability variable jackpot A, but it may be a plurality of types. For example, the jackpot type of the jackpot capable of continuing the small hit RUSH mode may be a 10R probability variable jackpot A and a 5R probability variable jackpot. In this case, when the jackpot game of 10R probability variable jackpot A is performed, the effect executing means changes the display mode of the bonus rush icon to red. In addition, the effect executing means displays the bonus rush icon in an orange color when the 5R probability variable big win jackpot game is played. Thus, the given game value can be suggested by the display mode of the bonus rush icon. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed in red more than in orange, the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and thus the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 6 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic part 022SH described above, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the icon image whose display mode is to be changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed) is the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom. Instead of such a configuration or in addition to such a configuration, in Modification 6, the icon image whose display mode is to be changed before the start of the jackpot game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed) may be the third icon image 022SH120c (see FIG. 12-11) from the bottom.

Specifically, in the embodiment related to the characteristic portion 022SH described above, before the start of the big win game, the second icon image 022SH120b from the bottom of the bonus rush icon is controlled to the small win RUSH mode. In modification 6, before the start of the big win game (before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed), the icon image 022SH120c (see FIG. 12-11), which is the third icon from the bottom of the bonus rush icons, may be displayed in a color indicating that the big win will be executed.

Specifically, when there is a reserved memory that is determined to be a big hit by the look-ahead determination, an effect may be performed in which the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom is colored red. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the next big win will be executed before the big win is started.

Further, the display mode after the change of the icon image 022SH120c with the third eye from the bottom is not limited to the display mode in which the icon image 022SH120c is colored in red, and may be a display mode according to the jackpot type. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by the look-ahead determination for the pending memory corresponding to the pending display 022SH111 is the 10R variable variable jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be displayed in red, and in the case of the 10R variable variable jackpot B or normal jackpot, the display mode may be pink. Thus, the type of jackpot to be executed can be suggested by the display mode (color) of the third icon image 022SH120c from the bottom.

In addition, for example, when the jackpot type obtained by prefetching determination for the reserved memory corresponding to the reserved display 022SH111 is the 10R probability variable jackpot A, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be easily changed to a blinking mode with a fast blinking speed. Also, in the case of the 10R probability variable jackpot B or the normal jackpot, the icon image 022SH120c of the third eye from the bottom may be set to be in a lighting mode with a slow flashing speed. As a result, it is possible to suggest a jackpot type that is likely to be executed by the display mode (blinking mode) of the icon image 022SH120c with the third eye from the bottom.

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 022SH)
Next, Modified Example 7 of the characteristic portion 022SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the characteristic part 022SH, the bonus rush icon can be displayed from the start of the big win that triggers the start of the small win RUSH mode to the end of the big win that ends the small win RUSH mode. Instead of such a configuration or in addition to such a configuration, in the modification 7, even when the small hit RUSH mode ends and the machine shifts (falls) to the chance mode (first KT state), the case where the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed will be explained.

In the small hit RUSH mode, when the 10R variable probability big hit B or the 10R normal big hit jackpot game is executed, the chance time mode (first KT state: high probability/high base state or low probability/high base state) is controlled. Here, even during the chance time mode, it is quite possible that a big win will occur. Therefore, in Modification 7, the bonus rush icon can be continuously displayed even during the chance time mode.

For example, in the chantime mode, the icon images of the bonus rush icons are all displayed in color. Also, the timing for erasing the bonus rush icon may be when the chan-time mode is shifted to the normal mode. Also, when the big win game of 10R probability variable big win A is played in the chance mode, that is, when the big win game to shift to the small win RUSH mode is played, an icon image of a blank column is added to the bonus rush icon being displayed and displayed.

Also, the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed only in the high-probability/high-base state chantime mode. When controlled to the high probability/high base state, it is certain that at least one more big win will be made. Therefore, an effect of adding one blank icon image to the bonus rush icon may be performed during the execution of the big win game (10R probability variable big win B) for shifting (falling) from the small win RUSH mode to the chance mode. As a result, even when the player falls to the chance mode, the player can play the game hoping that at least one more big win will be the 10R probability variable big win A (transition to the small win RUSH mode). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the chan time mode.

The chan-time mode is an effect mode that does not allow the player to determine whether the control is in the high-probability/high-base state or the low-probability/high-base state. Here, when a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added is displayed in the chan time mode, the player can discriminate that the control is in the high probability/high base state. Therefore, when the bonus rush icon is displayed under control in the high-probability/high-base state, control may be performed in another presentation mode for notifying the high-probability/high-base state, instead of the chan-time mode.

Further, when the control is performed to the high probability/high base state, a performance determination may be made as to whether or not the bonus rush icon should be continued to be displayed, and the bonus rush icon may be continuously displayed according to the result of the performance determination. Specifically, when a positive determination result is obtained from the effect determination, a bonus rush icon with one blank icon image added may be displayed in the high probability/high base state. As a result, even when the bonus rush icon is not displayed, there is a possibility of being controlled in a high-probability/high-base state, so the player can play the game in hopes of being controlled in a high-probability/high-base state.

It should be noted that even in Modification 7, a suggestive effect (for example, see FIGS. 12-8 (L) and (M)) may be performed when adding a blank icon image. In addition, as the suggestive performance, a performance with a high possibility of adding two blank icon images, a performance with a high possibility of adding one icon image, and a performance with a high possibility of not being added may be prepared, and one of the performances selected by determination may be executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the suggestive presentation.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 022SH)
Related to the characteristic portion 022SH described above, there is known a pachinko game machine that controls to a special state with a high frequency of being controlled to a small hit game state compared to the normal state (eg, JP 2015-156952 A). In addition, there is known a pachinko game machine that displays a preview image corresponding to a high-probability state and a high-base state after the end of the jackpot during a round game in the jackpot game state (for example, JP-A-2016-135166). However, merely informing the player of the game state after the end of the big win does not give the player a clear grasp of the state in which the game value can be awarded after that, which is insufficient for the player's interest.

(Means E1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means E1 related to the characteristic part 022SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and includes a game state control means for controlling the game state (for example, a part for executing steps S120 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) shown in FIG. 6) and an effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120). The game state control means is capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from the above-mentioned advantageous state, and a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state, and can be controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A), and to the special state. After being controlled, the advantageous state (for example, the next big hit game state using the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol in FIG. 12-2: 10R high probability variable big hit A, 10R high probability variable big hit B, and 10R normal big hit) can be controlled, and the effect execution means, when controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the current big hit game state: 10R high probability variable big hit A), as the state after being controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to display a specific display (bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-6 (C)) corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot game state) in which a game value can be awarded (for example, processing performed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in step 022SHS15 in FIG. 12-3).

According to such a configuration, the specific display can suggest that there are a plurality of states in which a game value can be awarded as states after the advantageous state in the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to clarify the state in which the game value can be given after that due to the advantageous state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(Means E2)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E2 related to the characteristic part 022SH, in the gaming machine according to the means E1, the effect execution means is a controlled state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot) out of states including the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and a plurality of states in which the game value can be given (for example, the second KT state and the next jackpot game state). In response to A), the display mode of the specific display can be changed (the display mode of the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be changed to the red display mode indicating that the big win has been completed, as shown in step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 or in FIG. 12-6 (E)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific display according to the progress of the game. This makes it possible to clarify the state in which the game value has already been given. Therefore, the player can easily comprehend the progress of the game in the state where the game value is given, by the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(Means E3)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to means E1 or E2 as the gaming machine of the means E3 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the specific display has a plurality of different display modes (for example, a red display mode and a yellow display mode), and the effect execution means includes the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and a plurality of states in which the game value can be given (for example, the 2KT state and the next jackpot game state. ), and the display mode corresponding to the controlled state (for example, step 022SHS52 in FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 (E), corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game Red display mode, and step 022SHS16 in FIG. 12-3 and yellow display mode indicating that the second KT state is controlled in FIG. 12-6 (E)) can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify the type of state in which a game value has already been given by the display mode of the specific display. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the type of state in which the game value is given. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction according to the type of state in which game values have already been awarded. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means E4)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E3, as the gaming machine of the means E4 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the effect execution means includes a specific display of a specific mode corresponding to the controlled advantageous state (for example, a red display mode corresponding to the completion of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 12-6(E)) and a specific display of a predetermined mode corresponding to the existence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be awarded (for example, a bonus of FIG. 12-8(M)). - Blank icon images 022SH120d and 120e shown in the rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clarify a state in which a game value has already been awarded and a state in which a game value may be awarded thereafter, depending on the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player can easily grasp the state in which the game value has been awarded and the state in which the game value may be awarded thereafter. Therefore, the player can obtain a sense of satisfaction from the fact that the game value has already been given and a feeling of expectation that there will be a state in which the game value can be given later. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means E5)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E4 as the gaming machine of the means E5 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the effect execution means can display the specific display over a plurality of states out of states including the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state) and a plurality of states in which the game value can be given (for example, the 2KT state and the next jackpot game state) (for example, FIGS. 12-6 (E), (F ), the bonus rush icon 022SH120 can be displayed from the jackpot game state to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes from an advantageous state to a state in which a game value can be awarded, the state in which the game value can be awarded can be continuously shown to the player. As a result, even if the state changes, the player can continue to have a feeling of satisfaction due to the fact that the game value has already been given and a feeling of expectation that there is a state in which the game value can be given later. Therefore, interest in the game can be maintained.

(Means E6)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E5 as the gaming machine of the means E6 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the effect execution means is the game value given in the advantageous state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A jackpot) (for example, the total number of winning balls display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (E)) and the special state (for example, the 2KT state). The game value (for example, the total number of prize balls display 022SH130 in FIG. 12-6 (H)) can be displayed over the advantageous state (for example, the first big win game state) and the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the state changes, it is possible to clearly indicate the game value given in the advantageous state and the special state. As a result, the player can continue to grasp the given game value even if the state changes. Therefore, for example, when the given game value is large, the player can get a sense of satisfaction, and when the given game value is smaller than the player's expectation, the player's desire to play can be aroused. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means E7)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to means E6 as the gaming machine of the means E7 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the effect execution means executes a suggestive effect (for example, the suggestive effect image 022SH116 in FIG. 12-8(L)) suggesting that the special state is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, the next big win game state), and Corresponding to the effect result of the suggestive effect (for example, the success effect image 022SH127 in FIG. 12-8 (M)), a specific display in a predetermined mode (for example, step 022SHS36 in FIG. 12-4 and the blank display mode shown in the bonus rush icon 022SH120 in FIG. 12-8 (M)) corresponding to the presence of a plurality of states in which the game value can be awarded as a state after being controlled to the subsequent advantageous state can be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to incite whether or not there are a plurality of states in which game values can be awarded thereafter (specifically, whether or not consecutive games will continue) in the later advantageous state. Therefore, even in the later advantageous state, it is possible to enhance the interest in the advantageous state in the same manner as in the previous advantageous state.

(Means E8)
In addition, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E7 as the gaming machine of the means E8 related to the characteristic part 022SH, in an advantageous state before being controlled to the special state (for example, the current jackpot game state: 10R probability variable jackpot A) and an advantageous state after being controlled to the special state (for example, the next jackpot game state), a round game of a common number of times (for example, 10 rounds) is executed, and the effect execution means is the above. It is possible to display a specific display in a common display mode (for example, the display mode of the bottom icon image 022SH120a shown in FIG. 12-6(E) and the display mode of the top icon image 022SH120c shown in FIG. 12-7(N) are common) when being controlled to the previous advantageous state and when being controlled to the subsequent advantageous state.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the game value given in each advantageous state the same, so that the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state can be made a common display mode. Specifically, the display mode (e.g., blank) of the specific display corresponding to the advantageous state that can be granted can be a common display mode (e.g., blanks of the same shape) for the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Also, the display mode (for example, red) of the specific display corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be a common display mode for the earlier advantageous state and the later advantageous state. Therefore, for example, the player can easily grasp the rough estimate of the game value that can be given or the rough estimate of the game value that is given, based on the number of specific displays. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific display.

(Means E9)
In addition, as the gaming machine of the means E9 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E8 further comprises variable display execution means (for example, processing executed by the CPU 103 shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-21) capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel, and the game state control means. can be controlled to the advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, as shown in the jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. The effect execution means erases the specific display when the advantageous state is controlled based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information.

More specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 022SH can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information at the same time, and can display the specific display when controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 022SH, since the variable display of the first identification information is less advantageous for the player than the variable display of the second identification information, the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information, and the state in which the game value can be awarded may disappear. Here, if the specific display is displayed even though the state in which the game value can be awarded has disappeared, the interest in the game is reduced. Therefore, the gaming machine of means E9 erases the specific display when being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to control in an advantageous state based on the variable display of the first identification information.

(Means E10)
Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E9 as the gaming machine of the means E10 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the game state control means can control the advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and the effect execution means can display the specific display (for example, during execution of the variable display) before the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, during execution of the variable display). The blank icon images 022SH120d and 120e in FIG. 12-12(B) can be added).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing for displaying the specific display and the timing for changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, not only the interest in the special state but also the interest in the game during the variable display can be improved.

(Means E11)
Further, as the gaming machine of the means E11 related to the characteristic part 022SH, the gaming machine according to the means E10 includes pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) whether or not the display result of the variable display that has not yet started is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state, and the effect execution means can display the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-start determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11 (B), the icon The display mode of the image 022SH120b can be changed to a yellow display mode indicating that the image 022SH120b is controlled to the second KT state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the timing for displaying the specific display and the timing for changing the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, not only the amusement in the special state but also the amusement of the game during the pending memory before the variable display can be improved.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 026SH)
Next, the game machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH will be described. The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH is a gaming machine capable of playing games. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH includes game state control means (state control means) and effect execution means. The game state control means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11, for example. The effect execution means is realized by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12, for example. In addition to the above, the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH includes, for example, variable display execution means, pre-start determination means, pending storage means, and setting means. The variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the pending storage means, and the setting means are implemented by the CPU 103 of the main substrate 11, for example.

The game state control means controls the game state. The game state control means can control to an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot game state. The special state is a game state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small winning game state.

The special state is a state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state, for example, the second KT state (high probability/low base state). The second KT state is a gaming state in which small hits are likely to occur, and is a gaming state in which game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening. The first KT state (high-probability/high-base state or low-probability/high-base state) is a game state in which small hits are likely to occur, but is also a game state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a special winning hole. That is, the first KT state is a state in which almost no game value is awarded due to the special state.

In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, it is possible to control to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state. The advantageous game referred to here is a big win that shifts to the second KT state after the end of the big win game state. The game state control means can control to the second KT state after controlling to the big win game state, and can control to the big win game state again after controlling to the second KT state.

The effect execution means executes various effects according to the situation. For example, a meter effect or a character effect is executed. Details will be described later.

(Regarding the movable body of the game machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a part (near the image display device 5) of the game board 2 of the game machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH. The game machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH includes, for example, a movable body 026SH32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-1(A). The movable body 026SH32 operates between a first state (initial state) and a second state (inclined state) according to the control of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. For example, the movable body 026SH32 may operate in the following order: first state→second state→first state, first state→second state→first state→second state→first state, first state→state between the first and second states (pause)→second state→first state, or first state→state between the first and second states (pause)→first state.

(Regarding the game machine meter effect related to the characteristic part 026SH)
FIG. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the meter effect executed in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH. The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH executes a meter effect as shown in FIG. 13-2 during the variable display. FIGS. 13-2(A) to (D) show scenes in which the meter effects are executed according to the control of the effect control board 12. FIG.

In FIG. 13-2(A), the meter gauge section 026SHMTG on the left side informs which of four stages ("1" to "4") the meter value is. In FIG. 13-2(A), the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG informs that the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage). In FIG. 13-2(A), the level display 026SHLV above the meter gauge section 026SHMTG indicates the level corresponding to the meter value reported by the meter gauge section 026SHMTG. In FIG. 13-2(A), the level display 026SHLV informs that the level is "LEVEL1" which is the first stage (initial stage). In other words, FIG. 13-2(A) is a scene in which the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV inform that the meter value is "1", which is the first stage (initial stage), and the level is "LEVEL1", which is the first stage (initial stage). A first small pattern 026SH101 corresponding to the decoration pattern is displayed at the lower left. In addition, in the following description, the meter value may be referred to as the number of meters.

FIG. 13-2(B) shows a scene in which the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV inform that the meter value is the second level "2" and the level is the second level "LEVEL2". FIG. 13-2(C) shows a scene in which the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV indicate that the meter value is "3", which is the third level, and the level is "LEVEL3", which is the third level. FIG. 13-2(D) shows a scene where the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV inform that the meter value is "4", which is the fourth stage (final stage), and the level is "LEVEL4", which is the fourth stage (final stage).

In the gaming machine relating to the feature part 026SH, when the meter value reaches the final stage of "4" in the meter effect, the movable body 026SH32 may operate (when the character effect is executed) (see FIG. 13-6(D)). In addition, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value becomes "4", which is the final stage in the meter effect, it becomes super reach (SP) (see FIG. 13-5 (A), etc.).

FIG. 13-3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-3(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution timings of the meter effect and the character effect (effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) in the non-KT state (normal state). FIG. 13-3(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the performance of the character product in the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH). Note that FIG. 13-3(B) will be described later.

FIG. 13-3(A) specifically shows an example of execution timing of the meter effect and the character effect when the meter effect and the character effect are executed in the variable display of the super reach. In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta0 to Ta10 are periods during variable display. Ta10 to Ta11 is a period during stop display. Ta0 to Ta1 are periods before reach. Ta1 to Ta9 are normal reach periods. Ta9-Ta10 is the period of super reach.

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta2 to Ta8 are execution periods of the meter effect. Among Ta2 to Ta8, Ta2 to Ta3 are scenes informing that the meter value is "1" as shown in FIG. 13-2(A). Ta3 to Ta4 are scenes informing that the meter value is "2" as shown in FIG. 13-2(B). Ta4 to Ta7 are scenes informing that the meter value is "3" as shown in FIG. 13-2(C). Ta7 to Ta8 are scenes informing that the meter value is "4" as shown in FIG. 13-D(C). In other words, Ta3 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "1" to "2" in the meter effect. Ta4 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "2" to "3" in the meter effect. Ta7 is the timing at which the meter value is updated (added) from "3" to "4" in the meter effect.

There are a plurality of types of execution modes (meter effect patterns) of meter effects (see FIG. 13-5(A)), but FIG. 13-3(A) shows an example of meter effects by one execution mode (specifically, meter effect pattern "MEP5").

In FIG. 13-3(A), Ta5 to Ta6 are execution periods of the character presentation. Ta5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Ta6 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. For example, when the movable body 026SH32 moves in the order of the first state→second state→first state, the first state (Ta5)→second state→first state (Ta6). Further, for example, when the movable body 026SH32 operates in the order of the first state→second state→first state→second state→first state, the first state (Ta5)→second state→first state→second state→first state (Ta6).

FIG. 13-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols and decoration symbols in a gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-4 is an example of the first special symbol variation pattern table for non-KT. In the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, when it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), instead of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. That is, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #101 to #109 shown in FIG. 13-4 is determined.

In addition, the first variation pattern #104 is a variation pattern of super reach loss, and is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally loses. The first variation pattern #105 is a variation pattern of super reach loss, and is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally loses. The first variation pattern #108 is a super reach jackpot variation pattern, and is a variation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a jackpot. The first variation pattern #109 is a variation pattern of a super reach jackpot, and is a variation pattern that develops from a normal reach to a super reach B and finally becomes a jackpot. The reliability of the big hit is super reach B>super reach A.

FIGS. 13-5 and 13-6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the meter effects and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-5(A) shows the contents of the meter effect pattern (the mode of increasing the meter value, etc.). FIG. 13-5(B) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the meter effect. FIG. 13-6(A) shows an example of determination ratios of meter effect patterns when the set values are "1" and "2". FIG. 13-6(B) is an example of determination ratios of meter effect patterns when the set values are "3" and "4". FIG. 13-6(C) is an example of determination ratios of meter effect patterns when the set values are "5" and "6". FIG. 13-6(D) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character effect (effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) when the meter value is "4".

As shown in FIG. 13-5(A), the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is a meter effect pattern in which the number of times the meter value increases is zero. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP1", the meter value does not increase from "1 (initial stage)" shown in Fig. 13-2(A). The meter performance pattern 'MEP2' is a meter performance pattern in which the number of times the meter value is increased is one and the meter value reaches '2' (that is, does not reach '3' or '4'). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP2”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B). The meter performance pattern 'MEP3' is a pattern of meter performance in which the number of times the meter value is increased is two times and the meter value reaches '3' (reaches up to '3') (that is, does not reach '4'). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP3”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B) and further to “3 (third stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(C). The meter effect pattern “MEP4” is a meter effect pattern in which the number of times the meter value is increased is one and the meter value reaches “3” (that is, does not reach “4”). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP4”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “3 (third stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(C) without going through “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B). The meter effect pattern “MEP5” is a meter effect pattern in which the meter value increases three times and the meter value reaches “4” (reaches “4”). That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP5”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B), further increases to “3 (third stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(C), and further increases to “4 (final stage)” shown in FIG.

The meter effect patterns “MEP6” and “MEP7” are patterns of meter effects in which the number of times the meter value increases is two and the meter value reaches “4”. Specifically, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP6”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B), and further increases to “4 (final stage)” shown in FIG. Further, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern "MEP7", the meter value increases from "1 (initial stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to "3 (third stage)" shown in FIG. 13-2(C) without going through "2 (second stage)" shown in FIG. The meter effect pattern “MEP8” is a meter effect pattern in which the number of times the meter value increases is one and the meter value reaches “4”. That is, in the meter effect by the meter effect pattern “MEP8”, the meter value increases from “1 (initial stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(A) to “4 (final stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(D) without going through “2 (second stage)” shown in FIG. 13-2(B) or “3 (third stage)” shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13-5(B), in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH, execution/non-execution of the meter effect is determined based on the set value and the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), when the setting value is "1" or "2", the determination ratio of execution is 0% when non-reach is lost (first variation pattern #101, #102 in FIG. 13-4), and the determination percentage of execution is 8% when normal reach is lost (first variation pattern #103 in FIG. 13-4), and super reach is lost (first variation pattern #104 in FIG. 13-4). , #105), the determination ratio of execution is 24%, the determination ratio of execution is 0% when it becomes a small hit (variation pattern #106 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 16% when it becomes a normal reach jackpot (first variation pattern #107 in FIG. 13-4), and the determination ratio of execution is 16% when it becomes a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109 in FIG. 13-4). The percentage is 40%.

In addition, when the set value is "3" or "4", the determination ratio of execution is 0% when non-reach is lost, the determination percentage of execution is 10% when normal reach is lost, the determination ratio of execution is 30% when super reach is lost, the determination ratio of execution is 0% when a small win is obtained, the determination ratio of execution is 20% when normal reach is a big hit, and the decision is execution when a super reach is a big hit. is 50%. In addition, when the set value is "5" or "6", the determination ratio of execution is 0% when non-reach is lost, the determination percentage of execution is 12% when normal reach is lost, the determination ratio of execution is 36% when super reach is lost, the determination ratio of execution is 0% when a small win is obtained, the determination ratio of execution is 24% when normal reach is a big hit, and the decision is execution when a super reach is a big hit. is 60%.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-5(B), when a non-reach loss occurs or a small hit occurs, the meter effect is not executed regardless of the set value (even if the set value is "1" to "6"). When the normal reach is lost, the super reach is lost, the normal reach is a big hit, or the super reach is a big hit, the execution ratio of the meter performance depends on the set value, and is most easily executed when the set value is ``5'' or ``6'', and most difficultly when the set value is ``1'' or ``2''.

As shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), in the gaming machine relating to the feature part 026SH, the meter effect pattern is determined based on the set value and the variation pattern. As an example, when the set value is "1" and the normal reach is lost, as shown in FIG. Each determination percentage is 0%. As another example, when the set value is "3" and the super reach is lost, as shown in FIG. 13-6(B), the decision rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP1" is 0%, the decision rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP2" is 0%, the decision rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP3" is 20%, the decision rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP4" is 20%, and the decision rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP5" is 45%. , the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP6" is 10%, the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP7" is 5%, and the determination rate of the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is 0%.

In the example shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"), in the case of normal reach, a meter effect pattern ("MEP1" or "MEP2") in which the meter value does not reach "3" can be determined, but in the case of super reach, a meter effect pattern ("MEP1" or "MEP2") in which the meter value does not reach "3" is not determined. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, when the meter value does not reach "3" in the meter effect, the super reach does not develop.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), regardless of the setting value (regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6"), in the case of super reach, the meter value can determine a meter effect pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP8") that reaches "4", but in the case of normal reach, the meter effect pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP8") that reaches "4" is not determined. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, regardless of the setting value, when the meter value reaches "4" in the meter effect, the super reach always develops.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), when the setting value is "1" or "2", when the setting value is "3" or "4", and when the setting value is "5" or "6", the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern (specifically, "MEP3" to "MEP7") when the super reach is lost is changed. Specifically, when the set value is "1" or "2", the meter effect pattern ("MEP3" or "MEP4") whose meter value stops at "3" is determined at a determination rate of 46% (23%+23%), whereas the meter effect pattern ("MEP5" to "MEP8") at which the meter value reaches "4" is determined at a determination rate of 54% (42%+8%+4%). When the set value is '3' or '4', the meter performance pattern where the meter value stops at '3' is determined at a determination rate of 40% (20%+20%), whereas the meter performance pattern where the meter value reaches '4' is determined at a determination rate of 60% (45%+10%+5%). When the set value is '5' or '6', the meter performance pattern where the meter value stops at '3' is determined at a determination rate of 34% (17%+17%), whereas the meter performance pattern where the meter value reaches '4' is determined at a determination rate of 66% (48%+12%+6%).

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 13-6(A) to 13-6(C), the meter effect pattern "MEP8" can be determined in the case of a super ready-to-win big hit regardless of the set value (whether the set value is "1" to "6"), but the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is not determined in other cases. That is, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH, the meter effect pattern "MEP8" is a meter effect pattern that determines a big win (super reach big win) regardless of the set value. In addition, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, the determining ratio of the meter effect pattern "MEP8" when the super ready-to-win hit is fixed (5%) regardless of the set value.

In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value becomes "4" in the meter effect, there is a case where the character effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) is executed. In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, whether or not to execute the character effect when the meter value is "4" is determined based on the meter effect pattern as shown in FIG. 13-6(D). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-6(D), when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the determination ratio of execution is 50%, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", the determination ratio of execution is 70%, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the meter effect pattern is "MEP8", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

That is, when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", the meter value changes (increases) from "1"→"2"→"3"→"4" as shown in FIG. When the meter performance pattern is 'MEP6', the meter value changes (increases) from '1' to '2' to '4', but when the meter value changes from '2' to '4', the role performance is performed at a rate of 70%. When the meter performance pattern is 'MEP7', the meter value changes (increases) from '1' to '3' to '4', but when the meter value changes from '3' to '4', the role performance is performed at a rate of 80%. When the meter performance pattern is 'MEP8', the meter value changes (increases) from '1' to '4', but when the meter value changes from '1' to '4', the role performance is executed at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, when the meter value does not become "4" in the meter effect, the character object effect is not executed (the percentage of determination of execution is 0%). When the meter value does not reach "4" in the meter effect is when the meter value does not reach "4" ("MEP1" - "MEP4"), or when the meter value reaches "4" ("MEP5" - "MEP7") but when the meter value does not reach "4" (when the meter value changes from "1" to "2" or "2" to "3" in "MEP5", or when the meter value changes from "2" to "3" in "MEP6". is changed from "1" to "2", and when the meter value changes from "1" to "3" in "MEP7").

FIG. 13-7 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing (effect determination processing for determining meter effect, character effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. It should be noted that, at the start of the flow chart of FIG. 13-7, the game state is assumed to be the normal state (mainly the non-KT state in which the first special symbols fluctuate).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter effect based on the set value and the variation pattern (step 026SHS100). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a determination rate of 8% when the set value is "1" and the variation pattern is normal reach out (first variation pattern #103), and determines execution at a determination rate of 50% when the set value is "4" and the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109) (see FIG. 13-5 (B)).

After step 026SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the meter effect should be executed (step 026SHS101). If it is not determined that the meter effect should be executed (step 026SHS101; NO), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the meter effect should be executed (step 026SHS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the meter effect pattern based on the set value and the variation pattern (step 026SHS102). For example, when the set value is "1" and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach (first fluctuation pattern # 103), "MEP1" is 50 %, "MEP2" is 40 %, "MEP3" is 8 %, "MEP4" is 2 %, "MEP6" is 0 %, "MEP6". %, "MEP7" is determined at 0 % and "MEP8" is determined by 0 % (see Fig. 13-6 (A)). Further, when the set value is "4" and the variation pattern is the super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), "MEP1" is determined at 0%, "MEP2" at 0%, "MEP3" at 5%, "MEP4" at 15%, "MEP5" at 45%, "MEP6" at 15%, "MEP7" at 15%, and "MEP8" at 5% (Fig. 13). -6(B)).

Following step 026SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 sets the meter effect pattern determined in step 026SHS102 (step 026SHS103).

After step 026SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines (sets) whether or not a meter effect pattern in which the meter value reaches "4" (step 026SHS104). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one of "MEP5" to "MEP8" is determined (set). If the meter effect pattern reaching "4" is not determined (set) (step 026 SHS104; NO), the effect determination process is terminated. That is, when one of "MEP1" to "MEP4" is determined (set), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the meter performance pattern that the meter value reaches "4" is determined (set) (step 026SHS104; YES), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the performance when the meter value reaches "4" based on the meter performance pattern (step 026SHS105). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a determination rate of 50% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP5", determines execution at a determination rate of 70% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6", determines execution at a determination rate of 80% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP7", and determines execution at a determination rate of 100% when the meter effect pattern is "MEP6" (Fig. 13-6(D)). reference).

Subsequent to step 026SHS105, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character object effect is to be executed (step 026SHS106). If it is not determined that the character object effect should be executed (step 026SHS106; NO), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the role product performance is to be executed (step 026SHS106; YES), the performance control CPU 120 sets the presence of the performance of the role product performance (specifically, a flag indicating that the performance of the role product is to be executed, information for controlling the execution of the performance of the role product, etc.) (step 026SHS107), and ends the performance determination process.

FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation related to the characteristic portion 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the meter effect (the meter effect pattern is "MEP5") and the character effect in the non-KT state (normal state). 13-8, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 transitions in the order of FIG. 13-8(A)→FIG. 13-8(B)→FIG. 13-8(C)→FIG. 13-8(D).

FIG. 13-8(A) shows a scene where the meter value is "3" in the meter effect (specifically, the scene between Ta4 and Ta5 in FIG. 13-3(A)). In FIG. 13-8(A), the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV inform the meter value "3" and the level "LEVEL3". Note that FIG. 13-8(A) shows the scene before execution of the performance of the character object, so the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-8(B) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Ta5 and Ta6 in FIG. 13-3(A)) in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect and is in the second state (inclined state). In FIG. 13-8(B), an oval image 026SH32EF01 is displayed as the effect of the character production.

FIG. 13-8(C) is a scene where the meter value changes from "3" to "4" in the meter effect (specifically, the scene between Ta7 and Ta8 in FIG. 13-3(A)). In FIG. 13-8(C), the meter gauge portion 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV inform the meter value "4" and the level "LEVEL4". In FIG. 13-8(C), a star image 026SHMTMAXEF is displayed as an effect of the meter value reaching MAX. Note that the star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as part of the meter effect, or the star image 026SHMTMAXEF may be displayed as another effect related to the meter effect. Note that FIG. 13-8(C) shows a scene after execution of the performance of the character object, so the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-8(D) is a scene that develops into super reach (specifically, the scene between Ta8 and Ta9 in FIG. 13-3(A), the scene of Ta9, or the scene slightly after Ta9). In FIG. 13-8(D), an SP development notification image 026SHSP for notifying the type of super reach to be developed (super reach A in the example of FIG. 13-8(D)) and reliability is displayed.

It should be noted that when the meter value reaches MAX, the development destination (super reach A, super reach B) and the reliability of the development destination may be suggested or notified. In the example shown in FIGS. 13-8 (C) and (D), the aspect of the star image 026SHMTMAXEF in FIG. 13-8 (C) (the number of stars is 3 in the example of FIG. 13-8 (C)) suggests the reliability of the development destination Super Reach A (the number of stars is 3 in the example of FIG. 13-8 (D)).

(Regarding the performance of the character in the second KT state of the game machine according to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH can execute the performance of the character (the performance of moving the movable body 026SH32) even when it is in the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH). FIG. 13-3(B), as described above, is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the character effect in the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH).

In FIG. 13-3(B), Tb0 to Tb1 are periods during variable display. Tb1-Tb2 is a period during stop display (a small winning symbol corresponding to the small winning is stopped and displayed). Tb3-Tb8 is the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 opened corresponding to the small winning (opening period according to the small winning game state). Tb4 is the timing of the small winning prize (the timing at which the game ball passes (enters) the special winning port of the special variable winning ball device 17). Tb5-Tb6 is the execution period of the character production. Tb5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tb6 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tb7 is the timing for updating the total number of prize balls.

FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation related to the characteristic portion 026SH. Specifically, FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the role product effect in the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH) and an example of the effect operation in the case of the big win game state. 13-9, the display on the screen of the image display device 5 transitions in the order of FIG. 13-9(A)→FIG. 13-9(B)→FIG. 13-9(C)→FIG. 13-9(D)→FIG. 13-9(E)→FIG. 13-9(F)→FIG. 13-9(G)→FIG. 13-9(H).

FIG. 13-9(A) is a scene (for example, a scene between Tb1 and Tb2 in FIG. 13-3(B)) in which a small winning symbol (for example, "135") is stopped. In FIG. 13-9 (A), a mode display 026SHMD including characters of "small hit rush mode" is displayed on the upper left, a right hitting notification image 026SHMG including characters of "right hitting" and a total number of winning balls display 026SH130 for notifying the total number of winning balls are displayed on the upper right, and a second small pattern 026SH102 corresponding to the decorative pattern is displayed on the lower right. Note that FIG. 13-9(A) shows the scene before execution of the performance of the character object, so the movable body 026SH32 is in the first state (initial state).

FIG. 13-9(B) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Tb5 and Tb6 in FIG. 13-3(B)) in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect and is in the second state (inclined state). In FIG. 13-9(B), a small-hit prize (two game balls win in FIG. 13-9(B)) or a small-hit prize notification image 026SHKN for informing the number of balls obtained by the small-hit prize is displayed. When the relationship between the small winning prize, the small winning prize notification image 026SHKN, and the character effect is arranged, it may be interpreted that the small winning prize notifying image 026SHKN is displayed as the effect corresponding to the small winning prize, and the character effect is executed. Further, it may be interpreted that a character effect is executed as the effect corresponding to the small prize winning, and the winning notification image 026SHKN is displayed in correspondence with the execution of the character effect (for example, as an effect of the character effect). In addition, when displaying in response to execution of the character effect, the name of the winning notification image 026SHKN may be a corresponding name (for example, star image 026SHMTMAXEF2, etc.).

FIG. 13-9 (C) is a scene (for example, the scene of Tb7 in FIG. 13-3 (B)) in which the small hit award notification image 026SHKN is deleted and the total prize ball number display 026SH130 is updated (the number of winning balls notified by the small hit award notification image 026SHKN is added). In FIG. 13-9(C), the total number of prize balls update effect by the total number of prize balls update image 026SHKSEF is executed. The total prize number update image 026SHKSEF is a part of the total prize number update image 026SHKSEF acting on the total prize number display 026SH130, but the total prize number update image 026SHKSEF can also be regarded as the effect of the character production.

FIG. 13-9(D) shows a variable display scene corresponding to the next hold (for example, the scene immediately after Tb8 in FIG. 13-3(B)). FIG. 13-9(E) shows a scene in which a jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is stopped. FIG. 13-9(F) is a scene showing the total number of prize balls display 026SH130D that informs in a relatively large manner the total number of prize balls at the present time and the number of balls obtained by winning small prizes out of the total number of prize balls at the end of the second KT state. FIG. 13-9(G) shows a scene in which a fanfare effect is being performed. FIG. 13-9(H) shows a scene in the first round.

In FIG. 13-9 (G), the current number of prize balls display 026SH140 for notifying the number of prize balls for this time and 026SHOAZ for notifying the jackpot pattern are displayed on the upper left, the right hitting notification image 026SHMG including the characters "Right hit" and the total number of prize balls display 026SH130 for notifying the total number of prize balls are displayed on the upper right, and the number of the current round is indicated on the lower right. A round number display 026SH106 is displayed.

(Regarding the background effect of the game machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH can execute a background effect that changes the background image. In addition, the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH can execute a character effect (effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) as well as the background effect.

13-10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIG. 13-10(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution timings of background effects and character effects. FIG. 13-10(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the active display effect and the character object effect by the active display. Note that FIG. 13-10(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc0 to Tc10 are periods during variable display. Tc10 to Tc11 is a period during stop display. Tc0 to Tc1 are periods before reach. Tc1 to Tc2 are normal reach periods. Tc2 to Tc10 are periods of super reach.

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc3 to Tc10 are execution periods of the background effect. Among Tc3 to Tc10, Tc3 to Tc6 are scenes in which the background image is in a first special mode (eg, yellow) different from the normal mode (eg, blue). Tc6 to Tc9 are scenes in which the background image is in a second special mode (for example, green) different from the normal mode. Tc9 to Tc10 are scenes in which the background image is in a third special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words, Tc3 is the timing at which the background effect is started and the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). Tc6 is the timing at which the background image changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green) in the background effect. Tc9 is the timing at which the background image changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red) in the background effect.

There are a plurality of types of background effect execution modes (background effect patterns) (see FIG. 13-11(A)).

In FIG. 13-10(A), Tc4 to Tc5 are execution periods of the character production. Tc4 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc5 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tc7 to Tc8 are the execution period of the character production. Tc7 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tc8 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

13-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the background effects and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-11(A) shows the contents of the background effect pattern (the mode of change of the background image, etc.). FIG. 13-11(B) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the background effect. FIG. 13-11(C) is an example of the determination ratio of the background effect pattern. FIG. 13-11(D) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character effect when the background image is the second special mode (green). FIG. 13-11(E) is an example of the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character object effect when the background image is the third special mode (red).

As shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the background effect pattern "HEP1" is a background effect pattern in which the number of times the background image changes is one and the background image reaches the first special mode (yellow) (that is, does not change to "green" or "red"). That is, in the background effect by the background effect pattern "HEP1", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow). The background effect pattern “HEP2” is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes twice and the background image reaches the second special mode (green) (reaches “green”). That is, in the background rendering by the scenery rendering pattern "HEP2", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green). The background effect pattern “HEP3” is a background effect pattern in which the background image changes three times and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches “red”). That is, in the background rendering by the scenery rendering pattern "HEP3", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the second special mode (green), and further changes from the second special mode (green) to the third special mode (red). The background effect pattern “HEP4” is a background effect pattern in which the number of times the background image changes is two and the background image reaches the third special mode (red) (reaches “red”). Specifically, in the background rendering by the scenery rendering pattern "HEP4", the background image changes from the normal mode (blue) to the first special mode (yellow), and further changes from the first special mode (yellow) to the third special mode (red) without going through the second special mode (green).

As shown in FIG. 13-11(B), in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH, execution/non-execution of the background effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-5(B), when the super reach is lost (the first variation patterns #104 and #105 in FIG. 13-4), the execution yes determination ratio is 25%. In the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation patterns #108, #109 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 50%. On the other hand, if it becomes a non-reach loss (first variation pattern #101, #102 in FIG. 13-4), if normal reach is lost (first variation pattern #103 in FIG. 13-4), or if it becomes a small hit (variation pattern #106 in FIG. 13-4), or if it becomes a normal reach big hit (first variation pattern #107 in FIG. 13-4), the determination ratio of execution is 0%. That is, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the background effect is not executed when the game does not develop into super ready-to-win.

In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, the background effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-11(C). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11 (C), when the super reach is lost (first variation patterns #104 and #105 in FIG. 13-4), the background effect pattern (“HEP1”) in which the background image stops at the “first special mode (yellow)” is determined at a determination rate of 70%, and the background effect pattern (“HEP2”) in which the background image stops at the “second special mode (green)” is determined at a determination rate of 20%, and the background image is determined at a determination rate of “third. The background effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) reaching “special aspect (red)” is determined at a determination rate of 10% (8%+2%). In addition, in the case of a super reach jackpot (first variation patterns #108 and #109 in FIG. 13-4), the background effect pattern ("HEP1") in which the background image ends in the "first special mode (yellow)" is determined at a 10% determination rate, the background effect pattern ("HEP2") in which the background image ends in the "second special mode (green)" is determined at a determination rate of 20%, and the background image reaches the "3rd special mode (red)" background effect pattern ( "HEP3" or "HEP4") is determined at a determination rate of 70% (50% + 20%).

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH, when the background image is in the "second special mode (green)", there is a case where the character effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) is executed. In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, whether or not to execute the character effect when the background image becomes the "second special mode (green)" is determined based on the background effect pattern as shown in FIG. 13-11(D). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(D), when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the decision ratio of execution is 40%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the decision ratio of execution is 60%.

In addition, in the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH, even when the background image is in the "third special mode (red)", there are cases where the character effect (the effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) is executed. In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, it is determined whether or not to execute the character effect when the background image becomes the "third special mode (red)" based on the background effect pattern as shown in FIG. 13-11(E). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-11(E), when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

That is, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)"→"first special mode (yellow)"→"second special mode (green)", but when the background image changes from "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode (green)", the performance is performed at a rate of 40% (see FIG. 13-11(D)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP3", as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)"→"first special mode (yellow)"→"second special mode (green)"→"third special mode (red)". When changing from "second special mode (green)" to "third special mode (red)", the character effect is performed at a rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-11 (E)). When the background effect pattern is "HEP4", as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), the background image changes from "normal mode (blue)"→"first special mode (yellow)"→"third special mode (red)", but when the background image changes from "first special mode (yellow)" to "third special mode (red)", the character effect is executed at a rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-11(E)).

(Regarding the active display effect of the game machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH can execute active display effect by active display. In addition, the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 026SH can execute not only the active display effect but also the character effect (effect of moving the movable body 026SH32).

In FIG. 13-10B, Td0 to Td9 are periods during variable display. Td9 to Td10 is a period during stop display. Td0-Td1 is the period before reach. Td1 to Td5 are normal reach periods. Td5 to Td9 are periods of super reach.

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td0 to Td10 are periods during which the active display effect is executed (that is, periods during which the active display is displayed corresponding to the variation). Among Td0 to Td10, Td0 to Td4 are scenes in which the active display is in a normal mode (for example, gray). Td4 to Td8 are scenes in which the active display is in a first special mode (for example, green) different from the normal mode. Td8 to Td9 are scenes in which the active display is in a second special mode (for example, red) different from the normal mode. In other words, Td4 is the timing at which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) in the active display effect. Td8 is the timing at which the active display changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) in the active display effect.

Although there are a plurality of types of active display effect execution modes (active display effect patterns) (see FIG. 13-12(A)), FIG. 13-10(B) shows an example of an active display effect by one execution mode (specifically, active display effect pattern "AEP3").

In FIG. 13-10(B), Td2 to Td3 are execution periods of the character production. Td2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td3 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Td6 to Td7 are the execution period of the character production. Td6 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Td7 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position.

13-12 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the active display effect and the like. Specifically, FIG. 13-12(A) shows the contents of the active display rendering pattern (whether or not the active display changes, how the active display changes, etc.). FIG. 13-12(B) is an example of the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern. FIG. 13-12(C) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character effect during the first operation period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10(B)). FIG. 13-12(D) is an example of a determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the character effect during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10(B)).

As shown in FIG. 13-12(A), the active display effect pattern "AEP1" is an active display effect pattern in which the number of times the active display changes is zero. In other words, the active display pattern remains in the normal mode (gray) and does not change at either the first change timing (Td4 in FIG. 13-10(B)) or the second change timing (Td8 in FIG. 13-10(B)). The active display performance pattern 'AEP2' is a pattern of active display performance in which the active display changes once and the active display reaches the first special mode (green) (reaches up to 'green') (that is, does not become 'red'). Specifically, it is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and remains in the first special mode (green) at the second change timing. The active display effect pattern "AEP3" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes twice and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, it is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the first special mode (green) at the first change timing, and changes from the first special mode (green) to the second special mode (red) at the second change timing. The active display effect pattern "AEP4" is an active display effect pattern in which the active display changes once and the active display reaches the second special mode (red) (reaches "red"). Specifically, it is an active display effect pattern in which the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at the first change timing, and changes from the normal mode (gray) to the second special mode (red) without going through the first special mode (green) at the second change timing.

As shown in FIG. 13-12(B), in the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH, the active display effect is determined based on the variation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(B), the active display effect pattern (“AEP1”) is determined at a determination rate of 100% in the case of non-reach loss (first variation patterns #101 and #102 in FIG. 13-4). That is, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the active display remains in the normal mode (gray) in the case of non-reach.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 13-12 (B), when non-reach is lost (first variation pattern # 101, # 102 in FIG. 13-4), when normal reach is lost (first variation pattern # 103 in FIG. 13-4), when it becomes a small hit (variation pattern # 106 in FIG. 13-4), or when it becomes a normal reach big hit (first variation pattern # 107 in FIG. 13-4), active display The active display effect pattern (“HEP3” or “HEP4”) that reaches the “second special mode (red)” is not determined. In other words, in the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the active display does not change to the "second special mode (red)" when the reach does not develop into the super reach.

In the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH, there are cases where a character effect (effect to move the movable body 026SH32) is executed during the first action period (Td2 to Td3 in FIG. 13-10(B)). In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, whether or not to execute the character object presentation in the first operation period is determined based on the active display presentation pattern as shown in FIG. 13-12(C). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(C), when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 10%, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 30%, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 10%.

When the active display performance pattern is 'AEP1', the character performance is executed at an execution rate of 10% in the first operation period (Td2 to Td3), but the active display does not change in the normal mode (gray) at the subsequent first change timing (Td4). In other words, the 10% is also the execution ratio of fake role production (role object production in which the active display does not change afterward) in a fake development (development in which the active display does not change after the role production is performed) against the development in which the active display changes if the role production is performed. The same applies when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4".

In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 026SH, there are cases where the character performance is executed during the second operation period (Td6 to Td7 in FIG. 13-10(B)). In the gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH, whether or not to execute the character object presentation in the second operation period is determined based on the active display presentation pattern as shown in FIG. 13-12(D). According to the example shown in FIG. 13-12(D), when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the determination ratio of execution is 0%, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the determination ratio of execution is 10%, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the determination ratio of execution is 80%, and when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the determination ratio of execution is 100%.

Note that when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the character effect is executed at an execution rate of 10% in the second operation period (Td6 to Td7), but in the subsequent second change timing (Td8), the active display is in the first special mode (green remains unchanged. In other words, the 10% is also the execution rate of the false character effect (the character effect in which the active display does not change later).

FIG. 13-13A is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing (effect determination processing for determining background effect, character effect, etc.) executed in variable display start setting processing of S171 in effect control process shown in FIG. It should be noted that, at the start of the flow chart of FIG. 13-13(A), the gaming state shall be the normal state (mainly the non-KT state in which the first special symbol fluctuates).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the background effect based on the variation pattern (step 026SHS200). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution presence at a determination rate of 0% when the variation pattern is normal reach out (first variation pattern #103) (see FIG. 13-11 (B)). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution at a determination rate of 25% when the variation pattern is a super reach failure (first variation pattern #104, #105), and determines execution at a determination rate of 50% when the variation pattern is a super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109) (see FIG. 13-11 (B)).

Following step 026SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been determined that the background effect should be executed (step 026SHS201). If it is not determined that the background effect should be executed (step 026 SHS201; NO), the effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background effect should be executed (step 026SHS201; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the background effect pattern based on the variation pattern (step 026SHS202). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines "HEP1" at 70%, "HEP2" at 20%, "HEP3" at a rate of 8%, and "MEP4" at a rate of 2% (see FIG. 13-11 (C)). In addition, when the variation pattern is the super reach jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), the effect control CPU 120 determines "HEP1" at 10%, "HEP2" at 20%, "HEP3" at 50%, and "MEP4" at 20% (see FIG. 13-11(C)).

Following step 026SHS202, the effect control CPU 120 sets the background effect pattern determined in step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS203).

Following step 026SHS203, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character object effect based on the background effect pattern (step 026SHS205). Specifically, when the background effect pattern is "HEP2", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character object effect is executed when the background image is the "second special mode (green)" at a determination rate of 40% (see FIG. 13-11(D)). In addition, when the background effect pattern is "HEP3", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the role object effect when the background image is the "second special mode (green)" is executed at a determination rate of 60% (see FIG. 13-11(D)), and when the background image is the "third special mode (red)", it is determined at a determination rate of 80%. In addition, when the background effect pattern is "HEP4", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the character object effect is executed when the background image is the "third special mode (red)" at a determination rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-11 (E)).

Following step 026SHS205, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the character effect (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not the character effect is to be executed, information for controlling the execution of the character effect, etc.) (step 026SHS207), and ends the effect determination process.

FIG. 13-13B is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing (effect determination processing for determining active display effect, character effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. It should be noted that, at the start of the flow chart of FIG. 13-13(B), it is assumed that the gaming state is the normal state (mainly the non-KT state in which the first special symbols fluctuate).

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the active display effect pattern based on the variation pattern (step 026SHS302). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines "AEP1" at a rate of 10%, "AEP2" at 80%, "AEP3" at a rate of 8%, and "AEP4" at a rate of 2% (see FIG. 13-12 (B)). In addition, when the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win jackpot (first variation pattern #108, #109), the effect control CPU 120 determines "AEP1" at 10%, "AEP2" at 30%, "AEP3" at 30%, and "AEP4" at 30% (see FIG. 13-12 (B)).

Following step 026SHS202, the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display effect pattern determined in step 026SHS202 (step 026SHS303).

Following step 026SHS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character object effect based on the active display effect pattern (step 026SHS305). Specifically, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP1", the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the character effect in the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), and determines execution of the character effect in the second operation period at a determination rate of 0% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP2", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the role object effect is executed in the first operation period at a determination rate of 30% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), and determines whether or not the role object effect is performed during the second operation period at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP3", the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect is executed in the first operation period at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), and determines whether or not the character effect is performed during the second operation period at a determination rate of 80% (see FIG. 13-12(D)). Further, when the active display effect pattern is "AEP4", the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the character object effect in the first operation period at a determination rate of 10% (see FIG. 13-12(C)), and determines execution of the character effect in the second operation period at a determination rate of 100% (see FIG. 13-12(D)).

Following step 026SHS305, the effect control CPU 120 sets whether or not to execute the character effect (specifically, a flag indicating whether or not the character effect is to be executed, information for controlling the execution of the character effect, etc.) (step 026SHS307), and ends the effect determination process.

FIGS. 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the characteristic portion 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIGS. 13-14 ((A1) → (B1) → (C1) transition) shows an example of the background effect (background effect pattern is “HEP3”) and character object effect in the non-KT state (normal state). 13-14 (the transition of (A2) → (B2) → (C2) → (D2)) is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of active display effect (active display effect pattern is "AEP3") and role object effect in non-KT state (normal state).

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A1) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Tc3 and Tc4 in FIG. 13-10 (A)) in which the background image is the "first special mode (yellow)" in the background effect. In addition, in FIG. 13-14 (A1), reference numeral 026SHHK-Y indicates the background image of the first special mode (yellow). In addition, it is also the scene where the battle starts as a super reach production.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B1) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Tc4 and Tc5 in FIG. 13-10 (A)) in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect and is in the second state (inclined state). In addition, it is also a scene where a battle is being performed as a production of super reach.

On the left side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C1) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Tc6 and Tc7 in FIG. 13-10 (A)) in which the background image changes from "first special mode (yellow)" to "second special mode (green)" in the background effect. 13-14(C1), reference numeral 026SHHK-G denotes a background image of the second special mode (green). It is also a scene where a battle (second time) is started as an effect of Super Reach.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (A2) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Td1 and Td2 in FIG. 13-10 (B)) in which the active display 026SH110 is displayed in the "normal mode (gray)" in the active display effect. In FIG. 13-14 (A2), the white circle of the active indication 026SH110 indicates the active indication 026SH110 in the normal mode (gray). In addition, in the example of FIG. 13-14 (A2), the display mode of the active display 026SH110 is the same as the pending display (symbol A in the figure) indicating the first pending storage.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (B2) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Td2 and Td3 in FIG. 13-10 (B)) in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect and is in the second state (inclined state).

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (C2) is a scene (specifically, the scene immediately before Td4 in FIG. 13-10 (B)) in which the action effect (effect by the character image 026SHSY) is performed for the active display 026SH110.

On the right side of FIG. 13-14, FIG. 13-14 (D2) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Td4 and Td5 in FIG. 13-10 (B)) in which the active display changes from the normal mode (gray) to the "first special mode (green)" in the active display effect. In FIG. 13-14(D2), the shaded circle of the active display 026SH110 indicates the active display 026SH110 in the first special mode (green).

(Regarding the performance of the character during the interval period of the game machine related to the characteristic part 026SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH can execute a role performance (a performance to move the movable body 026SH32) during the interval period.

13-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 13-15(A) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing of the performance of the role product during the interval period of the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-15(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing of the performance of the character before a big hit (definite hit). Incidentally, FIGS. 13-15(B) will be described later.

In FIG. 13-15 (A), Te1 to Te5 are interval periods of the jackpot game state. Of Te1 to Te5, Te2 to Te3 are execution periods of the performance of the character object. Te2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Te3 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Te4 is the timing of updating the round number display 026SH106 (updating the round number display 026SH106 to the number corresponding to the round game to be performed after the end of the interval period).

(Regarding the performance of the character when the game machine according to the characteristic part 026SH becomes a big hit)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 026SH can execute a performance (effect of moving the movable body 026SH32) when the "2R probability variable jackpot (crash hit)" occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when the variable pattern is the first special symbol, the 2R probability variable big hit does not occur, but in the following description related to the gaming machine according to the characteristic part 026SH, the variable symbol is the first special symbol.

In FIG. 13-15(B), Tf0 to Tf3 are periods during variable display. Tf3 to Tf4 is a period during stop display (for example, a special symbol corresponding to a sudden hit is stopped and displayed). Tf1 to Tf2 are execution periods of the character production. Tf1 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 first starts moving from the initial position. Tf2 is the timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position. Tf5 is the timing when the special variable winning ball device 7 starts to open.

FIGS. 13-16 are diagrams showing examples of rendering operations related to the characteristic portion 026SH. Specifically, the left side of FIGS. 13-16 (the transition of (A3)→(B3)→(C3)→(D3)) is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the role performance in the jackpot game state. Also, the right side of FIGS. 13-16 (the transition of (A4)→(B4)→(C4)→(D4)) is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the character performance in the non-KT state (normal state).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A3) is a scene in which the fifth round is being played as a round game (for example, if the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) indicates the interval period between the fifth round and the sixth round, the scene slightly before Te1 in FIG. 13-15 (A)). In FIG. 13-16 (A3), the current number of prize balls display 026SH140 for notifying the number of prize balls for this time and 026SHOAZ for notifying the big hit pattern are displayed on the upper left, the right hitting notification image 026SHMG including the characters "Right hit" and the total number of prize balls display 026SH130 for notifying the total number of prize balls are displayed on the upper right, and the number of the current round is displayed on the lower right. A round number display 026SH106 is displayed.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (B3) is a scene in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect during the interval period and is in the second state (inclined state) (for example, if the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) indicates the interval period between the fifth round and the sixth round, the scene between Te2 and Te3 in FIG. 13-15 (A)). In FIG. 13-16 (B3), the number-of-rounds display update effect is executed by the star image 026SH32EF02. Note that the star image 026SH32EF02 is part of the round number display update effect acting on the round number display 026SH106, but the star image 026SH32EF02 can also be regarded as the effect of the character object effect.

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C3) is a scene after the round number display 026SH106 is updated in the interval period (for example, if the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) indicates the interval period between the 5th and 6th rounds, the scene between Te4 and Te5 in FIG. 13-15 (A)).

On the left side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D3) is a scene in which the 6th round is being played as a round game (for example, if the interval period in FIG. 13-15 (A) indicates the interval period between the 5th and 6th rounds, the scene slightly after Te5 in FIG. 13-15 (A)).

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (A4) is a scene (specifically, a scene between Tf0 and Tf1 in FIG. 13-15 (B)) in which a variable display that becomes a hit (2 round probability variable jackpot) is performed. FIG. 13-16 (B4) is a scene (specifically, a scene slightly before Tf1 in FIG. 13-15 (B)) in which a special symbol (for example, "123") is temporarily stopped.

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (C4) is a scene (for example, a scene between Tf1 and Tf2 in FIG. 13-15 (B)) in which the movable body 026SH32 operates as a character effect and is in the second state (inclined state). In FIG. 13-16 (C4), an oval image 026SH32EF03 is displayed as the effect of the character production.

On the right side of FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-16 (D4) is a screen on which a mode transition image 026SHMDIK is displayed that notifies (transitions) to the battle mode (high probability mode) after the big hit (game state of 2 rounds) is completed based on the fact that it has become a hit (2 round probability variable jackpot). Although not shown, between FIG. 13-16 (C4) and FIG. 13-16 (D4), the temporary stop display of the special symbol (for example, "123") is released, and the fact that the stop of the special symbol is confirmed (stop display) is notified.

(Regarding Modified Example of Game Machine Related to Characteristic Part 026SH)
Next, modified examples in FIGS. 13-1 to 13-16 will be described.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the set value "1" or "2", the set value "3" or "4", and the set value "5" or "6" differ in the determination ratio of whether or not the meter effect is executed. For example, the ratio of determining whether or not to execute the meter effect may be different for each of the setting value "1", the setting value "2", the setting value "3", the setting value "4", the setting value "5", and the setting value "6", or the setting value "1", "3" or "5" and the setting value "1", "3" or "5". The determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the meter effect may be changed between "2", "4" and "6". The same applies to the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the meter effect is varied according to the setting value, but the setting value may be common, like the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the background effect and the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the active display effect.

(Modification 3 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the character object effect when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect is different for each meter effect pattern (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but it may be common regardless of the meter effect pattern.

(Modification 4 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the set value is common to the execution ratio of the character object effect when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect, but it may be changed according to the set value. For example, based on the meter performance pattern and the set value, the execution ratio of the role performance when the meter value is ``4 (MAX)'' in the meter performance may be varied, or simply based on the set value, the execution ratio of the role performance when the meter value is ``4 (MAX)'' in the meter performance may be varied.

(Modification 5 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, even when the meter value is "4 (MAX)", there are cases where the character effect is not performed (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but when the meter value is "4 (MAX)" in the meter effect, the character effect may always be performed.

(Modification 6 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the character effect can be executed in the meter effect when the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)" (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but instead of or in addition to the case where the meter value becomes "4 (MAX)", the character effect may be executed when the meter value becomes "2" or "3".

(Modification 7 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the meter value always changes (updates) in the meter effect when the character effect is performed (Fig. 13-8 (D)), but in the same way that the active display may not change in the active display effect even when the character effect is performed (Figs. 13-12 (C) and 13-12 (D)), the meter value may not change in the meter effect even when the character effect is performed.

(Modification 8 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the setting value is common to the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the background effect (Fig. 13-11(B)), but similar to the determination ratio of execution/non-execution of the meter effect (Fig. 13-5(B)), it may be varied according to the setting value. The same applies to the determination ratio of the background effect pattern.

(Modification 9 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the performance of the character object when the background image is in the second special mode (green) is common to the set values (Fig. 13-11 (D)), but may be varied according to the set values. Similarly, the execution ratio of the character object presentation when the background image is in the third special mode (red) has the same set value (FIG. 13-11(E)), but may be varied according to the set value. For example, the execution ratio of the character effect may be varied based on the background effect pattern and the set value, or simply based on the set value.

(Modification 10 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the character effect can be executed in the background effect when the background image is in the second special mode (green) and when the background image is in the third special mode (red) (FIGS. 13-11 (D) and 13-11 (E)), but instead of or in addition to the above, the character effect may be performed when the background image is in the first special mode (yellow).

(Modification 11 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, even if the background image is the second special mode (green) in the background effect, there are cases where the character effect is not performed (FIG. 13-11 (D)), but the character effect may be always performed when the background image is the second special mode (green) in the background effect. Also, in the above description, even if the background image in the background effect is the third special mode (red), there are cases where the character effect is not performed (FIG. 13-11 (E)), but the character effect may always be performed when the background image is the third special mode (red) in the background effect.

(Modification 12 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, when the character effect is performed, the background image always changes in the background effect (FIGS. 13-11 (D) and 13-11 (E)), but in the same way that the active display may not change in the active display effect even when the character effect is performed (FIGS. 13-12 (C) and 13-12 (D)), the background image may not change in the background effect even when the character effect is performed.

(Modification 13 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the determination ratio of the active display effect pattern is common to the set value (Fig. 13-12 (B)), but it may be varied according to the set value, similar to the determination ratio of the meter effect pattern (Fig. 13-6 (A), Fig. 13-6 (B), Fig. 13-6 (C)).

(Modification 14 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the execution ratio of the character object presentation in the first operation period is common to the set value (FIGS. 13-12(C)), but may be varied according to the set value. Similarly, the execution ratio of the character object presentation in the second operation period is common to the set value (FIG. 13-12(D)), but may be varied according to the set value. For example, the execution ratio of the character effect may be varied based on the active display effect pattern and the set value, or simply based on the set value.

(Modification 15 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above, an example in which the character effect is executed and the active display changes (FIGS. 13-10(B), 13-12, and 13-13(B)) has been described, but instead of or in addition to the character effect being executed and the active display changing, the character effect is executed and the pending display is changed.

(Modification 16 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the meter effect is described as follows: start of character effect (timing when the movable body 026SH32 first moves from the initial position) → end of the effect (timing when the movable body 026SH32 finally stops at the initial position) → update (change) of the meter value (Fig. 13-3 (A)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character presentation → update of meter value (when the meter value becomes one of “2”, “3” and “4”) → end of character presentation. Alternatively, the meter value may be updated (for example, when the meter value becomes "4") -> start of character production -> end of character production.

(Modification 17 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the role production and the production during the small hit RUSH, it was explained that the start of the role production → the end of the role production → the update of the total number of prize balls due to the small win during the small prize RUSH (Fig. 13-3 (B)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character production→renewal of the total number of prize balls by winning a small prize during the small winning RUSH→end of the character production. Also, the total number of prize balls may be updated by winning a small prize during the small prize RUSH (for example, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number) → start of character production → end of character production.

(Modification 18 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the background effect is described as follows: start of character effect → end of character effect → update (change) of background image (Fig. 13-10 (A)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character presentation → update of background image (when the background image changes to one of the first special mode (yellow), second special mode (green), or third special mode (red)) → end of role performance. Alternatively, the background image may be updated (for example, when the background image becomes the third special mode (red))→starting the character effect→ending the character effect.

(Modification 19 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the active display effect, the explanation is as follows: start of character effect → end of character effect → update (change) of active display (Fig. 13-10 (B)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character production→update of active display (for example, when the active display becomes the second special mode (red))→end of character production. Alternatively, the active display may be updated (for example, when the active display becomes the second special mode (red))→starting the character presentation→ending the character presentation.

(Modification 20 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the character effect and the effect during the interval period, it was explained that the character effect starts → the character effect ends → the number of rounds is updated during the interval period (Fig. 13-15 (A)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character presentation→renewal of the number of rounds during the interval period (for example, when a jackpot of 10 rounds is actually a jackpot but apparently a jackpot of 6 rounds has been announced, and the game goes to the 7th round, that is, when the round is promoted)→end of the character presentation. Alternatively, the number of rounds during the interval period may be updated, the performance of the character should be started, and the performance of the character should be finished.

(Modification 21 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, regarding the relationship (execution timing) between the performance of the character and the sudden hit, it is explained that the performance of the character is started → the performance of the character is finished → the special symbol is temporarily stopped (Fig. 13-15 (B)), but the execution timing is not limited to this. For example, the process may be: start of character production→temporary stop of special symbol→end of character production. In addition, special pattern temporary stop→start of character production→end of character production may be performed.

(Modification 22 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the movable body 026SH32 moves between the first state (initial state) and the second state (inclined state) as the motion of the movable body 026SH32 in the role production. An example of the performance of playing a role is a performance that the movable body 026SH32 slightly moves from the first state to the direction of the second state and then returns to the first state, a performance that the movable body 026SH32 starts to vibrate in the first state and pretends to move in the direction of the second state, and ends the vibration without actually moving in the direction of the second state. It should be noted that the role-playing performance may be one aspect of the role-playing performance rather than a performance different from the role-playing performance.

(Modification 23 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above description, the accessory in the accessory presentation was the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIG. 13-1, but the accessory in the accessory presentation is not limited to the movable body 026SH32. Instead of or in addition to the movable body 026SH32, one or more other role objects may be used to perform the role object presentation.

(Modification 24 of characteristic portion 026SH)
For example, FIG. 13-8 shows an example in which two targets (meter value of meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, level display 026SHLV) are updated by execution of the role production, and FIG.

(Modification 25 of characteristic portion 026SH)
FIG. 13-8 shows an example in which all of the plurality of targets (the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG and the level display 026SHLV) are updated by executing the character performance, but there are cases where some of the plurality of targets are updated by executing the character performance. For example, the meter value in the meter effect may be 10 levels (“1” to “10”), the range of meter values “1” to “3” is LEVEL1, the range of meter values “4” to “6” is LEVEL2, the range of meter values “7” and “8” is LEVEL3, and the range of meter values “9” and “10” is LEVEL4. In this example, for example, when the character object presentation is executed when the meter value changes from "7" to "8", the meter value is updated from "7" to "8", but the level remains at "LEVEL3" and is not updated.

(Modification 26 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above, in the relationship between the character effect and the meter effect, an example is shown in which the value (specifically, the meter value) increases as an update corresponding to the execution of the character effect, but the value may decrease as an update corresponding to the character effect. For example, a countdown effect can be executed, and the remaining number may decrease in the countdown effect in response to the execution of the character object effect. For example, count "3" → count "2" → count "1" → start of character production → end of character production → count "0". Also, the physical strength of the enemy character may be reduced in a battle presentation (for example, a presentation in which the friendly character wins when the physical strength of the enemy character reaches "0", and a variable probability jackpot is announced, etc.). For example, the health value of the enemy character "100"→the health value of the enemy character "1"→the start of the character presentation→the end of the character presentation→the health value of the enemy character "0".

(Modification 27 of characteristic portion 026SH)
In the above, an example in which the effect (type of effect, mode of production) of the character production is different depending on the scene (situation) is explained (for example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8 (B), the total number of winning balls updated image 026SHKSEF in FIG. 13-9 (C), and the star image 026SH32EF02 in FIG. 13-16 (B3)), even if the effect of the character production is common regardless of the scene (situation). Good. For example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed instead of the total number of balls updated image 026SHKSEF. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) and the oval image 026SH32EF03 in FIG. 13-16(C4) have a common effect.

(Modification 28 of characteristic portion 026SH)
Instead of or in addition to the performance of the role using the role, the performance using the image (including the case where it is not displayed such as blackout), the sound, the light, the vibration, the light guide plate, the wind (blowing), etc. may be performed. That is, in the above description, an example in which character effects correspond to various updates (e.g., updates of meter values, levels, background images, active display, round number display, etc.) has been described.

(Application to other equipment)
In the above, an example of application to a pachinko game machine has been described, but the invention can also be applied to a pachislot machine. For example, a meter effect may be executed in one state (e.g., during a normal game), and a background effect may be executed in another state (e.g., a chance zone where expectations for ART and AT are higher than during a normal game). Alternatively, for example, during an additional game during ART, a role effect may be executed to update the number of remaining games, the number of remaining sets, and the like. Note that, instead of or in addition to the performance of the character by the movable body, the performance by one or more of images, sound, light, vibration, light guide plate, wind (blowing), etc., or the performance by the reel (so-called reel lock performance) may be executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 026SH)
(Means F1)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of performing a game, comprising an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing effects, and the effect execution means changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026 SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.) in a first situation (for example, during reach fluctuation). -14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.), the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to a specific mode (for example, the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.). Second content (e.g., total number of winning balls (or increase in total number of winning balls)) different from the first content and advantageous to the player by changing the display mode of the specific display (e.g., total number of winning balls display 026SH130, round number display 026SH106, etc.) different from the predetermined display (e.g., adding the number of winning balls due to the small winning, adding 1 to the number of rounds, etc.) 13-9, etc., and the round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. A gaming machine characterized by executing a specific effect (for example, a role object effect in which a movable body 026SH32 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B)) having a common effect mode.

According to the above-described gaming machine, in different situations, a specific effect having at least a part of the effect mode in common is executed, and content advantageous to the player is notified, so that interest can be improved.

(Means F2)
The gaming machine of the means F1 is provided with a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103)) capable of controlling a game state into an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, etc.) advantageous to the player, a special state (for example, a small win game state, etc.) different from the above-mentioned advantageous state, and a special state (for example, a second KT state, etc.) that is easily controlled to the special state. The game medium passes through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to a state (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH), and the effect execution means changes the display mode of the specific display (for example, total prize ball display 026SH130, etc.) in response to the game medium passing through a predetermined area in response to being controlled to the special state in the special state as the predetermined effect (for example, adds the number of prize balls resulting from the small win). 2 (for example, the total number of prize balls) may be notified.

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a special state that is easily controlled to the special state.

(Means F3)
In the gaming machine of means F1 or F2, the specific effect may be an effect of operating a movable object for effect (for example, movable object 026SH32, etc.).

According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to improve interest by using the movable body for presentation.

(Means F4)
In the game machine of the means F1 to F3, the performance execution means can execute an effect performance for enhancing the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and the effect performance executed in response to the execution of the specific performance in the first situation and the effect performance executed in response to the execution of the specific performance in the second situation may have a common performance mode. As described above, for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) may be displayed instead of the total number of balls updated image 026SHKSEF.

According to the gaming machine described above, since there is no confusion due to different presentation modes, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(Means F5)
In the game machine of the means F1 to F3, the performance execution means can execute an effect performance for enhancing the performance effect of the specific performance in response to the execution of the specific performance, and the effect performance executed in response to the execution of the specific performance in the first situation and the effect performance to be executed in response to the execution of the specific performance in the second situation may differ in at least part of the performance mode. For example, the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) and the total number of awarded balls update image 026SHKSEF in FIG. 13-9(C) are different in at least part of the effect mode.

According to the above game machine, since there are various presentation modes, it is possible to improve interest.

(Means F6)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) capable of performing a game, and includes an effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, and the effect execution means changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, the meter value of the meter gauge unit 026SHMTG, the background image, the active display, etc.). 3-14 (right side)), a special effect that informs the player of the first content (e.g., development to super reach) in response to the display mode of the predetermined display becoming a specific mode (e.g., meter value "4 (MAX)", background image changes to red, active display changes to red, etc.), and specific displays different from the predetermined displays (e.g., total number of winning balls display 026SH130, number of rounds display 026SH10). 6 etc.) is changed (for example, the number of prize balls due to the small winning prize is added, the number of rounds is increased by 1, etc.), and a second content that is advantageous to the player different from the first content (for example, a small winning prize during the small winning RUSH, an interval period of the big winning game state, etc.) is notified. -16, etc.), and when the change effect (for example, meter effect, etc.) is executed, and when the predetermined effect (for example, total prize ball number update effect, etc.) is executed, at least a part of the effect mode is common. A game machine characterized by being executed.

According to the above-described gaming machine, since the specific effect is executed and advantageous contents for the player are notified, the interest can be improved.

(Means F7)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, provided with effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a change effect in response to execution of a specific effect, and the change effect is a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display (for example, meter value of meter gauge unit 026 SHMTG, background image, active display, etc.) (for example, meter effect shown in FIG. 13-8 etc., background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), FIG. 13-14 (right side) )) and a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, the total number of awarded balls display 026SH130, the number of rounds display 026SH106, etc.). The effect executing means executes a special effect for informing a first content advantageous to the player (for example, development to super reach, etc.) in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to a specific mode (e.g., meter value "4 (MAX)", background image changes to red, active display changes to red, etc.) by executing the first change effect, and by executing the second change effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to make the game different from the first content. A gaming machine characterized in that it notifies a player of a second content (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.) that is advantageous to players.

According to the above-described gaming machine, since the specific effect is executed and advantageous contents for the player are notified, the interest can be improved.

As described above, the embodiment of the gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 026SH has been described with reference to the drawings and the like, but various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the invention. Moreover, not all of the parts described as the embodiments are essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and is provided with an effect execution means (e.g., effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing effects, and said effect execution means provides a predetermined display (e.g., meter value of meter gauge unit 026 SHMTG, background image) in a first situation (e.g., during reach fluctuation). 13-8, the background effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (left side), the active display effect shown in FIG. 13-14 (right side), etc.), and the display mode of the predetermined display becomes a specific mode (e.g., the meter value is "4 (MAX)", the background image changes to red, the active display changes to red, etc.). etc.), and in a second situation different from the first situation (for example, a small win during a small win RUSH, an interval period of a big win gaming state, etc.), the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display (for example, the total prize ball number display 026SH130, the round number display 026SH106, etc.) It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, a total prize ball number update effect by the total prize ball number update image 026SHKSEF shown in FIG. 13-9, etc., a round number display update effect by 026SH32EF02 shown in FIG. 13-16, etc.) that notifies a second content that is advantageous to the player (for example, the total number of prize balls (or an increase in the total number of prize balls), progress to the next round, etc.). etc.) is executed and when the predetermined effect (for example, the total number of winning balls update effect, etc.) is executed, a specific effect in which at least a part of the effect mode is common (for example, a character effect that moves the movable body 026SH32 shown in FIGS. 13-8(B) and 13-9(B), etc.) is executed, and the effect execution means is capable of executing an effect effect that enhances the effect of the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the specific effect in the first situation. and the effect effect executed in response to the execution of the specific effect in the second situation have the same effect mode (for example, in FIG. 13-9(C), the oval image 026SH32EF01 in FIG. 13-8(B) is displayed instead of the total number of winning balls update image 026SHKSEF). unit 35A, etc.), corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (e.g., active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.), promotional effect execution means capable of executing promotional effects for promoting the action of the player (e.g., effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of effect processing during variable display, etc.), and action effects capable of executing action effects based on the detection result of the detection means. Execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS053 of variable display effect processing) and variable display effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of variable display effect processing) capable of executing a predetermined variable display effect during execution of variable display. 7AKC1 to 87AKC4, etc.), and the promotion effect execution means can execute the promotion effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using display image 87AKF3, etc.) Using AKE3 "Super heat! ! (such as messages corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3)), the variable display effect is executed in the predetermined mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, see cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIGS. 18-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at different rates according to the effect mode of the variable display effect. is executed (see, for example, promotion effect determination example 87AK51 corresponding to the cut-in effect in FIGS. 18-13), and the advantageous state is controlled at different rates according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see, for example, promotion effect determination example 87AK51 according to the variable display result in FIGS. 18-13).

According to such a configuration, interest can be improved. Also, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest. Also, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In other words, by executing a specific effect having at least a part of the same effect mode when the changing effect is executed and when the predetermined effect is executed, the specific effect having the same effect mode in different situations is executed, and contents advantageous to the player are notified, thereby increasing interest, and by associating the display mode of the corresponding display, the effect mode of the variable display effect, and the effect mode of the promotion effect, the player's expectation until the player's operation such as button operation corresponds to the effect mode of the promotion effect. The display mode of the display and the effect mode of the effect during the variable display can appropriately enhance and improve the game interest. In the first situation, the effect mode of the change effect that changes the display mode of the predetermined display may be associated with the display mode of the corresponding display, the effect mode of the variable display effect, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By doing so, the expectation of the player up to the action of the player's button operation, etc., can be increased appropriately by the display mode of the correspondence display, the performance mode of the performance during variable display, and the performance mode of the change performance in addition to the performance mode of the promotion performance, and the game interest can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player and appropriately raising the player's expectation through production, a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and being controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for the player, has detecting means (for example, the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) capable of detecting the action of the player and capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display. Corresponding display means (e.g., active display area 87AKA1, first reserved display area 87AKB1, second reserved display area 87AKB2, etc.); promotional effect execution means capable of executing a promotional effect that promotes the action of the player (e.g. effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of variable display effect processing); effect control CPU 120 for executing step 3), and variable display effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined variable display effect during execution of variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS049 of variable display effect processing), and the corresponding display means has a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors according to display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, red display using display image 87AKC4). The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, etc.) (e.g., the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3). (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3), the effect during variable display is executed in the predetermined mode at a different rate according to the display mode of the corresponding display (see, for example, cut-in effect determination example 87AK41 in FIG. 18-12), and the promotion effect is performed in the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode during variable display (for example, FIG. 18-1). 3), and controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, variable display results in FIGS. 18-13). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Basic description as a premise of the characterizing part of the present embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1, which is the premise of the later-described characterizing portion, will be described with reference to the differences from FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above. Other than these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1, which is the premise of the feature part, is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8.

FIG. 14 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine, and the main difference from FIG. In addition, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at the position where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 includes an LED.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 9014 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 909. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The lamp control board 9014 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 909 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to that of FIG. 3 described above receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), starting information (information indicating the number of starting prize winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability variation, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, is output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 15 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment processing (step S90101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to a performance control board 12. - 特許庁The performance control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S9027 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening preprocessing includes a setting process for starting the execution of a round in a big win game state and opening a big prize winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". This process during the opening of the big prize includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period for executing an ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although illustration is omitted, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the rear surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state housed in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Although not shown, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting switch functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame. Incidentally, the setting value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the staff of the game arcade (setting value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by the staff of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed in the board case together with the main board 11 . The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 when the frame for the game machine is opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display portions of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value although the big win probability is constant. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIGS. 17-1(A) and 17-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. Of these, FIG. 17-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 17-2 (A) shows a configuration example of the second special figure display result determination table used when the variation special figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set as the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to the use of individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1237 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the display result are assigned to ``big hit'' in the range of 1020 to 1346, assigned to ``small hit'' in the range of 32767 to 33094, and assigned to ``losing'' in other numerical ranges. Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1237 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and the other numerical ranges to the ``loss''.

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to ``big win'' in the range of 1020 to 1253, assigned to ``minor win'' in the range of 32767 to 33094, and assigned to ``losing'' in other numerical ranges. Among cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, 1020 to 1383 of the hit determination values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1253 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''. Among cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1383 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1272 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1429 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1272 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1429 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1292 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1487 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1292 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''. Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1487 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to 1020 to 1317 as ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 as ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges as ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1556 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1317 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1556 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``losing''.

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33094 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned to ``big win'' in the range of 1020 to 1674, assigned to ``minor win'' in the range of 32767 to 33094, and assigned to ``losing'' in other numerical ranges. When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1346 to the ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to the ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to the ``loss''. Among cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result are assigned 1020 to 1674 to ``big win'', 32767 to 33421 to ``minor win'', and other numerical ranges to ``losing''.

In each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the big hit game state as "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) 1/220 if the set value is 5, 1/200 if the set value is 6), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher (for example, 1/200 if the set value is 1, 1/180 if the set value is 2, 1/160 if the set value is 3, 1/140 if the set value is 4, 1/120 if the set value is 5, set value 1/100 when is 6). In each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big winning game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big winning game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state) than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times. The multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the state is 1.625 times), and the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the short-time state at each set value.

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is 'small win' and controlled to the small win game state has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a 'small hit' and is controlled to the small winning game state is not limited to the same probability, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a 'small win' and is controlled to the small winning game state may be varied according to the set value. The probability of determining the special figure display result as a 'small win' according to the variable special figure and controlling it to a small winning game state is not limited to a different form, and the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' regardless of the variation special figure and controlling it to a small winning game state may be the same probability.

FIGS. 17-2 to 17-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 17-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 17-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 17-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 17-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 17-2, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) when the set value is 6. . This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, in the case of the set value 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, when the set value is 1, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot" among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, while when the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, like the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) when the set value is 6. . This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-4, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6. Thus, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the numerical values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination values for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. If the setting value is 6, in this case, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the assignment value is set in the large hit value, but the small hit judgment value is different from the range of the large hit judgment value in the case of set value 6 (1020 to 1346). The value (small hit reference value) is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 17-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big win is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to the "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. If the setting value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the assigned value is set in the scope of the jackpot, but the small hit judgment value is the standard for the small hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). The value (small hit reference value) is set in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the determination value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit determination value of 1020 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and set value, the determination value included within the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit determination value of 32767 is set as the numerical range of the small hit determination value, and the variable display result is determined. It's like

In each display result determination table, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest, and the larger the value of the setting value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state increases. ). A CPU 103 refers to a display result determination table corresponding to a set value set at that time, and determines a big win (big win A to big win C) with respect to a special pattern when the value of the random number MR1 matches any one of the win judgment values corresponding to the big win. Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 17-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means to decide whether or not to control to a small win game state, but it also means to decide whether to make the stop pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the form in which a total of six set values from 1 to 6 are provided, and the set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of big win, the easier the determination of a specific kind of big win, etc.).

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form in which it does not change, and the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the variable probability state is 65% (so-called variable loop type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game balls pass through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big win game. Based on this, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a variable probability state, and the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big win game is changed according to the variable special figure (so-called V probability variable type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the big win probability is 1/320 and the small win probability is 1/50, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device during high base (during time reduction control). It is good also as a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types mixed type) which controls to a jackpot game state based on passing the predetermined switch provided in 7. FIG. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided while the probability of a big win or a small win is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3, while the number of winning balls obtainable during the big win game is small. A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characterizing portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 17-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to disabled, stack pointer setting, built-in device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, RAM 102 may be executed after initial setting such as setting to be accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. If the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), the process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of step S2A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed and the process proceeds to step S8A, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), a set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is performed and the process proceeds to step S8A. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value changing process is a process performed by turning on a lock switch and a clear switch in a state where the game machine frame is opened when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off once. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, a process of updating and storing the temporary set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 according to the state of the lock switch, and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12.

The set value confirmation process is a process performed by turning ON the lock switch 207SG051 (clear switch is OFF) in a state where the game machine frame is opened when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned OFF once. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of starting the display of the set value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor, a process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1, ending the display etc. according to the state of the lock switch, and a process of transmitting a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12.

In the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator start lighting from the start of each process, and the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B and the right hand hitting lamp start blinking. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the process proceeds to step S10A without executing the RAM clear process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started by cold start or whether it was restored to the state before power failure (started by hot start) according to whether or not a RAM clear flag is set, performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, "00H" is stored in an address other than the top address (F000) where the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is stored, thereby clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (F003 and later of the addresses F000 to FXXX in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Further, the processing in the game control main processing may include, for example, the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, or the like. Furthermore, as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or the recovery from a power failure during setting change, a process of displaying "E." in each of the first, second, third, and fourth display units constituting the display monitor may be performed. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and outputs a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. Thereafter, the CPU 103 continues until power failure of the pachinko game machine 1 occurs (until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk, etc.). Error occurrence notification may be performed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the processing in the game control main processing, when it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A and then the open sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, since the operation of the lock switch is detected without detecting the opening of the game machine frame, an error designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. Thus, on the performance control board 12 side, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of the error, so that the staff of the game parlor or the like can recognize the occurrence of the error or the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game parlor to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value.

As described above, in the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 17-1, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the range from 1238 to the value corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It is necessary to determine whether As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

Since the numerical range of the big win determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is not necessary to execute the judgment of whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the big win determination value (whether or not to control to the big win game state) a plurality of times as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a short time state, or a variable probability state, the hit determination value of 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to be continuous numerical ranges. Whether it is within the numerical range to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability change state. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the first special figure is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table for the second special figure is 655, which is about double. ) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, it is necessary to determine whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variable special figure. Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 17-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small winning game state, it is necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variable special figure. Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 18-1 shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 87AKA1, a first reserved display area 87AKB1, and a second reserved display area 87AKB2. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 87AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 87AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are corresponding displays based on information regarding variable display, are possible. The pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The display area of the first pending display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that the first pending display is performed, for example, aligned to the right. The first reservation display area 87AKB1 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reservation storage number "4", and may be associated with the reservation numbers "1", "2", "3" and "4" in order from the right end. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole, the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first reserved display in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, display of a performance image showing a new first reserved display is added as a reserved display corresponding to the increased first reserved storage number at the right end display portion corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the first reserved display area 87AKB1. If there is another first reserved display in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, display of a performance image showing a new first reserved display is added as a reserved display corresponding to the increased number of first reserved memories at a display portion (a display portion corresponding to any of the reserved numbers ``2'' to ``4'') which is in a non-display state and which is located to the left of the display part where the other first reserved display is performed in the first reserved display area 87AKB1. When there is one or a plurality of first reserved displays in the first reserved display area 87AKB1, when a new first special game is started, the first reserved display is erased (digested) at the right end display portion corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the first reserved display area 87AKB1. At this time, if there are first reserved displays in display parts corresponding to other reserved numbers ``2'' to ``4'', those first reserved displays are moved (shifted) rightward in the direction of the erased display portion. Thus, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, a first pending display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is pending without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of first pending memories. In addition, in the first pending display area 87AKB1, by displaying a performance image to be a pending display image, the first pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be performed as a corresponding display related to the variable display.

The second pending display area 87AKB2 may be configured so that the second pending display is displayed left aligned, for example. The second reservation display area 87AKB2 is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reservation storage number "4", and may be associated with the reservation numbers "1", "2", "3" and "4" in order from the left end. The second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is increased based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole. At this time, if there is no other second reserved display in the second reserved display area 87AKB2, display of a performance image showing a new second reserved display is added as a reserved display corresponding to the increased second reserved storage number at the left end display portion corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the second reserved display area 87AKB2. If there is another second reserved display in the second reserved display area 87AKB2, display of a performance image showing a new second reserved display is added as a reserved display corresponding to the increased second reserved memory number at a display portion (a display portion corresponding to any one of the reserved numbers '2' to '4') which is in a non-display state on the right side of the display section where the other second reserved display is performed in the second reserved display area 87AKB2. When there is one or a plurality of second reserved displays in the second reserved display area 87AKB2, when a new second special game is started, the second reserved display is erased (digested) at the left end display portion corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the second reserved display area 87AKB2. At this time, if there are second reserved displays in display parts corresponding to other reserved numbers ``2'' to ``4'', those second reserved displays are moved (shifted) to the left in the direction of the erased display parts. Thus, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, a second pending display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution has been suspended without being started yet can be displayed according to the number of second pending memories. In addition, in the second pending display area 87AKB2, by displaying a performance image serving as a pending display image, the second pending display included in the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be performed as a corresponding display related to the variable display.

In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the first special game, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 87AKB1 is started. Also, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special game, active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying an effect image which is an active display image, active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as a corresponding display regarding the variable display. The first pending display, the second pending display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display may be displayed larger than the first pending display and the second pending display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first reserved display area 87AKB1, and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. For example, the first reserved display area 87AKB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKB2 may be replaced without changing the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1.

In the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK, as an example of the notice effect, the notice effect of "active display change" is executed. The advance notice performance of ``active display change'' changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is started, and gives a notice that the display result of the variable display whose execution is started becomes 'big hit' at a rate corresponding to the display mode after the change and is controlled to a big win game state. In the advance notice performance of ``active display change'', the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a specific color (for example, any one of blue, green, red, etc.) different from a predetermined color (for example, white) normally. It suffices if it is possible to suggest that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state at a predetermined rate by a change in the display mode that the player can recognize, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using effect images showing display patterns, messages, characters, etc., any display mode may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the notice effect of "active display change" as the change effect is executed. The suggestive effect suggests that the display mode of the active display will change. After the suggestive effect is executed, the change effect may be executed, or the change effect may not be executed. Thus, after the suggestive effect is executed, there are cases where the display mode of the active display changes and cases where the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestive production includes fake suggestive production. After execution of the false suggestion effect, the display mode of the active display does not change because the change effect is not executed. It is sufficient that the suggestive effect can be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or the false suggestive effect is not executed. As a result, the player may be prevented from determining whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestive effect is finished. Suggestive performance and change performance are separate performances in that there is a case of false suggestive performance in which the suggestive performance is executed before the changing performance, but the changing performance is not executed after the suggestive performance is executed. The suggestive effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, such as displaying a character effect image in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestive effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and since the change in the display mode is undetermined, it may be impossible or difficult to determine, for example, whether to return to the normal white display or to confirm the change to the specific color display different from the white display during the execution of the suggestive effect.

FIG. 18-2 shows a configuration example of variation patterns relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. These variation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments, or together with some or all of the variation patterns in the above embodiments. A plurality of variation patterns differ in variable display mode of special figure variation time and decoration design. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special figure to the stop display of the fixed special figure in the special figure games such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of variation patterns relating to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK include variation patterns corresponding to non-reach (losing), reach (losing), and big hits. Non-reach (losing) is a case where the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is "non-reach loss". A ready-to-win (losing) is a case where the fixed decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination, which is not a big win combination, is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "ready-to-lose". A big hit is a case in which the fixed decorative symbols of the big winning combination are displayed in a stationary manner as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is "big hit". A variation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern corresponding to a big win is a big win variation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The ready-to-win variation pattern and the jackpot variation pattern include a ``normal'' variation pattern in which the ready-to-win performance of normal reach is executed and the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed, and a ``super'' variation pattern in which the ready-to-win performance of normal reach is developed into a ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, and after the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the display result of variable display is stopped and displayed. There are super A and super B ready-to-win effects that are different from each other in the ready-to-win effects as super ready-to-win.

FIG. 18-3 shows an example of determination of variation patterns. Variation pattern determination example, big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 18-3 (A), loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. 18-3 (B1), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit". Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" in the time saving state in which time saving control is performed. In the variation pattern setting processing executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing, when the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', when it is ``losing'' at normal time when time saving control is not performed, or when ``losing'' during time saving control when time saving control is performed, the variation pattern at the time of big hit or at the time of loss is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. When determining the variation pattern, the numerical data representing the random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The variable random number buffer can store the random number extracted when the start prize determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value set in advance in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, a variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result as to which range of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern contains the random number value for determining the variation pattern. In addition, it may be determined whether or not the ready-to-win state is set when the game is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determination values assigned to the "super" variation patterns such as the variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the "normal" variation patterns such as the variation pattern PA3-1. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss variation pattern determination example (time saving) 87AK03, the number of determination values assigned to the “normal” variation pattern such as the variation pattern PA2-1 is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the “super” variation patterns such as the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. Thus, when the display result of the variable display is stopped after the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the expectation of big win (reliability of big win) is higher than when the ready-to-win performance to become super ready-to-win is not executed and the display result of variable display is stopped and displayed even if the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed.

Loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 may be set so as to include a variation pattern in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the first reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. According to such a setting, according to the number of 1st reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design or a decoration design should just be made different. When the first reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), each variation pattern may be assigned a determined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the first reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. Loss variation pattern determination example (during time saving) 87AK03 may be set to include a variation pattern in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the second reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. According to such a setting, according to the number of 2nd reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design or a decoration design should just be made different. When the second reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), each variation pattern may be assigned a determined value so that the average variable display time can be shortened compared to when the second reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. In the loss variation pattern determination example (time saving) 87AK03, compared with the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02, it is sufficient that the determination values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern with the short special figure variation time is greater than the variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. As a result, when the time saving control is performed, the average variable display time of the special pattern and the decoration pattern can be shortened more than the normal time when the time saving control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time saving control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data as when the first reserved memory number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the second reserved memory number. Alternatively, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data according to the first reserved memory number at the time of starting the special figure game regardless of the second reserved memory number. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the assignment of the decision value is different from that of the example of determining the losing variation pattern (normal time) 87AK02 regardless of the number of second reserved memories. Alternatively, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal time and the display result of the variable display is "loss", the variation pattern may be determined by replacing the "first reserved memory number" in the losing variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 with the "second reserved memory number" and referring to the table data according to the second reserved memory number.

During the time saving control when the time saving control is performed, the game ball is likely to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is high. When the special game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure, there is a high possibility that the special game using the second special figure will be repeatedly run during time saving, and the frequency of running the special game using the first special figure is low. And, when starting the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure during time saving, the number of second reserved memories is 0. Therefore, when execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "losing", the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the same table data as when the second reserved memory number is a predetermined value (for example, "0") regardless of the first reserved memory number. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the example of losing variation pattern determination (during time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved memories. Alternatively, when execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "loss", the variation pattern may be determined by reading the "second reserved memory number" in the losing variation pattern determination example (time saving) 87AK03 as "first reserved memory number" and referring to the table data according to the first reserved memory number.

FIGS. 18-4 (A1) to (A4) show active display examples for characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in a different display mode such as display color. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be any number of images based on any design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when displaying a character representing a coin in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when a character representing coins is displayed in red. In the active display, the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in white with a character representing a coin as a normal display mode. The change rendering includes the case where the display color of the active display is any one of blue, green, and red. Of these, when the display color is red, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the display color is blue. Thus, the active display can be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes such as white display, blue display, green display, and red display. Also, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in different display modes depending on the type, size, shape, and pattern of the character, and any display mode of the effect image, together with the display color or instead of the display color.

FIGS. 18-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestive effect can be executed by changing the effect mode including the display mode such as the character. In this suggestive effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestive effect. The number of display images that can be used for suggestive rendering is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on any design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image when the character representing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is illuminated in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image when the character representing the coin rotates in the active display. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by the execution of the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the display mode of the active display changes after execution of the change effect differs according to the effect mode of the suggestive effect. In this way, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes such as the effect mode of displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3.

FIGS. 18-5 (A1) to (A3) show examples of cut-in effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after establishment of ready-to-win with the variable display of decorative symbols in the ready-to-win mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character reporting a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. FIG. The cut-in performance predicts that the display result of the variable display becomes ``big hit'' and is controlled to a big win game state at a rate depending on whether or not it is executed with the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win or at a rate depending on the mode of performance when it is executed. The cut-in rendering may be executed in different rendering modes depending on the content of the message by the character, the type, size, shape, pattern, color, type, size, shape, pattern, and color of the frame that serves as the outer frame, the type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of any effect image.

In the cut-in effect examples of FIGS. 18-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of prepared display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character reporting the message "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that announces the message "chance!!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image in the case of displaying a character that reports the message "Super heat!!". In the cut-in effect, the ratio of whether or not it is executed and the ratio of notifying the message "Extreme heat!!" differ according to the display mode of the active display. In this way, the cut-in effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode of a message notified by displaying any one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Also, the cut-in effect can be executed in a predetermined mode, such as a mode of notifying the message "Super heat!!" using the display image 87AKE3.

FIGS. 18-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotional effects relating to characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed at the final stage of the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the action of the player, such as the action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A serving as the V-controller, is promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operating rod forward. In the promotion effect, a effect image, which is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. Along with the V-con image, a meter image may be displayed to inform of the remaining period for effectively detecting the player's motion. Along with the V-con image, a character image that notifies the message “Close!!” may be displayed. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a combination of some or all of them, it is possible to promote the player's action of pulling the V-controller. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which effect mode among the plurality of effect modes is selected depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. The promotion effect may be executed in different effect modes depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of arbitrary effect images for V-con images, meter images, and character images.

In the example of the promotion effect shown in FIGS. 18-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of prepared effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. A display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display in which a small-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a middle V-con display in which a medium-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. A display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display in which a large-sized V-con image is displayed together with a meter image and a character image. In the promotion performance, the ratio of the large V-con display may be changed according to the presence or absence of the cut-in performance and the performance mode, the ratio of the large V-con display may be varied according to the presence or absence of the change performance and the execution timing, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be varied according to the presence or absence of the suggestive performance and the performance mode. In the ready-to-win effect that is super ready-to-win, when the player's action of pulling the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is an action effect is executed. In this way, the promotion effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes, such as the effect mode corresponding to the size of the V-con display displaying any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a mode of effect of large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 18-6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 87AKS021). The effect control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random number value for special figure display result determination. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variable pattern and the variable display result may include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability variation (big hit)", and "probability variation (big hit)".

When the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)'', the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, but the determined decoration pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is ``losing''. When the variable display content is ``ready (losing)'', after the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the decided decoration pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing''. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the big win game state ends becomes a time saving state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big win)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big win", and the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the variable probability state.

When the variable display content is ``non-reach (losing)'', a performance control CPU 120 determines different (mismatched) decoration patterns in the ``left'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R as final stop patterns. A CPU 120 for performance control extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized pattern updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for performance, and determines a left finalized decorative pattern to be stop-displayed in a "left" decorative pattern display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative patterns by referring to a prepared left finalized pattern determination table stored in advance in a ROM 121. - 特許庁Next, numerical data representing a random number value for determining the right determined pattern updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for performance is extracted, and a right determined decorative pattern to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative patterns by referring to a prepared right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121.例文帳に追加At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Numerical data representing a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter is extracted, and medium-fixed decorative patterns to be stopped and displayed in a "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of an image display device 5 are determined among the fixed decorative patterns by referring to a medium-fixed pattern determination table stored in advance and prepared in a ROM 121.例文帳に追加

When the variable display content is ``reach (losing)'', the performance control CPU 120 determines the same (matching) decorative pattern in the ``left'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop pattern. A CPU 120 for performance control extracts numerical data representing a random number value for determining left and right fixed patterns updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for performance, and determines decorative patterns having the same pattern number to be stop-displayed together in ``left'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of an image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns by referring to a left and right decided pattern determination table stored in advance and prepared in a ROM 121.例文帳に追加Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for performance is extracted, and a medium-fixed pattern determination table stored in advance in a ROM 121 and prepared is referred to, among the fixed decorative patterns, to determine a medium-fixed decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in a "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C on the screen of an image display device 5.例文帳に追加Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative pattern becomes a big winning combination, an arbitrary value (for example, "1") may be added or subtracted from the pattern number of the medium fixed decorative pattern so that the fixed decorative pattern does not become a big winning combination but becomes a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set.

When the variable display contents are ``non-probability variation (big win)'' or ``probability variation (big win)'', a performance control CPU 120 determines the same (matching) decorative pattern in the ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R as the final stop pattern. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit determined symbol that is updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big win fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in a ROM 121, decoration patterns having the same pattern number and stopped and displayed together in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are decided. At this time, it is only necessary to determine which of the normal pattern (for example, a decorative pattern indicating an even number) or a certain variable pattern (for example, a decorative pattern indicating an odd number) to be the fixed decorative pattern according to whether the variable display content is ``non-probable variable (big hit)'' or ``probable variable (big hit)'' and whether or not promotion performance during the big win is executed. The promotion performance during a big win is a performance for informing whether or not a combination of decoration patterns (non-probability variable big win combination) that reminds a big win but not a probability variable state is temporarily stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, and then whether or not it becomes a probability variable state during the big win game state or at the end of the big win game state.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'' or ``probability variation (big hit)'', in step 126AKS011, it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion performance such as a re-lottery performance or a promotion performance during a big win. In the re-lottery performance, the decorative patterns of the non-probability variable big winning combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, making it difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns are controlled to the variable probability state, and the decorative patterns are again variably displayed (re-varyed) and the decorative patterns of the variable probability big winning combination consisting of the same variable probability patterns are stop-displayed so that the player can be recognizably notified of the control to the variable probability state. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are changed again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like in step 87AKS021, effect determination processing is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, the final display image that is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like may be determined. Subsequently, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 87AKS023). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (special figure variation performance control pattern) corresponding to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern specifying command and sets it as a use pattern. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set it as a use pattern in response to the execution setting of various effects by the effect determination process of step 87AKS022. The plurality of performance control patterns may include a change performance control pattern for executing a change performance, a suggestive performance control pattern for executing a suggestive performance, a cut-in performance control pattern for executing a cut-in performance, and a promotion performance control pattern for executing a promotion performance. A plurality of performance control patterns corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns and various performances may be individually determined, or a single performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of variable display of decorative patterns and execution setting of various performances may be collectively determined.

When the production control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting section, etc.) of RAM 122 is set (step 87AKS024), corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, for example. Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special figure fluctuation effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the variable start in step 87AKS025, setting for updating the pending display such as the first pending display in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display in the second pending display area 87AKB2 is performed in response to the start of the variable display (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special game is executed (started), in the first reservation display area 87AKB1, the display part (right end display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested), and the first reservation display in the display parts corresponding to the other reservation numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one in the right direction. On the other hand, when the second special game is executed (started), in the second reservation display area 87AKB2, the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the reservation number "1" is erased (digested), and the second reservation display in the display parts corresponding to the other reservation numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) leftward one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In accordance with the shifting of the pending display, the storage contents of the pending display data storage unit may also be shifted. In addition, settings are made for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the erased pending display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

If the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning when both the first and second pending storage numbers are "0", settings may be made to update the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 without updating the first pending display and the second pending display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display, in which the active display is a white display in a solid round shape. After updating the pending display in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 18-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process as the effect determination process. In the effect determination process, the final display image for active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is the effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. At step 87AKS101, one of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 can be determined depending on whether the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern that can specify the effect mode of the change effect, and it is sufficient that a plurality of patterns are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 or the like. At step 87 AKS102, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect in order to determine the change pattern of the active display. Whether or not there is a change performance is determined to be either ``with change'' to execute the change performance or ``no change'' to not perform it, according to the result of comparison between the image before change, which is the display mode when the active display is started, and the final display image. For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if the two are different display images, it is determined that the change effect is to be executed. When the variable display is started while the pre-change image and the final display image do not match, by executing the change performance, the display of the performance image to be the active display can be directly or stepwise changed to the final display image. When the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it is sufficient to determine "no change" that does not execute the change effect. If it is determined to be "no change" that does not execute the change effect, it is sufficient to determine no change pattern of the active display. When it is determined to "with change" to execute the change performance, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change performance can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, a suggested effect is determined (step 87AKS103). At step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Also, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 can be determined if the guess suggestive effect is to be executed. Next, as a ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super ready-to-win effect to be executed in super ready-to-win (step 87AKS104). At this time, if it is determined that the ready-to-win effect in super-ready-to-win is not executed and that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination processing is terminated. When it is determined that there is a super game (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 18-8 shows an example of determining the final display image. At step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the final display image is extracted, and the final display image is determined by referring to the final display image determination table according to the variable display content based on the random value. As an example of determination of the final display image, it is sufficient if there is a determination example 87AK11 based on the determination ratio according to the variable display contents as shown in FIG. 18-8. Determination example 87AK11 includes cases of "non-reach (losing)", "normal (losing)", "super (losing)", and "big hit" as variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is “no reach (loss)”, it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is “loss” and the ready reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach variation pattern. When the variable display content is "normal (losing)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the ready-to-win performance of normal reach is executed by the "normal" variation pattern. When the variable display content is "super (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the ready-to-win performance of super-reach is executed by the variation pattern of "super". When the variable display content is "big win", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big win".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 18-8, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 to be the final display images differs depending on whether or not the variable display content is "big win" and the game state is controlled to the big win game state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest rate when the variable display content is ``non-reach (loss)'' or ``normal (loss)'', and when the variable display content is ``super (loss)'' or ``jackpot'', the determination percentage is low. On the other hand, the display image 87AKC4 has a decision ratio of 0/100 (=0%) and cannot be decided when the variable display content is ``non-reach (losing)'' or ``normal (losing)'', and the decision ratio is the highest when the variable display content is ``jackpot''. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to such variable display contents, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display image 87AKC4, but higher than the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is lower than the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. In this way, the active display may suggest that the game is controlled to the big win game state at different rates according to the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 18-9 shows a configuration example of a change pattern used for a change effect and timings when the change effect can be executed. In the change pattern configuration example shown in FIG. 18-9(A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for change effects. The plurality of change patterns correspond to a combination of a display image of active display (pre-change image) before execution of the change effect and a display image of active display (post-change image) after execution of the change effect. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC1 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-3 are used when the display image 87AKC1 is the pre-change image and the display image 87AKC4 is the post-change image due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-4 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC3 by the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-5 are used when the image before change is the display image 87AKC2 and the image after change is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change patterns 87AKP1-6 are used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 by the change effect. The change performance can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern.

FIG. 18-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (losing) corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern. In the case of non-reach (losing), it is possible to execute the change effect at the timing before the establishment of reach, which is the first timing. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, it is possible to execute the change effect at a single timing while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed.

FIG. 18-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the variation effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of normal reach is executed in correspondence with the "normal" variation pattern. When the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win is executed, the changing effect can be executed at the first timing before the ready-to-win is established or after the ready-to-win is established. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win performance of normal ready-to-win is executed, the change performance can be executed at two timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns.

FIG. 18-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the ready-to-reach effect of super reach is executed in correspondence with the "super" variation pattern. When the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the changing performance can be executed at the first timing before the ready-to-win is established, after the ready-to-win is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the cut-in performance to be the second timing. In this way, when the variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed, the changing performance can be executed at four timings during the execution of the variable display of the decorative patterns. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. In addition, it is not limited to these timings, as long as it is possible to execute the change effect at a single or a plurality of timings while executing the variable display of the decoration pattern. In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started. After the active display is started in this manner, the cut-in effect can be executed before the action effect is executed in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach.

Figures 18-10 show an example of determination of change patterns. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining a change pattern is extracted, and based on the random value, a change pattern corresponding to a single or multiple timings may be determined by referring to the change pattern determination table according to the final display image in the active display. The determination example of the variation pattern may include a determination example of "without super" corresponding to the variation pattern other than the "super" variation pattern and a determination example of "with super" corresponding to the variation pattern of "super".

FIG. 18-10(A) shows a determination example 87AK21 of a change pattern corresponding to before establishment of reach, which is the first timing, as a determination example of "no super". In determination example 87AK21, presence or absence and type of change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no change pattern, the change performance is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the white display which is the normal mode does not change as the display mode of the active display, no change pattern is determined at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponding to not executing the change performance. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is determined at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is determined at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display.

FIG. 18-10(B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a variation pattern corresponding to the first timing, before reaching reach, and the second timing, during cut-in effect, as a determination example of "with super". In decision example 87AK22, presence or absence and type of change patterns corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are decided according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, since the white display, which is the normal mode, does not change as the display mode of the active display, it is determined at a ratio of 100/100 (=100%) that there is no change pattern of the first timing and the second timing corresponding to not executing the change performance. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display is changed from white display, which is the normal mode, to red display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-2 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-6 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-6 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%). A combination of no change pattern of the first timing and a change pattern of the second timing 87AKP1-3 is determined, and a combination of the change pattern of the first timing 87AKP1-3 and no change pattern of the second timing is determined at a rate of 10/100 (=10%). In this manner, the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, it is sufficient that the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to single or multiple timings during execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 has a determination ratio of 0/100 (=0%). Accordingly, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the normal white display to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in performance during execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win, the expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state is increasing. At such a timing, if the display changes to a blue display with a low degree of expectation, it suggests that the possibility of being controlled to a big winning game state is low, and there is a possibility that the player may lose interest by giving an unpleasant feeling. Therefore, at the second timing, it is set so as not to execute a change effect in which the active display changes from white display to blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is heightened, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the discomfort of the change performance suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined to be the variation pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the variation pattern, so the variation effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be changed further. In this way, before the cut-in performance as the second timing, the display mode of the active display is not changed by not executing the change performance at the second timing corresponding to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display as the specific mode. Further, when the change performance is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to the red display, so that the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change performance is increased and various performances can be executed. Even when the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as red display at the first timing, the display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of the active display to gold display at the second timing when a special effect such as a promotion effect is executed as a cut-in effect.

FIGS. 18-11 show an example of determination of suggestive effects including a false suggestive effect. At step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the trick suggesting effect, that is, whether to execute the trick suggesting effect, corresponding to the timing at which the change effect is not executed, out of the first timing and the second timing. At this time, for example, a random number value for determining the execution of the false suggestion performance is extracted, and whether or not to execute the false suggestion performance is determined by referring to a table for determining the execution of the false suggestion performance according to the timing when the change performance is not executed based on the random value. As an example of determining the execution of the guess effect, it is sufficient if there is a determination example 87AK31 based on the determination ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 18-11(A). In step 87AKS103 of the performance determination processing, a random number value for determining suggestive performance is extracted, and based on the random value, a performance image to be used for suggestive performance corresponding to a single or a plurality of timings can be determined by referring to a table for determining suggestive performance according to the change pattern used in the change performance. As an example of determination of the suggestive effect, a determination example 87AK32 based on the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 18-11(B) may be used.

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 18-11(A), it is determined either "executed" to execute the guess suggestion effect or "no execution" not executed corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. However, in the case of "no super", since the variable display ends before the cut-in effect of the second timing is reached, it is sufficient to decide whether or not to execute the false suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing. In decision example 87AK31, the decision ratio of whether or not to execute the guess-suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, at the first timing, a 10/100 (=10%) ratio is determined to be “executed”, and a 90/100 (=90%) ratio is determined to be “not executed”. At the second timing, "executed" is determined at a rate of 0/100 (=0%), and "not executed" is determined at a rate of 100/100 (=100%). As a result, a limit is set such that the trick suggesting performance is executed at a predetermined rate in the range of the first timing, while the trick suggesting performance is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the limitation is not limited to the fact that the trick suggestion performance is not executed at the second timing, and a limitation may be provided as a limit such that the execution ratio of the trick suggestion performance is lower at the second timing than at the first timing. By setting these restrictions, at the second timing when the expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is heightened, the event that the change performance is not executed even if the suggestive performance is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big win game state is heightened, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the unpleasantness of the false suggestion performance.

A decision example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 18-11(B) includes a case where the decision ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestive effect differs depending on the change pattern used for the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the false suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (=0%). In this case, the display image 87AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the change effect is always executed without executing the false suggestive effect, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. In the case of any one of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (=10%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (=60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of active display is changed to red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestive effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestive performance using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the degree of expectation for changing the display mode of the active display to the red display by the change performance is lower than that of the display image 87AKD3 but higher than that of the display image 87AKD1. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to red display due to the change effect is the lowest. In this manner, the suggestive effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode at a different rate depending on the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Also, the suggestive effect may suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like.

FIGS. 18-12 show an example of determining a cut-in effect. At step 87AKS105 of the performance determination processing, a random number value for determining cut-in performance is extracted, and whether or not to execute the cut-in performance and the performance image to be used when executing the cut-in performance may be determined by referring to a cut-in performance determination table according to the final display image in the active display based on the random value. As an example of determining the cut-in effect, there may be a case where a determination example 87AK41 based on the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIG. 18-12 is used. In decision example 87AK41, presence/absence and type of a display image to be used for cut-in effects are determined according to the final display image in the active display. When it is determined that there is no display image to be used for cut-in effect, cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, it is determined that there is no display image at a rate of 80/100 (=80%), and the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 20/100 (=20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, no display image is determined at a rate of 20/100 (=20%), display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 40/100 (=40%), display image 87AKE2 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), and display image 87AKE3 is determined at a rate of 10/100 (=10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, no display image is determined at a rate of 10/100 (=10%), display image 87AKE1 is determined at a rate of 30/100 (=30%), display image 87AKE2 is determined at a rate of 40/100 (=40%), and display image 87AKE3 is determined at a rate of 20/100 (=20%).

In decision example 87AK41, when the final display image is display image 87AKC4, there is no display image, the decision ratio of display image 87AKE1 is 0/100 (=0%), the display image 87AKE2 is decided at a ratio of 20/100 (=20%), and the display image 87AKE3 is decided at a ratio of 80/100 (=80%). In this case, a cut-in effect is always executed, and one of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is used. In this manner, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the final display mode of the active display can be suggested at different ratios according to the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed during the cut-in effect at the second timing, the effect mode of the cut-in effect can be suggested at different ratios according to the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined because the determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, and can be determined when any of the display images 87AKC2 to 87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect becomes a predetermined mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so it is possible to change the display mode of the active display.

It should be noted that whether or not to perform the cut-in effect and the mode of effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is to be executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect that is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the cut-in effect display image 87AKE1 may be determined at a high rate. According to such setting of the determination ratio, when the cut-in performance using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio of not executing the change performance at the second timing increases, and the display mode of the active display becomes difficult to change. As described above, the cut-in effect effect mode may include a effect mode in which the execution ratio of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is difficult to change.

FIGS. 18-13 to 18-15 show determination examples of promotion effects corresponding to the characteristic portions 87AK to 89AK. At step 87AKS106 of the performance determination processing, a random number value for determining the promotion performance is extracted, and based on the random value, a performance image to be used for the promotion performance is determined by referring to the promotion performance determination table according to the display result of the variable display. 18-13, the determination example 88AK01 regarding the characteristic portion 88AK illustrated in FIG. 18-14, and the determination example 89AK01 regarding the characteristic portion 89AK illustrated in FIG. 18-15. Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition related to the progress of a game or production, or according to the success or failure of a special condition irrespective of the progress of a game or production, the case of each determination example may be switched. For example, if the execution count of the variable display is within a specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the decision ratio of decision example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be decided by the decision ratio of decision example 88AK01. Further, if the effect mode is the normal mode, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is a special mode different from the normal mode, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01.

In the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 related to the characteristic portion 87AK shown in FIG. 18-13, the decision ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on whether the display result of the variable display is "lost" or "big hit", whether or not the cut-in effect is executed, and the display image used for the cut-in effect. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and there is no display image corresponding to no cut-in effect execution, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and there is no display image corresponding to the execution of cut-in performance, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is “no” and the display image 87AKE1 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", the determination ratio of the images other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image for cut-in performance, when there is a display image 87AKE1, and when there is a display image 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "failure", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for promotion performance becomes the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect has the highest determination ratio corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "failed". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Thus, even if the player misses the cut-in performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be determined to some extent according to whether or not the performance mode of the promotion performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3.

When there is no display image corresponding to no execution of cut-in performance due to the difference in determination ratio in decision example 87AK51, promotion performance using display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when cut-in performance is executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. Thus, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Also, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, the ratio of determining each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and there is no display image for which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "fail", in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "failure", the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in performance are not displayed, and the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the performance mode of the promotion performance. Similarly, if the determination ratio when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" is compared, in this case, as the display image of the cut-in effect is absent, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3, the display ratio of the display image 87AKF3 as the effect mode of the promotion effect increases. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the cut-in effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in performance and the promotion performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promotion performance, so that the player's interest in various performances is heightened.

In the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 88AK shown in FIG. 18-14, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on whether the display result of the variable display is "losing" or "big hit", whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "fail", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win", no change effect is executed, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is ``losing'' or ``big hit'', when no change performance is executed and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 and 87AKF2 are both 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 (=70%), the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is decided. The ratio is 0/100 (=0%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (=60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0). %). When the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (=70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is decided. The ratio is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (= 50%). When the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 ( = 20%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 ( = 30%).

In decision example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the decision ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%). The determination ratio is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=0%). = 90%). When the display result of the variable display is "fail" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (=95%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (=0%). = 5%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100. (=60%).

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. For example, when the change performance is executed only at the first timing, regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or the display image other than the display image 87AKC2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to 'failure', and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for promotion performance becomes the highest. Further, when the change performance is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing and the second timing, regardless of the final display image of the active display, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "missing", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for promotion performance becomes the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect is most likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Thus, even if the player cannot discriminate the timing of the change performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state can be discriminated to some extent according to whether the performance mode of the promotion performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 88AK01, when no change performance is executed or when the change performance is executed only at the first timing, the promotion performance using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the change performance is executed only at the second timing or when the change performance is executed at the first timing and the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. In addition, the change effect varies the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect depending on whether or not it is executed and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display is the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "loss" and no change effect is executed, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (=40%) or 50/100 (=50%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%) or 20/100 (=20%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "losing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (=50%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "fail", when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%) or 95/100 (=95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs according to whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio determined for the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (=0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of execution/non-execution and timing of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change performance and the promotion performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promotion performance, so that the player's interest in various performances is heightened. Further, the timing of execution of the change effect differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3.

In addition, in the decision ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display result of the variable display and the execution/non-execution of the change effect and the timing are the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios according to the final display image of the active display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" and no change effect is executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, whereas it is 50/100 (=50%) when the display image is other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change performance is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 (=70%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, whereas it is 80/100 (=80%) when the display image is other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change performance is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, whereas it is 20/100 (=20%) when the display image is other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "losing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, whereas it is 5/100 (=5%) when the display image is other than the display image 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", even if execution/non-execution and timing of the change performance are the same, the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 is different according to the final display image of the active display. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state according to the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promotion performance, so that the player's interest in various performances is heightened.

In the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 89AK shown in FIG. 18-15, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on whether the display result of the variable display is "losing" or "big hit", whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and the display image used for the suggestive effect. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (=80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (=30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (=40%). When the display result of the variable display is “no” and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (=60%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (=20%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (=20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (=60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (=40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (=30%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (=10%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (=80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). When the display result of the variable display is a "big win" and the display image 87AKE2 of cut-in effect is displayed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of suggestive performance, when there is a display image 87AKD1, and when there is a display image 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "missing", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for promotion performance becomes the highest. In the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotional effect has the highest determination ratio, corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting such a determination ratio, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state becomes the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is lower than in the case of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than in the case of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestive effect, in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is the highest. Thus, even if the player misses the suggestive performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state can be determined to some extent according to whether or not the performance mode of the promoting performance is based on the display of the display image 87AKF3.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the example of determination 89AK01, when there is no display image corresponding to no execution of the suggestive effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestive effect is executed. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using either the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is executed. In this way, the display images used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. In the suggestive effect, the ratio of the effect mode such as the display of the effect image in the promotion effect is changed according to the effect mode such as the display of the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even when the display result of the variable display is the same, the ratio of determining each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, in the case where the display result of the variable display is “no” and there is no display image for which the suggestive effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (=10%). In the case where the display result of the variable display is "no", in the case of the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (=20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "miss", in the case of the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (=30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is “no”, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, the ratio of determination to the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "failure", the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect are absent, and the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is a ``big hit'' are compared, in this case, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive performance, the display ratio of the display image 87AKF3 as the performance mode of the promotion performance increases. By setting such a determination ratio, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state can be varied according to the combination of the execution/non-execution of the suggestive effect, the effect mode, and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestive performance and the promoting performance, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state rather than grasping only the performance mode of the promoting performance, so that the player's interest in various performances is heightened.

FIGS. 18-16 show an example of determination of an promotion effect as a modified example. For example, if the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is selected from among the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 87AK, any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 to be used for the promotion effect may be determined at a rate corresponding to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In the step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the decision example 87AK61 shown in FIGS.

In the decision example 87AK61 of the promotion effect shown in FIG. 18-16, when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is displayed and the display result of the variable display is "loss", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), regardless of the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determined proportion of 7AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). On the other hand, when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in performance is displayed and the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for promotion performance is different according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%), while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the setting value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the setting value is 2, 25/100 (=25%) if the setting value is 3, and 20/100 (=20%) if the setting value is 4. ), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (=15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the setting value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the setting value is 4, and 85/100 (=85%) if the setting value is 5. , it is 90/100 (=90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is a ``jackpot'', the ratio of the performance mode of the promotion performance to display either the display images 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is varied according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the performance mode of the promotion performance tends to be the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the ratio of the performance mode of the promotion performance to the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. Therefore, when the performance mode of the cut-in performance is the display of the display image 87AKE3 and the promotion performance is the performance mode of the display of the display image 87AKF3, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is the set value advantageous to the player increases.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is the effect mode as a predetermined mode in which the message "Super heat!!" is notified by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The rate at which the performance mode of the promotion performance becomes such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in performance and the promotion performance in accordance with a plurality of times of variable display in which the display result is "big hit". The player can recognize the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 by grasping the ratio at which the promotion performance is in a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in performance is displayed in the variable display in which the display result is a ``jackpot''. If the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage, the display result of the variable display is likely to be "big win" and is likely to be controlled to the big win game state. Therefore, a player who expects to be given a game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage, so that in a plurality of times of variable display where the display result is ``big hit'', the set value can be recognized from the ratio of the acceleration performance to a predetermined mode, etc., thereby enhancing the player's willingness to play the game.

Even when there is no display image used for the cut-in performance or when there is one of the display images 87AKE1 and 87AKE2, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion performance may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 may be set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. According to such setting, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage can be heightened as the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after execution of the promotion performance of a predetermined mode (large V-con display) with a high degree of expectation by the display of the display image 87AKF3. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Among the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and when the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "losing", regardless of the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the display image 87AKF. The determination ratio of 3 is 10/100 (=10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and when the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%), while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/1 if the set value is 2. 00 (=30%), 25/100 (=25%) if the set value is 3, 20/100 (=20%) if the set value is 4, 15/100 (=15%) if the set value is 5, and 10/100 (=10%) if the set value is 6. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the setting value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the setting value is 4, and 85/100 (=85%) if the setting value is 5. If so, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the performance mode of the promotion performance tends to be the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the ratio of the performance mode of the promotion performance to the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change performance at the first timing and the second timing, and the promotion performance is the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio at which the promotion performance is in a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the change performance and the promotion performance with a plurality of times of variable display with the display result as a ``jackpot'', the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be recognized and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4 among the cases where the change performance is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion performance may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "Loss", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 may be set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. According to such setting, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage can be heightened as the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after execution of the promotion performance of a predetermined mode (large V-con display) with a high degree of expectation by the display of the display image 87AKF3. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, even when the change performance is not executed, or when it is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion performance may be changed according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Among the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion performance related to the characteristic part 89AK, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive performance, for example, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion performance may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing" in the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, regardless of the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (=0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (=90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (=10%). is. On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestive effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is the same at 0/100 (=0%), while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2, and 2 if the set value is 3. 5/100 (=25%), 20/100 (=20%) if the set value is 4, 15/100 (=15%) if the set value is 5, and 10/100 (=10%) if the set value is 6. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (=65%) if the setting value is 1, 70/100 (=70%) if the setting value is 2, 75/100 (=75%) if the setting value is 3, 80/100 (=80%) if the setting value is 4, and 85/100 (=85%) if the setting value is 5. If so, it may be 90/100 (=90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the performance mode of the promotion performance tends to be the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the ratio of the performance mode of the promotion performance to the performance mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. Therefore, when the performance mode of the suggestive performance is the display of the display image 87AKD3 and the promotion performance is the performance mode of the display of the display image 87AKF3, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is the set value advantageous to the player increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio at which the promotion performance becomes a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestive performance and the promotion performance in accordance with a plurality of times of variable display in which the display result is a ``jackpot'', the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be recognized, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Even when there is no display image used for the suggestive performance or when there is only one of the display images 87AKD1 and 87AKD2, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion performance may be changed according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Even when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may differ according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 may be set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. According to such setting, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage can be heightened as the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after execution of the promotion performance of a predetermined mode (large V-con display) with a high degree of expectation by the display of the display image 87AKF3. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "losing", it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Determination ratio of display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 to be the final display image of the active display, determination ratio of change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, presence/absence of suggestion effect and determination ratio of display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, presence/absence of cut-in effect and determination ratio of display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, display images 87AKF1 to 87AK used for promotion effect. A part or all of the determination ratios of F3 may be set differently according to the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 when the display result of the variable display is "loss". For example, when the display result of the variable display is ``losing'', the ratio of determining the performance mode with high expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state may be set to be higher as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 becomes a set value with a higher degree of advantage for the player. According to such setting, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage can be heightened as the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after the execution of the high-expectation performance, which is the performance of the performance mode with a high degree of expectation. In general, when the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after the high-expectation performance of the performance mode with the high expectation is executed, the player's expectation once raised by the performance is abruptly decreased by the display result of the variable display, so that the player tends to lose or lose motivation to continue the game. On the other hand, as the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'' after the execution of the high-expectation performance, the player's interest in the game can be improved by raising the expectation that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is a set value with a high degree of advantage, so as to arouse the desire of the player to continue the game.

In addition, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 that will be the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence or absence of the suggestive effect and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, the presence or absence of the cut-in effect and the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, the display images 87AKF1 to 87A used for the promotion effect. A part or all of the determination ratios of KF3 may be set differently depending on whether the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is equal to or higher than a specific set value or less than the specific set value when the display result of the variable display is ``losing''. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4 or more, the decision ratio of the performance mode with high expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state may be set higher than when the set value is less than 4 when the display result of the variable display is ``losing''. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the determination ratio of the performance mode with high expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state may be set higher than when the set value is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5) when the display result of the variable display is ``losing''. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (one of 1 to 5), when the display result of the variable display is ``losing'', the determination ratio is 0/100 (=0%) and the performance mode in which the big hit is decided may be set to be determined at a predetermined ratio when the display result of the variable display is ``losing'' when the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6.例文帳に追加According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6 (any one of 1 to 5), the performance of the performance mode in which the big win is confirmed is executed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes ``losing'', the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is determined to be 6, so that the game interest can be improved so that the player's desire to continue the game can be enhanced.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of judgment or determination of the game, or any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 or the judgment or determination of the performance. Arbitrary performances may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, without being limited to setting suggestion performances, performance modes may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied, or execution timings may be determined at different percentages depending on whether such conditions are satisfied. Any performance may be limited as a limit that a specific performance is not executed in a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied, or may be set as a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered compared to a range where the limit condition is not satisfied and it is difficult to execute.

FIG. 18-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, subtracted by 1), and when an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, it is determined that the variable display time has passed. Thus, the lapse of the variable display time, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc., as long as it can be determined as the lapse of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

When the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is a suggestive effect period for executing a suggestive effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestive effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (suggestive effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. If it is the suggestive effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the suggestive effect (step 87AKS043). At step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestive effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control section 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 9014, and the like. As a result, it is only necessary to display a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, output a predetermined effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turn on, blink, or extinguish the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LEDs, or combine some or all of these to execute the suggestive effect with the predetermined effect device.

When it is determined at step 87AKS042 that it is not a suggestive presentation period (step 87AKS042; No), or after executing the control at step 87AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is a variation presentation period for executing a variation presentation (step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before establishment of the ready-to-win effect, which is the first timing, and a period during the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. During the cut-in effect at the second timing, it is sufficient if the display mode of the active display can be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 corresponding to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined at step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after executing the control at step 87AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period for executing the ready-to-win effect (step 87AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

When it is determined at step 87AKS046 that it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step 87AKS046; No), or after executing the control at step 87AKS047, it is determined whether or not it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control for executing the cut-in effect is performed (step 87AKS049). The cut-in performance period should be set in advance so that the cut-in performance can be executed after the display of the performance image that becomes active display with the start of the variable display is started by step 87AKS026 of variable display start setting processing and before it is determined that it is the action performance period in step 87AKS052. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the action effect is executed.

Note that the order of the active display, action effect, and cut-in effect may be changed arbitrarily. For example, the active display may be started after executing the cut-in effect, and then the action effect may be executed. Alternatively, the action effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined at step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after executing the control at step 87AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. If it is the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period for effectively detecting the action of the player as the promotion effect is executed. In the valid detection period, for example, it is possible to detect the action of the player tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, such as the pulling operation on the V controller, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A.

When it is determined at step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion performance period (step 87AKS050; No), and after executing the control at step 87AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the action presentation period for executing the action presentation (step 87AKS052). The operation production period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern) determined at step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process, for example. In the effective detection period after the promotion effect is started, if the specific action by the player, such as the action of pulling the operation rod of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, is not detected, the action effect period may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific action is not detected, the action presentation period may be started when the specific timing for the action presentation is reached. When it is the action presentation period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the action presentation is performed (step 87AKS053).

The player's specific action detected for executing the action effect may be an action of tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, unlike a pulling operation, such as a pushing operation on the V controller. Alternatively, the specific action of the player may be an action of pressing the push button 31B. It is not limited to those that can detect the action of the player, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, color change of the detection target, etc. Based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, any performance corresponding to the action performance may be executed. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target may have any configuration that can detect the state of the detection target mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and an effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not in the action presentation period (step 87AKS052; No), or after executing the control in step 87AKS053, for example, based on the setting in the presentation control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, control for executing other presentations during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative patterns is performed (step 87AKS054), and the presentation process during variable display ends.

When the variable display time has passed at step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. When a predetermined time elapses without receiving the pattern confirmation command after the variable display time has passed, predetermined error processing may be executed in response to the failure to normally receive the pattern confirmation command.

When the pattern confirmation command is received at step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (fixed decoration pattern) which is the display result in the variable display of the decorative patterns (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as a wait time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

18-18 to 18-22 show execution examples of variable display of decorative patterns and various effects. FIG. 18-18 shows an execution example from the start of the variable display, which is the start of the variable display, to the execution of the suggestive effect corresponding to the first timing before the ready-to-win state is established. FIGS. 18-19 show an execution example of ready-to-win establishment in which the variable display is ended in the case of non-reach (losing) after the change performance corresponding to the first timing before establishment of ready-to-win is executed, and the variable display is in the ready-to-win state in the case of non-reach (losing). FIGS. 18-20 show an example of execution of end of variable display that ends variable display in the case of normal (losing), and an example of execution from super development in which ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win is started to execution of suggestive performance corresponding to the second timing of cut-in performance. FIGS. 18-21 show an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing of the cut-in effect is executed. FIGS. 18-22 show an example of execution from the execution of the action effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process corresponding to the start of the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. After the start of variation in the effect execution example 87 AKM01, a suggestive effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display will change can be executed in correspondence with the first timing before establishment of the ready-to-win state. FIG. 18-18(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 18-18(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD2 corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 18-18(B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 when the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD3 corresponding to the first timing. In this manner, the suggestive effect can be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 is used. Of the cases in which the change performance is not executed corresponding to the first timing, when it is determined to ``no execution'' in which the false suggestive performance is not executed in step 87AKS103 of the performance determination processing, the variable display of the decorative pattern proceeds without executing the suggestive performance. Corresponding to before establishment of ready-to-win which is the first timing, after the suggestive effect in any one of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 18-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 when no change effect is executed in response to no change pattern at the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white. In this case, the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is a fake suggestive effect executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 18-11(B), if the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, any one of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 is determined, so there is no false suggestive effect.

FIG. 18-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 18-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 18-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is executed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13, and then in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 as in the effect execution example 87AKM22 is the active display area. By being displayed on 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is executed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. Then, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display image 87AKC3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM23 is the active display area. By being displayed on 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the ready-to-win is established which is the first timing, a suggestive effect is executed by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. Then, in the change effect by the change patterns 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 as in the effect execution example 87AKM24 is the active display area. By being displayed on 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the non-reach variation pattern, for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, for example, like the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. After establishment of ready-to-win, there are a case where a ready-to-win effect of normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and a case of super development in which a ready-to-win effect of becoming super ready-to-win is executed.

FIG. 18-20 (A1) shows a variable end effect execution example 87AKM41 in which the variable display ends when the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is executed, the fixed decoration pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed. FIG. 18-20 (A2) shows an execution example 87AKM42 of a super-developed ready-to-win effect in which a normal ready-to-win effect develops into a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed as in effect execution example 87 AKM42, the decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R may be displayed in reduced size. Also, a small pattern display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5 . The small pattern display area is smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. In the small pattern display area, the small patterns are variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern may be reduced than the identification information image which is the performance image showing the decorative pattern, and may be a reduced identification information image capable of performing variable display in a manner partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. For example, when an identification information image indicating a decorative pattern includes a portion indicating a number and a portion indicating a character, the performance image indicating the small pattern is an image indicating the number corresponding to the same pattern number as the portion indicating the number included in the decorative pattern, and does not include the portion indicating the character, so it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler mode than the performance image indicating the decorative pattern. In this way, in the small pattern display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small patterns that serve as the reduced identification information are variably displayed, and the determined small patterns that are the display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible. In the small symbol display area, it is sufficient to display the small symbols in a simple manner so that the display contents and display results of the small symbols can be prevented from being misunderstood by the player.

Following the super development in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win can proceed as in the effect execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 18-20(B). After the ready-to-win performance in the performance execution example 87 AKM43, a suggestive performance suggesting that the display mode of the active display is changed can be executed with or without the execution of the cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance as the second timing. FIG. 18-20(C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestive effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKD1 corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. Even if the cut-in performance is not executed by determining that there is no display image to be used for the cut-in performance at step 87AKS105 of the performance determination processing, and if the display image of the suggestive performance corresponding to the second timing is determined at step 87AKS103 of the performance determination processing, the suggestive performance can be executed even if the cut-in performance is not executed at the cut-in performance of the second timing. FIG. 18-20(C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE2, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. FIG. 18-20(C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which when the cut-in effect is executed by displaying the display image 87AKE3, the suggestive effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. After the suggestive effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is executed. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 18-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 18-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 18-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when a change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach as in the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, in the cut-in effect that is the second timing, as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53, after executing the suggestive effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53, after executing the suggestive effect by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the effect execution example 87AKM61. is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach as in the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, in the cut-in effect that is the second timing, as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53, after executing the suggested effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the effect execution example 87AKM62. is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. After the start of the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach as in the effect execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43, in the cut-in effect that is the second timing, as in the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53, after executing the suggestive effect by displaying any one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the effect execution example 87AKM63. is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1, the display mode of the active display changes to red display. After part or all of the cut-in performance, suggestive performance, and change performance corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the ready-to-win performance progresses without these performances being executed, the promotion performance for promoting the action of the player is executed.

FIG. 18-21(B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 18-21(B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 18-21 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by displaying the display image 87AKF1 as in the effect execution example 87AKM71; is executed. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 to be used for the promotion effect is determined at a ratio corresponding to the feature parts 87AK to 89AK, such as the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 87AK, the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 88AK, and the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect related to the characteristic part 89AK. With the execution of the promotion effect, it becomes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the action of the player. During the effective detection period, it is made possible to detect an action of the player tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. An action effect can be executed based on the result of detecting the action of the player during the validity detection period.

FIG. 18-22(A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "missing". In this case, the display result of the variable display is derived by stop-displaying the fixed decoration pattern that becomes the reach-losing, such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG.

FIG. 18-22(A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the action effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being "big win". In this case, for example, the determined decorative symbols of the big hit combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG.

In this way, the promotion performance for promoting the action of the player can be executed by changing the ratio of the performance mode according to other performances and display states such as whether or not the cut-in performance is executed and the performance mode, whether or not the change performance is executed and timing, the final display image of the active display, and whether or not the suggestive performance is executed and the performance mode. In addition, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and controlled to the big win game state can be varied. Also, the suggestive effect, change effect, and cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the action of the player. Acceleration effects can be executed in a predetermined mode at different rates depending on whether or not execution of effects that can be executed without detecting the player's motion, the mode of performance, and the timing. As a result, by heightening the player's interest in various performances, the player's sense of expectation is appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. For example, as in the example 88AK01 of determining the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 88AK and the example 89AK01 of determining the promotion effect related to the characteristic portion 89AK, the cut-in effect may not be executed in a configuration in which the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

The promotion performance can be executed by changing the ratio of the performance mode according to the presence/absence of execution, the performance mode, the timing, or a combination of part or all of them in an arbitrary performance different from the promotion performance. For example, when the variable display effect of "pseudo-continuation" is executed, the rate at which the effect mode of the promotion effect becomes the predetermined mode may be varied according to whether or not it is executed, the effect mode, and the timing. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display presentation, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started, the re-variable display can be executed once or more than once. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, a predetermined temporary stop mode, such as a pseudo consecutive chance, may be used. The pseudo-continuous chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of kinds of temporary stop symbols corresponding to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be changed according to the pseudo-successful chances that are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the ``pseudo-continuous'' variable display performance is executed, it may be possible to execute promotion performance and action performance a plurality of times corresponding to before and after execution of re-variable display or after execution of each re-variable display. In this case, the second promotion performance to be executed after the first promotion performance among the multiple promotion performances may be executed with different ratios of the performance modes depending on whether or not the first promotion performance is executed, the performance mode, the timing, or a combination of some or all of them.

Along with the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect of changing the display mode of the active display, the suspension change effect of changing the display mode of the suspension display may be executed. In this case, pending information about variable display is stored as pending data including a random value for display result determination, and the first pending display and the second pending display based on the pending information are executed in the first pending display area 87AKB1 and the second pending display area 87AKB2. Then, before the start of the variable display corresponding to the reservation information, a reservation change performance for changing the display modes of the first reservation display and the second reservation display at different rates depending on whether the reservation information is specific information may be executed. In such a configuration in which the pending change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executable by varying the ratio of the effect mode according to whether or not the pending change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The performance modes such as suggestive performance, change performance, cut-in performance, promotion performance, etc. are not limited to those in which the performance modes are different depending on the display of different display images for part or all of the performance modes, and arbitrary performance modes using various performance devices may be different. For example, along with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, an effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes according to the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 909 and the LED for performance, the operation mode of the movable member for performance, or a combination of some or all of these.

The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (e.g., "15") that is larger than the second round number (e.g., "7"), the upper limit number of variable display that can be performed in the time saving state is the second number (e.g., "50"). The number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times that the game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled, becomes the number of consecutive chances (for example, "10") greater than the number of second consecutive chances (for example, "5"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 that are the final display images of the active display and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 that are used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled to be in an advantageous state.

As an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it may be controlled to a KT (minor win time) state in which the variable display result has a high probability of becoming a "minor win". For example, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, it may be controlled to the KT state at a predetermined rate (including 100%). In addition, the gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Also, the period during which the KT state is controlled may be referred to as the KT period, and the period during which the KT state is not controlled may be referred to as the non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, in the KT state, when the second start prize is continuously generated due to the passage (entering) of the game ball through the second start prize opening, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is remarkably improved as compared with the non-KT state. Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the ratio of determining the variable display result as ``small hit'' is higher than the percentage of determining the variable display result as ``big hit''. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). When the result of the variable display using the first special figure is a ``small win'', the period in which the big winning opening is opened is short, so that it is difficult for the game balls to pass through (enter) the big winning opening, and the game balls which are substantially prize balls are not put out. In the KT state, since the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, the frequency of the variable display result using the second special figure being a ``small win'' is also improved, and the big winning opening is easily opened in the small win game state. In the KT state, the player shoots (right-handedly) a game ball toward the right game area, thereby increasing the frequency of opening the big winning opening compared to the non-KT state, which is advantageous to the player. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 that are the final display images of the active display and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 that are used for promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restriction may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other quantity different for the execution of processing, control, or action.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 87AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A, or the like, which can detect the player's movement; Acceleration effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 that can execute step 87AKS051 of variable display effect processing, for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS051 of variable display effect processing for promoting the action of the player; 49, the corresponding display means can display the corresponding display in any one of a plurality of display modes, such as a specific mode such as red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, and the promotion effect execution means includes a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, the display image 87. The promotion effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display corresponding to AKF1 to 87AKF3, and the variable display effect execution means can execute the variable display effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including, for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, including a predetermined mode such as a message of "Super heat!!" using the display image 87AKE3. As in example 87AK41 of determination, the effect during variable display is executed in a predetermined manner at different ratios according to the display mode of the corresponding display. are controlled to advantage at different rates. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (B3), after displaying the corresponding display by the corresponding display means and before executing the action effect by the action effect executing means, the effect during variable display may be executed by the effect during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the effect during variable display, such as during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 18-9 (B3). As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the variable display effect is executed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, the display mode of the corresponding display does not need to be changed in response to the case where the display mode of the corresponding display is the specific mode before execution of the effect during variable display by the effect execution means during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and the corresponding display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and depending on the setting of the setting means, the variable display effect may be executed in one of the plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 is provided with setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 88AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A, or the like, which can detect the player's movement; Acceleration effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that can execute step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, for example, that can execute the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a promotion effect that promotes the action of the player, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the action effect based on the detection result of the detection means, that can execute step 87AKS053 of the effect process during the variable display, and step 87AKS04 of the effect process during the variable display that can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display. 5, and the corresponding display means can display the corresponding display in one of a plurality of display modes, such as a display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, including a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, from a certain period before the execution of the action effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73, and execute the promotion effect. The means can execute the promotion effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, the size of the V-con display corresponding to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. As in example 88AK01 of determination of the corresponding promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at a different rate depending on the display mode of the corresponding display. For example, as in example 88AK01 of determination of the promotion effect according to the change effect in FIGS. , controlled to be in an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various presentations, the player's expectations can be appropriately heightened by the presentation, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (B3), after displaying the corresponding display by the corresponding display means and before executing the action effect by the action effect executing means, the effect during variable display may be executed by the effect during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 18-9 (B3), the change effect executing means may be able to execute the change effect in response to the execution of the effect during variable display by the effect executing means during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, it may be possible to execute the change effect at different ratios depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the variable display effect is executed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, before the performance during variable display is executed by the performance execution means during variable display, the change performance by the change performance execution means does not need to be executed corresponding to the case where the display mode of the corresponding display is a specific mode. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the corresponding display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and depending on the setting of the setting means, the variable display effect may be executed in one of the plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 is provided with setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 89AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A, or the like, which can detect the player's movement; Acceleration effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that can execute step 87AKS051 of the variable display effect process, for example, that can execute the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the effect to promote the action of the player, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the action effect based on the detection result of the detection means, such as the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process, and that can execute the suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the corresponding display will change, for example, step 87A of the variable display effect process. Suggestive effect execution means such as effect control CPU 120 for executing KS043; corresponding display means can display the corresponding display in one of a plurality of display modes including, for example, a specific mode such as red display using display image 87AKC4, for example, display colors corresponding to display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4; The promotion effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display corresponding to 7AKF1 to 87AKF3, and the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect in any of a plurality of effect modes such as the suggestive mode according to the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. The corresponding display is displayed by, for example, as in the example 89AK01 of determining the promotion effect according to the suggestive effect in FIGS. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 18-9 (B3), after displaying the corresponding display by the corresponding display means and before executing the action effect by the action effect executing means, the effect during variable display may be executed by the effect during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, during the cut-in effect at the second timing in FIG. 18-9 (B3), it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display in response to the execution of the effect during variable display by the effect executing means during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when one of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41, it may be possible to change the display mode of the corresponding display at a different rate depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the effect during variable display is executed. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the determination example 87AK22 of the change pattern, the display mode of the corresponding display does not need to be changed in response to the case where the display mode of the corresponding display is the specific mode before execution of the effect during variable display by the effect execution means during variable display. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and the corresponding display may be displayed in one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 may be provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the variable display effect may be executed in one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios according to the setting of the setting means. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 17-6 is provided with setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. As a result, the expectation of the player can be appropriately heightened by the performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10: general winning port 11: main board 12: performance control board 13: audio control board 14: LED control board 15: relay board 17: special variable winning ball device 20: normal symbol display device 21: gate switches 22A, 22B: starting port switch 23: first count switch 24: second count switch 30: batting operation Handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a special effect and capable of executing the special effect and the change effect;
a movable body operably provided;
a detection means capable of detecting the action of a player;
a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
promotional effect execution means capable of executing a promotional effect that promotes the action of the player;
an action effect execution means capable of executing an action effect based on the detection result of the detection means;
a variable display effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined variable display effect during execution of the variable display,
The correspondence display means can display the correspondence display in one of a plurality of display modes,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode,
The variable-display effect executing means can execute the variable-display effect in one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode,
The effect during variable display is executed by the special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the corresponding display,
The promotion effect is executed by the special mode at a different rate according to the effect mode of the effect during variable display,
Controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the production mode of the promotion production,
The display mode of the corresponding display changes at a different rate according to the effect mode of the variable display effect,
The change effect includes a first change effect that changes the display mode of a predetermined display, and a second change effect that changes the display mode of a specific display different from the predetermined display,
The first change effect is
It is a production that is executed during variable display,
It is a production corresponding to the special production,
It is an effect executed before the special effect,
The second change effect is
It is a production that does not correspond to the special production,
A production that is executed during the advantageous state,
The display mode of the predetermined display includes a first predetermined mode, a second predetermined mode, and a specific mode, which are different from each other,
The production executing means is
a special effect of notifying a first content advantageous to the player in response to the fact that the display mode of the predetermined display has changed to the specific mode by executing the first change effect;
a predetermined effect of notifying a second content advantageous to the player different from the first content by changing the display mode of the specific display by executing the second change performance;
a specific effect using the movable body in which at least a part of the effect mode is common between when the first change effect is executed and when the second change effect is executed;
an effect production that enhances the production effect of the specific production in response to the execution of the specific production,
When the special effect is executed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the first predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect, and when the special effect is performed in response to the display mode of the predetermined display changing from the second predetermined mode to the specific mode due to the first change effect, the advantage of the first content notified by the special effect is different,
The effect performance executed corresponding to the execution of the specific effect accompanying the execution of the first change production and the effect production executed corresponding to the execution of the specific production accompanying the execution of the second change production differ in at least part of the production mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images